Afm Da40

AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL
DA40
Airworthiness Category : Normal, Utility

Requirement : JAR-23
Serial Number :40.698
Registration :N216DG
, Doc. No. : 6.01.01-E
Date of Issue : 26 June 2000
Signature
Authority
Stamp A-1 030 Wim, Sclmirchgassc 11
Date of approval 0 9. DEZ. Z.Oa4
This Flight Manuaj has been verified for EASA by the Austrian Civil Aviation Authority
J Austro Control (ACG) as Primary Certification Authority (PCA) in accordance with the
I va lid Certifica1ion Procedures and approved by EASA with approval no ..2.004 :- A~3Zf,
f Th is Flight Manual has been approved by EASA on behalf of CAAC-MD .
DIAMOND AIRCRAFT INDUSTRIES GMBH

N.A OTTO-STR. 5
A-2700 WIENER NEUSTADT
A USTRIA page 0 - 0, R~v. 6
~V/U~/UO mun U~:~O ~AA OD~ 0~/ ~~!U ~AA LAA~U ANM-lUUL ~3 ~011
AmSafe, Inc.
Inflatable Restraints Division
1043 N. 47'" Avenue
Phoenix, AZ., 85043
Document No.: E509609
r FAA APPROVED
AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
to
PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK AND
FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL
for
Diamond Aircraft Industries, Inc.
Model DA40
Aircraft Reg. No. N 2 16 DG Aircraft SIN: 40 •698
This supplement must be attached to the Pilot's Operating Handbook and FAA Approved Airplane Flight
Manual for Diamond Aircraft Model DA 40 when the. Airplane Is modified by the installation of AmSafe
Aviation Inflatable Restraint (AAIR,.) System, V23 Version in accordance with STC SA01918LA.
c The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the basic manual only in those areas listed
herein. For limitations, procedures, and performance information not contained in this supplement, consult
the basic Airplane Flight Manual.
FAA APPROVED
~~·~-eI)-VI)~
Manager, Flight Test Branch, ANM-160L
Federal Aviation Administration
Los Angeles Aircraft Certification Office
Transport Airplane Directorate
DATES~~ -?..i~ <)... ll 0 b
a
~-
1
Page 1 of3
DA40AFM • Diamond AIRCRAFT
Introduction
I 0.1 APPROVAL
I The content of approved chapters is approved by EASA. All other content is approved
I by DAI under the authority of EASA DOA No. EASA.21 J.052 in accordance with Part 21.
0.2 RECORD OF REVISIONS
All revisions of this manual, with the exception of-
• Temporary Revisions,
• updates of the modification level (Section 1.1 ),
• updated mass and balance information (Section 6.3),
• updates of the Equipment Inventory (Section 6.5), and
• updates of the List of Supplements (Section 9.2)
I must be recorded in the following table.
( The new or amended text is indicated by a vertical black line at the left hand side of the
revised page, with the revision number and date appearing at the bottom of the page.
NOTE
If pages are revised which contain information valid for your
particular serial number (modification level of the airplane,
weighing data, Equipment Inventory, List of Supplements),
then this information must be transferred to the new pages
in hand-writing.
Temporary Revisions, if applicable, are inserted into this manual. Temporary Revisions
are used to provide information on systems or equipment until the next 'permanent'
Revision of the Airplane Flight Manual. When a 'permanenr Revision covers a Mandatory
or Optional Design Change Advisory (MAM or OAM), then the corresponding Temporary
Revision is superseded. For example: Revision 5 covers OAM-40-061, therefore the
L Temporary Revision TR-OAM-40-061 is superseded by the 'permanent' Revision 5.
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 0-1

Introduction
Rev:
flil:
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
\,
corrections all all
Winkler for
ACGj
0 0-2, 0-4 thru 0-7
OAM40-060 1-16
(White Wire --- ·---- --
2-1, 2-7thru 2-9,

optional)
2-13thru2-19
3-7,3-8,3-19,
OAM40-068 approved by
3-20, 3-25, 3-26
(Essential Bus) lng. Andreas
4A-3 thru 4A·8, 19-Dec-2000 25-Jan-2001
4A Winkler for
OAM40-073 4A-14, 4A·15 ACG!
(LASAR
optional)
46 46-4 thru 46-6
6-1.6-2. )
6-12 thru 6-14
corrections
7-1,7-8,7-14.
7-28 thru 7-38
0-2 thru 0-7
OAM40-0li4 1-2
(Night VFR) 2-1.2-8,2-9, 2-12,
2-15 thru 2-20
DAM 40-069
3·1, 3-25 thru 3-27 [approved by
(control surf.
4A-1, lng. Andreas
gustlock) 4A 05-Feb-2001 02 Jul 2001
4A-8 thru 4A-31 Winkler for
5-7.5-14,5-16 ACG!
OAM40-070
(tow bar) 6-7,6-9,
6-12 thru 6-14
corrections 7-32, 7-35. 7-36
8-1 thru 8-9
(J
Page0-2 Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
DA40AFM .Diamond AIRCRAFT
Introduction
r ApprQVal
i OAM40-067 (approved by
I (IFR) lng. Andreas
4 all all 09 Apr 2001 02 Jul2001
i Winkler for
corrections ACG(
OAM40-061
(KAP 140 0 0-1 thru 0·8
autopilot)
1-2. 1-5, 1-14

OAM 40-073
(SiickSTART)
2-1, 2-16, 2-22.
OAM40-081 2-23, 2-24
(door lock) 3-13,3-18, 3-22.
3-23, 3-24, 3-31,
OAM 40-085 3-36
(KX 155A
(_ as COM 1) 4A
4A-8, 4A-1 0, 4A-22.
4A-23, 4A-26
09 Sep 2001
(approved by
lng. Andreas
09 Sep 2001
! OAM's 40-092 Winkler for
I thru 40-094 48 48-1,48-8 ACG]
' (Mikrotechna
ASI. altimeter.
VSI) 6-5, 6-8 thru 6-17
MAM 40-039/a 7-13,7-14,7-33,

(VM 1000) 7-35
1 MAM40-048
8 8-10
(RH emerg.
window)
9 9-3, 9-4. 9-5

corrections
L
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 0-3
Introduction .Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
·.Rev,
No.,'.·',··. R..eason.·
. .•. .•. ·.·. .
type certifi-
cation in China
0-0, 0-5, 0-6
Date of
Revision
15 Sep 2004
I
EASAApp~
al No.><
2004-12326
[lng.Andreas
Winkler for
ACG]
IV
MAM-40-
-047.-069,
-075. -078.
t:
-096,-099, !
-123e. -133.
-141,-174,
-175;
OAM-40-
-063/b, -071/c,
-077, -078,
-080. -083/a,
-090, -091,
-097. -098.
-103.-104,
-105.-106, Revision No. 7
)
-111, -112, of the AFM
(11 Aug 2006
-114,-115, Doc. No.
Dipl.-lng.
-117,-117/a, 6.01.01-E is
all except cover (FH)
-119,-120, all 15 Jul 2006 approved
page Manfred
-121.-122. under the
Reichel
-124,-127, authority of
forDAI]
-128,-138. DOANo.
-140,-154. EASA.21J.052
-165, -167.
-168,-179,
-181,-183,
-185, -186,
-190, -198,
-200.-206.
-237, 250/a;
RAM-40-
-014;
corrections;
double-sided
layout
I
I
1
(J
Page 0-4 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Introduction
r
-116, -227/a,
-313,-344,
-360/a, -378.
-401,-415, Revision No. 8
-428, ·446; oftheAFM
Doc. No.
OAM-40- 6.01.01-E is
all except cover
-217,-251. all 01 Dec 2010 approved
-253/b, 258,
page
under the
-267, -277/a, authority of
-279, 283/a, DOANo.
-284, ·289, EASA.21J.052
-326, -327;
corrections
c I
L
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page0-5
DA40AFM
0.3 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
0 0-0 15-Sep-2004 1-1 01-Dec-2010

0-0a 15-Sep-2004 1-2 01-Dec-201 0
0-1 01-Dec-2010 1-3 01-Dec-2010
0-2 01-Dec-2010 1-4 01-Dec-2010
0-3 01-Dec-2010 1-5 01-Dec-201 0
0-4 01-Dec-201 0 1-6 01-Dec-201 0
0-5 01-Dec-2010 1-7 01-Dec-201 0
0-6 01-Dec-2010 1-8 01-Dec-2010
0-7 01-Dec-2010 1-9 01-Dec-201 0
0-8 0 1-Dec-201 0
0-9 01-Dec-2010
1-10
1-11
01-Dec-201 0
01-Dec-2010 )
0-10 01-Dec-2010 1-12 01-Dec-2010
0-11 01-Dec-2010 1-13 01-Dec-2010
0-12 01-Dec-2010 1-14 01-Dec-2010
0-13 01-Dec-2010 1-15 01-Dec-2010
0-14 01-Dec-2010 1-16 01-Dec-201 0
1-17 01-Dec-2010
1-18 01-Dec-2010
1-19 01-Dec-201 0
1-20 01-Dec-2010
1-21 01-Dec-2010
1-22 01-Dec-2010
1-23 01-Dec-2010
1-24 01-Dec-2010
(J
Page 0-6 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. #6.01.01-E
Introduction
r 2 I appr. 2-1 01-Dec-201 0 2 appr. 2-28 01-Dec-2010
appr. 2-2 01-Dec-2010 appr. 2-29 01-Dec-2010
appr. 2-3 01-Dec-201 0 appr. 2-30 01-Dec-2010
appr. 2-4 01-Dec-2010 appr. 2-31 01-Dec-2010
appr. 2-5 01-Dec-201 0 appr. 2-32 01-Dec-2010
appr. 2-6 01-Dec-2010 appr. 2-33 01-Dec-2010
appr. 2-7 01-Dec-2010 appr. 2-34 01-Dec-2010
appr. 2-8 01-Dec-2010

appr. 2-9 01-Dec-201 0
appr. 2-10 01-Dec-2010
appr. 2-11 01-Dec-2010
appr. 2-12 01-Dec-201 0

( appr. 2-13 01-Dec-2010
appr. 2-14 01-Dec-201 0
appr. 2-15 01-Dec-2010
appr. 2-16 01-Dec-201 0
appr. 2-17 01-Dec-2010
appr. 2-18 01-Dec-2010

appr. 2-19 01-Dec-2010
appr. 2-20 01-Dec-201 0
appr. 2-21 01-Dec-201 0
appr. 2-22 01-Dec-201 0
appr. 2-23 01-Dec-2010
appr. 2-24 01-Dec-201 0
appr. 2-25 01-Dec-2010
L appr. 2-26
appr. 2-27
01-Dec-2010
01-Dec-2010
I Doc.# 6.01.01-E I Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 I Page 0-7 I

DA40AFM
\~
3 3-1 01-Dec-2010 3 3-29 01-Dec-201 0
3-2 01-Dec-201 0 3-30 01-Dec-2010
3-3 01-Dec-2010 3-31 01-Dec-2010
3-4 01-Dec-201 0 3-32 01-Dec-2010
3-5 01-Dec-2010 3-33 01-Dec-201 0
3-6 01-Dec-201 0 3-34 01-Dec-201 0
3-7 01-Dec-201 0 3-35 01-Dec-2010
3-8 01-Dec-201 0 3-36 01-Dec-2010
3-9 01-Dec-2010 3-37 01-Dec-201 0
3-10 01-Dec-201 0 3-38 01-Dec-2010
3-11 01-Dec-2010 3-39 01-Dec-2010
3-12 01-Dec-201 0 3-40 01-Dec-201 0
3-13 01-Dec-201 0 3-41
3-42
01-Dec-2010
01-Dec-2010
)
3-14 01-Dec-2010
3-15 01-Dec-2010
3-16 01-Dec-2010
3-17 01-Dec-2010
3-18 01-Dec-201 0
3-19 01-Dec-201 0
3-20 01-Dec-201 0
3-21 01-Dec-201 0
3-22 01-Dec-2010
3-23 01-Dec-2010
3-24 01-Dec-201 0
3-25 01-Dec-201 0
(J
3-26 01-Dec-201 0
3-27 01-Dec-2010
3-28 01-Dec-2010
Page 0-8 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

Introduction
r lillltDi
4A I 4A-1 I 01-Dec-201 0 4A 4A-28 01-Dec-2010
4A-2 01-Dec-201 0 4A-29 01-Dec-201 0
4A-3 01-Dec-201 0 4A-30 01-Dec-2010
4A-4 01-Dec-201 0 4A-31 01-Dec-2010
4A-5 01-Dec-201 0 4A-32 01-Dec-2010
4A-6 01-Dec-2010 4A-33 01-Dec-2010
4A-7 0 1-Dec-20 10 4A-34 01-Dec-2010
4A-8 01-Dec-2010 4A-35 01-Dec-2010
4A-9 01-Dec-201 0 4A-36 01-Dec-2010
4A-10 01-Dec-201 0 4A-37 01-Dec-2010
4A-11 01-Dec-2010 4A-38 01-Dec-2010
4A-39 01-Dec-2010
(_ I I
4A-12
4A-13
01-Dec-201 0
01-Dec-201 0 4A-40 0 1-Dec-201 0
4A-14 01-Dec-2010
4A-15 01-Dec-201 0
4A-16 01-Dec-2010
4A-17 01-Dec-201 0
4A-18 01-Dec-201 0
4A-19 01-Dec-201 0
4A-20 01-Dec-201 0
4A-21 01-Dec-201 0
4A-22 01-Dec-201 0
4A-23 01-Dec-201 0
4A-24 01-Dec-201 0
4A-25 01-Dec-2010
L I I 4A-26
4A-27
01-Dec-2010
01-Dec-2010
[Doc.# 6.01.01-E I Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 I Page 0- 9 I

DA40AFM
,,
48 48-1 01-Dec-201 0 5 5-1 01-Dec-2010
48-2 01-Dec-201 0 5-2 01-Dec-2010

48-3 01-Dec-2010 5-3 01-Dec-2010
48-4 01-Dec-201 0 5-4 01-Dec-2010
48-5 01-Dec-201 0 5-5 01-Dec-201 0
48-6 01-Dec-2010 5-6 01-Dec-201 0

48-7 01-Dec-201 0 5-7 01-Dec-2010
48-8 01-Dec-201 0 5-8 01-Dec-2010
48-9 01-Dec-201 0 5-9 01-Dec-2010
48-10 01-Dec-2010 5-10 01-Dec-2010
48-11 01-Dec-2010 5-11 01-Dec-2010
48-12 01-Dec-201 0 5-12
5-13
01-Dec-2010
01-Dec-2010
)
5-14 . 01-Dec-2010
5-15 01-Dec-2010
5-16 01-Dec-2010
5-17 01-Dec-2010
5-18 01-Dec-2010
5-19 01-Dec-2010
5-20 01-Dec-2010
5-21 01-Dec-2010
5-22 01-Dec-2010
5-23 01-Dec-201 0
5-24 01-Dec-2010
/J
Page 0-10 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E
Introduction
r 6 6-1 01-Dec-2010 6 6-28 01-Dec-2010
6-2 01-Dec-2010 6-29 01-Dec-2010
6-3 01-Dec-201 0 6-30 01-Dec-2010
6-4 01-Dec-2010 6-31 01-Dec-2010
6-5 01-Dec-2010 6-32 01-Dec-2010
6-6 01-Dec-2010
6-7 01-Dec-2010
6-8 01-Dec-2010
6-9 01-Dec-2010
6-10 01-Dec-2010
6-11 01-Dec-2010
( 6-12
6-13
01-Dec-201 0
01-Dec-2010
6-14 01-Dec-201 0
6-15 01-Dec-201 0
6-16 01-Dec-201 0
6-17 01-Dec-201 0
6-18 01-Dec-2010
6-19 01-Dec-2010
6-20 01-Dec-2010
6-21 01-Dec-201 0
6-22 01-Dec-2010
6-23 01-Dec-2010
6-24 01-Dec-2010
6-25 01-Dec-2010
L 6-26
6-27
01-Dec-201 0
01-Dec-201 0
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 Page 0-11

DA40AFM
7 7-1 01-Dec-201 0 7 7-28 01-Dec-2010
7-2 01-Dec-201 0 7-29 01-Dec-2010
7-3 01-Dec-2010 7-30 01-Dec-2010
7-4 01-Dec-201 0 7-31 01-Dec-201 0
7-5 01-Dec-201 0 7-32 01-Dec-2010
7-6 01-Dec-2010 7-33 01-Dec-2010
7-7 01-Dec-201 0 7-34 01-Dec-2010
7-8 01-Dec-2010 7-35 01-Dec-201 0
7-9 01-Dec-2010 7-36 01-Dec-201 0
7-10 01-Dec-2010 7-37 01-Dec-2010
7-11 01-Dec-2010 7-38 01-Dec-2010
7-12
7-13
01-Dec-201 0
01-Dec-2010
7-39
7-40
01-Dec-201 o
01-Dec-2010
)
7-14 01-Dec-201 0 7-41 01-Dec-2010
7-15 01-Dec-201 0 7-42 01-Dec-201 0
7-16 01-Dec-2010 7-43 01-Dec-201 0
7-17 01-Dec-201 0 7-44 01-Dec-201 0
7-18 01-Dec-201 0 7-45 01-Dec-201 0
7-19 01-Dec-201 0 7-46 01-Dec-201 0
7-20 01-Dec-2010 7-47 01-Dec-201 0
7-21 01-Dec-2010 7-48 01-Dec-201 0
7-22 01-Dec-2010 7-49 01-Dec-201 0
7-23 01-Dec-2010 7-50 01-Dec-201 0
7-24 01-Dec-201 0 7-51 01-Dec-2010
7-25 01-Dec-201 0 7-52 01-Dec-2010
7-26
7-27
01-Dec-2010
01-Dec-2010
7-53
7-54
01-Dec-2010
01-Dec-201 0
'J
Page 0-12 Rev,8 01-Dec-2010 Doc, # 6.01.01-E
Introduction
r d\IUlW@.
9
!(!, ...
9-1 01-Dec-2010
7-56 01-Dec-2010 9-2 01-Dec-2010

7-57 01-Dec-2010 9-3 01-Dec-2010
7-58 01-Dec-2010 9-4 01-Dec-2010
9-5 01-Dec-2010
9-6 01-Dec-2010
-==='!
8 I 8-1 01-Dec-2010
8-2 01-Dec-2010
8-3 01-Dec-2010
8-4 01-Dec-2010
8-5 01-Dec-2010
c: 8-6
8-7
8-8
01-Dec-2010
01-Dec-2010
01-Dec-2010
8-9 01-Dec-2010
8-10 01-Dec-2010
8-11 01-Dec-2010
8-12 01-Dec-2010
L
I Doc.# 6.01.01-E I Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 I Pa~ 3
Introduction DA40AFM
0.4 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
GENERAL
(a non-approved chapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
OPERATING LIMITATIONS
(an approved chapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
(a non-approved chapter) .....................................•· . 3
NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES

(a non-approved chapter) ...................................... 4A
ABNORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES

(a non-approved chapter) ...................................... 48 \)
PERFORMANCE
MASS AND BALANCE I EQUIPMENT LIST

DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS

(a non-approved chapter) ....................................... 7
AIRPLANE HANDLING, CARE AND MAINTENANCE

SUPPLEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Page 0 -14 Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

I
DA40AFM • DiamondAIRCRAFT Gene<all
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL
Page
1.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................... 1-2

1.2 CERTIFICATION BASIS .................................. 1-5
1.3 WARNINGS, CAUTIONS AND NOTES ...................... 1-5
1.4 DIMENSIONS .......................................... 1-6
1.5 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ....................... 1-8
1.6 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT ............................. 1-18
(e 1.6.1 CONVERSION FACTORS .......................... 1-18
1.6.2 CONVERSION CHART LITERS I US GALLONS ......... 1-20
1.7 THREE-VIEW DRAWING ................................ 1-21
1.8 SOURCE DOCUMENTATION ............................ 1-22
1.8.1 ENGINE ........................................ 1-22
1.8.2 PROPELLER .................................... 1-23
1.8.3 ENGINE INSTRUMENTS ........................... 1-23
1.8.4 IGNITION CONTROL UNIT ......................... 1-24
L
I Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 1 -1
~Diamond
AIRCRAFT
DA40 AFM
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This Airplane Flight Manual has been prepared in order to provide pilots and instructors
with all the information required for the safe and efficient operation of the airplane.
The Airplane Flight Manual includes all the data which must be made available to the pilot
according to the JAR-23 requirement. Beyond this , it contains further data and operating
instructions which, in the manufacturer's opinion, could be of value to the pilot.
This Airplane Flight Manual is valid for all serial numbers. Equipment and modification
level (design details) of the airplane may vary from serial number to serial number.
Therefore, some of the information contained in this manual is applicable depending on
the respective equipment and modification level. The exact equipment of your serial
number is recorded in the Equipment Inventory in Section 6.5. The modification level is
recorded in the following table (as far as necessary for this manual).
Modification !! ·9 ' " Sourt e Installed (' J
RH Emergency Window MAM 40-048 ~ yes 1V'no

Modified MLG Strut MAM 40-123/e o yes o no
1200 kg Maximum Take-Off Mass MAM 40-227 o yes o no
Autopilot OAM 40-061 o yes o no
Tow-Plane Operation OAM 40-063/b o yes o no
Emergency Switch OAM 40-067 o yes o no
Essential Bus OAM 40-068 o yes o no

Long Range Tank OAM 40-071/b o yes o no
Alternate Static Valve OAM 40-072 o yes o no

SlickSTART Ignition System OAM 40-073 o yes o no
MT P-420-1 0 Governor OAM 40-077 o yes o no
Operation with Winter Kit OAM 40-078 o yes o no
Page 1-2 Rev . 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

IDA40AFM .Diamond AIRCRAFT
General'
r Door Locking System OAM40-081 o yes o no
NLG Speedkit OAM 40-105 o yes o no
MLG Speedkit OAM 40-106 o yes o no
Essential Tie Relay Bypass OAM40-126 o yes o no
Baggage Extension OAM 40-163 o yes o no
Baggage Tray* OAM 40-164 o yes o no
Winter Baffle Fresh Air Inlet OAM40-183 o yes o no
Nose Landing Gear Tie-Down OAM 40-200 o yes o no
I Electrical Rudder Pedal Adjustment OAM40-251 o yes o no
I CO Monitor OAM40-253 o yes o no
c I
I
I
Autopilot Static Source
Tall Main Landing Gear
ELT Artex ME 406 'ACE'
OAM 40-267
OAM40-283
OAM40-284
o yes
o yes
o yes
o no
o no
o no
I MT P-860-23 Governor OAM40-289 o yes o no
I Emergency Axe OAM 40-326 o yes o no
*For installation of the Baggage Tray the Baggage Extension must be installed.
This Airplane Flight Manual must be kept on board the airplane at all times. Its designated
place is the side bag of the forward left seat.
This Airplane Flight Manual constitutes an FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual for
US registered airplanes in accordance with FAA regulation 14 CFR, Part 21.29.
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page1-3

I~.,_
G_e_n_era_'_ _ _ _ _ _• __ D_i_a_"_'_!_1?_!J_A_~___ _ _ __.JI
o_A_4_o_A_FM ,
CAUTION
The DA 40 is a single engine airplane. When the operating
limitations and maintenance requirements are complied with,
it has the high degree of reliability which is required by the
certification basis. Nevertheless, an engine failure is not
completely impossible. For this reason, flights during the
night, on top, under instrument meteorological conditions
(IMC), or above terrain which is unsuitable for a landing,
constitute a risk. It is therefore highly recommended to select
flight times and flight routes such that this risk is minimized.
()
Page 1-4 Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

• Diamond AIRCRAFT
1.2 CERTIFICATION BASIS
This airplane has been type certified in accordance with the JM JCNP procedure. The
certification basis is JAR-23, published on 11-Mar-1994.
1.3 WARNINGS. CAUTIONS AND NOTES
Special statements in the Airplane Flight Manual concerning the safety or operation of
the airplane are highlighted by being prefixed by one of the following terms:
WARNING
means that the non-observation of the corresponding
procedure leads to an immediate or important degradation
(_ in flight safety.
CAUTION
means that the non-observation of the corresponding
procedure leads to a minor or to a more or less long term
degradation in flight safety.
NOTE
draws the attention to any special item not directly related to
safety but which is important or unusual.
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 1-5

IGeno,.l .Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
1.4 DIMENSIONS
~
Overall Dimensions
Span appr. 11.94 m appr. 39 ft 2 in

Length appr. 8.01 m appr. 26 ft 3 in
Height appr. 1.97m appr. 6ft 6 in
Wing
Airfoil Wortmann FX 63-137/20- W4

Wing Area appr. 13.54 m2 appr. 145.7 sq.ft.
Mean aerodynamic
chord (MAC) appr. 1.121 m appr. 3ft 8.1 in
Aspect ratio appr. 10.53
Dihedral
Leading edge sweep
appr. 5o
appr. 1°
)
Aileron
Area (total, left+ right) appr. 0.654 m2 appr. 7.0 sq.ft.
Wing Flaps
Area (total, left+ right) appr. 1.56 m2 appr. 16.8 sq.ft.
Horizontal Tail
Area appr. 2.34 m2 appr. 25.2 sq.ft.

Elevator area appr. 0.665 m2 appr. 7.2 sq.ft.
Angle of incidence appr. -3.0° relative to longitudinal axis of airplane
'J
Page 1-6 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E
IDA~AFM .Diamond AIRCRAFT Gonenll
r Vertical Tail
Area appr. 1.60 m2 appr. 17.2 sq.ft.

Rudder area appr. 0.47 m 2 appr. 5.1 sq.ft.
Landing Gear
Track appr. 2.97 m appr. 9 ft 9 in

Wheelbase appr. 1.68 m appr. 5 ft 6 in
Nose wheel 5.00-5; 6 PR, 120 mph
I Main wheel (a) 6.00-6; 6 PR, 120 mph

I in combination with any MLG strut
c- I
I
I
(b) 15 x 6.0-6; 6 PR, 160 mph
only in combination with the
(MAM 40-123/e) or the "tall" (OAM 40-283)
"thin"
I MLG strut
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page1-7

IG-e-ne_ra_~
L- _ _ _ _ _ _• _ _ll_'l_·a_m_A_1l'_cf!_Ad_FT
___o_A_4o_A_F_M_ _____.I ~
1.5 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Cal Airspeeds
CAS: Calibrated Airspeed. Indicated airspeed, corrected for installation and

instrument errors. CAS equals TAS at standard atmospheric conditions at MSL.
lAS: Indicated Airspeed as shown on an airspeed indicator.
KCAS: CAS in knots.
KIAS: lAS in knots.
TAS: True Airspeed. The speed of the airplane relative to the air. TAS is CAS
corrected for errors due to altitude and temperature.
Maneuvering Speed. Full or abrupt control surface movement is not permissible

above this speed. )
vFE: Max. Flaps Extended Speed. This speed must not be exceeded \'\lith the given
flap setting.
vNE: Never Exceed Speed in smooth air. This speed must not be exceeded in any
operation.
vNo Maximum Structural Cruising Speed. This speed may be exceeded only in
smooth air, and then only with caution.
v8 : Stalling Speed, or the minimum continuous speed at which the airplane is still
controllable in the given configuration.
v80: Stalling Speed, or the minimum continuous speed at which the airplane is still
controllable in the landing configuration.
Best Angle-of-Climb Speed.
Best Rate-of-Climb Speed.

(b) Meteorological Terms
ISA: International Standard Atmosphere. Conditions at which air is

identified as an ideal dry gas. The temperature at mean sea level is
15 oc (59 °F), air pressure at MSL is 1013.25 hPa (29.92 inHg); the
temperature gradient up to the altitude at which the temperature
reaches -56.5 oc (-69.7 °F) is -0.0065 °C/m (-0.00357 °F/ft), and
above this 0 °C/m (0 °F/ft).
MSL: Mean Sea Level.
OAT: Outside Air Temperature.
QNH: Theoretical atmospheric pressure at MSL, calculated from the

elevation of the measuring point above MSL and the actual
atmospheric pressure at the measuring point.
c Indicated Pressure Altitude:

Altitude reading with altimeter set to 1013.25 hPa (29.92 inHg).
Pressure Altitude: Altitude above MSL, indicated by a barometric altimeter which is set
to 1013.25 hPa (29.92 inHg). The Pressure Altitude is the Indicated
Pressure Altitude corrected for installation and instrument errors.
In this Airplane Flight Manual altimeter instrument errors are regarded

as zero.
Density Altitude: Altitude in ISA conditions at which the air density is equal to the
current air density.
Wind: The wind speeds which are shown as variables in the diagrams in
this manual should be regarded as headwind or downwind
components of the measured wind.
L
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Page 1-9
IGeneml
4rADiamond
~ AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
(c) Flight Performance and Flight Planning
Demonstrated Crosswind Component:

The speed of the crosswind component at which adequate
maneuverability for take-off and landing has been demonstrated during
type certification.
MET: Weather, weather advice.
NAV: Navigation, route planning.
(d) Mass and Balance (M&B. W&Bl
DP: Datum Plane; an imaginary vertical plane from which all horizontal
distances for center of gravity calculations are measured.
Moment Arm: The horizontal distance from the Datum Plane to the Center of Gravity )
of a component.
Moment: The mass of a component multiplied by its moment arm.
CG: Center of Gravity, also called 'center of mass'. Imaginary point in which
the airplane mass is assumed to be concentrated for mass and balance
calculations. Its distance from the Datum Plane is equal to the Center
of Gravity Moment Arm.
Center of Gravity Moment Arm:

The Moment Arm which is obtained if one divides the sum of the individual
moments of the airplane by its total mass.
Center of Gravity Limits:

The Center of Gravity range within which the airplane, at a given mass,
must be operated.
Page 1 -10 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

IDA40AFM .Diamond AIRCRAFT
Gene<all
r Usable Fuel: The quantity of fuel available for flight planning.
Unusable Fuel: The quantity of fuel remaining in the tank which cannot be used for flight.
Empty Mass: The mass of the airplane including unusable fuel, all operating
consumables and the maximum quantity of oil.
Useful Load: The difference between take-off mass and empty mass.
Maximum Take-off Mass:

The maximum permissible mass for take-off.
Maximum Landing Mass:

The highest mass for landing conditions atthe maximum descent velocity.
This velocity was used in the strength calculations to determine the
landing gear loads during a particularly hard landing.
(_ (e) Engine
Take-off Power:
Maximum permissible engine output power for take-off.
Maximum Continuous Power:

Maximum permissible engine output power used continuously during
flight.
CHT: Cylinder Head Temperature.
EGT: Exhaust Gas Temperature.
L
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 Page 1 -11
IGeneral .Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA 40 AFM I
1 . - - - - - - - - - - - - - l \~
m Designation of the Circuit Breakers on the Instrument Panel

Asymmetric Instrument Panel (Circuit Breakers Right Hand)
AVIONICS:
ADF Automatic Direction Finder

AUDIO Audio Panel/Intercom
AUTOPILOT Autopilot
AVIONIC BUS Avionic Bus
DME Distance Measuring Equipment
ESSENTIAL AVIONIC Essential Avionic Bus
GPS Global Positioning System
GPS2 Global Positioning System #2
NAV/COM1 Navigation/Communication #1
NAV/COM2
STRIKE
Navigation/Communication #2
Strike Finder
')
XPDR Transponder
ENGINE:
IGNITION Ignition
INST.1 Engine Instrument VM 1000
START Starter
Page 1 -12 Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

r LIGHTING:
FLOOD Flood Light

INST. Instrument Lights
LANDING Landing Light
POSITION Position Lights
STROBE Strobe Light (=Anti Collision Light = ACL)
TAXI/MAP Taxi LighUMap Light
SYSTEMS:
ANN UN. Annunciator Panel

DG Directional Gyro
FAN/OAT Fan/Outside Air Temperature Indicator
FLAPS Flaps
(_ FUEL PUMP
HORIZON
Fuel Pump
Artificial Horizon (Attitude Gyro)
PITOTHEAT Pitot Heating System
T&B Turn & Bank Indicator
ELECTRICAL:
ALT. Alternator
ALT. CONT. Alternator Control
ALT. PROT. Alternator Protection
BATT. Battery
ESSENTIAL TIE Bus Interconnection
MAIN TIE Bus Interconnection
MASTER CONTROL Master Control (avionic master switch, essential bus
switch, essential avionics relay, bus interconnection
L relay, avionics master relay)
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 Page 1 -13

General .~.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
Symmetric Instrument Panel (Circuit Breakers Bottom Side}
MAIN BUS:
ALT. Alternator
ALT. CONT. Alternator Control
ALT. PROT. Alternator Protection
AV.BUS Avionic Bus
DG Directional Gyro
FAN/OAT Fan/Outside Air Temperature Indicator
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
IGNITION Ignition
INST. Instrument Lights
MAIN TIE Bus Interconnection
POSITION Position Lights
START Starter )
STROBE Strobe Lights (Anti Collision Lights, ACLs)
T&B Turn & Bank Indicator
TAXI/MAP Taxi LighUMap Light
(J
IOA40AFM • Diamond AIRCRAFT
Genenoll
MAIN AV. BUS (Main Avionic Bus):
ADF Automatic Direction Finder

AUDIO Audio Panel/Intercom
AUTO PILOT Autopilot
COM2 Communication #2
COM/NAV2 Communication I Navigation #2
DME Distance Measuring Equipment
GPS/NAV2 Global Positioning System/Navigation #2
STRIKE Strike Finder
Wx500 Storms cope
I TAS Traffic Advisory System
ESS. AV. BUS (Essential Avionic-Bus):

( COM1 Communication #1
COM/NAV1 Communication/Navigation #1
GPS/NAV1 Global Positioning System/Navigation #1
XPDR Transponder
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. a 0 1-Dec-2010 Page 1- 15

DA40AFM
·.·~
ESSENTIAL BUS:
AN NUN. Annunciator Panel

BATT. Battery
ESS.AV. Essential Avionic-Bus
ESS TIE Bus Interconnection
FLAPS Flaps
FLOOD Flood Light
HORIZON Artificial Horizon (Attitude Gyro)
INST.1 Engine Instrument VM 1000
LANDING Landing Light
MASTER CONTROL Master Control (avionic master switch, essential bus
switch, essential avionics relay, bus interconnection
relay, avionics master relay)
PITOT Pitot Heating System
Page 1 -16 Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

IDA40AFM • Diamond AIRCRAFT General I
Cgl Equipment
ELT: Emergency Locator Transmitter.
Chl Design Change Advisories
MAM: Mandatory Design Change Advisory.
OAM: Optional Design Change Advisory.
(i) Miscellaneous
ACG: Austro Control GmbH (formerly BAZ, Federal Office of Civil Aviation).
ATC: Air Traffic Control.
c CFRP:
GFRP:
Carbon Fiber Reinforced Plastic.
Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic.
JAR: Joint Aviation Requirements.
JCNP: Joint CertificationNalidation Procedure.
PCA: Primary Certification Authority.
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 1 -17

I
GenenO .Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
1.6 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
1.6.1 CONVERSION FACTORS
······
Dimension SI-Urilts US UnitS Corive..Siori
Length [mm) millimeters [in] inches [mm] I 25.4=[in]
[m] meters [ft] feet [m] I 0.3048=[ft]
[km] kilometers [NM] nautical [km] 11.852 =[NM]
miles
Volume [I] liters [US gal] US gallons [I] I 3. 7854=[US gal]
[qts] US quarts [I] I 0.9464 =[qts]
Speed [kmlh] kilometers [kts] knots [kmlh] 11.852 =[kts]
per hour
[mph) miles per [kmlh] 11.609 =[mph]
[mls] meters per
second
[fpm]
hour
feet per
[mls] x 196.85 =[fpm] )
minute
Speed of [RPM] revolutions per minute
rotation
-
Mass [kg] kilograms [lb] pounds (kg) X 2.2046=(lb)
Force, [N] newtons [lbf] pounds force (N) X 0.2248 =[lbf]
weight
Pressure [hPa] hecto- [inHg) inches of [hPa] =[mbar]
pascals mercury
[hPa] I 33.86 =[inHg]
[mbar] millibars [psi] pounds per
[bar] x 14.504 =[psi]
square inch
[bar) bars
Temperature r·c1 degrees r·FJ degrees [•C]x1.8 + 32 =[•F)
Celsius Fahrenheit
(£.F1 - 32)11.8 =r·c1
Page 1 -18 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

IOA40AFM • Diamond
AIRCRAFT Genonlll
Intensity of [A] amperes

electric
current
Electric [Ah] ampere-hours
charge
(battery
capacity)
Electric M volts
potential
Time [sec] seconds
L
Doc.# 6.01.D1-E Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Page 1 -19
IL - - -
General.Diamond I AIRCRAFT
DA 40 AFM
- - - - - - (')
1.6.2 CONVERSION CHART LITERS I US GALLONS
.· · · · · •· · · · tLil4!rs·•. \ . < >

U$.Gallon~ ·
....... .. us Gallons i i .·L.i.te~
5 1.3 1 3.8
10 2.6 2 7.6
15 4.0 4 15.1
20 5.3 6 22.7
25 6.6 8 30.3
30 7.9 10 37.9
35 9.2 12 45.4
40 10.6 14 53.0
45 11.9 16 60.6
50
60
13.2
15.9
18
20
68.1
75.7
)
70 18.5 22 83.3
80 21.1 24 90.9
90 23.8 26 98.4
100 26.4 28 106.0
110 29.1 30 113.6
120 31.7 32 121.1
130 34.3 34 128.7
140 37.0 36 136.3
150 39.6 38 143.8
160 42.3 40 151.4
170 44.9 45 170.3
180 47.6 50 189.3 J
Page 1-20 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
~
0 :.... c)>
0
p ~
-4 Cl
=It: )>
:I:
01
0 ::u "TT
i:
...... m
0
......
m
m
I
:S
m
:e
c
i
::0
•
<D
:::
CD
8007 mm (26ft 3 in) z
(i)
D
m·
0
......
I
0
<D
91\.) )>a
~s
0
......
0
i:
:!1Q.
1\.)
......
IGeneml .Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
1.8 SOURCE DOCUMENTATION
This Section lists documents, manuals and other literature that were used as sources
for the Airplane Flight Manual, and indicates the respective publisher. However, only the
information given in the Airplane Flight Manual is valid.
1.8.1 ENGINE
Address: Textron Lycoming

652 Oliver Street
WILLIAMSPORT, PA 17701
USA
Phone: +1-570-323-6181
Webpage: www.lycoming.textron.com )
Documents: a) Textron Lycoming Operator's Manual, Aircraft Engines
60297-12 (Part No.)
b) Service Bulletins (SB)

Service Instructions (SI); (e.g. Sl1014, Sl1070)
Service Letters (SL); (e.g. SL 114 (subscriptions))
Page 1-22 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

IDA40 AFM • Diamond AIRCRAFT General I
r 1.8.2 PROPELLER
Address: mt-Propeller
Airport Straubing Wallmuhle
D-94348 ATTING
GERMANY
Phone: +49-9429-9409-0
E-mail: sales@mt-propelle.r.com
Webpage: www.mt-propeller.de
Documents: E-124, Operation and Installation Manual

Hydraulically controlled variable pitch propeller
MTV -5, -6, -9,-11,-12,-14,-15,-16,-21,-22,-25
c 1.8.3 ENGINE INSTRUMENTS
Address: VISION MICROSYSTEMS, INC.

ADVANCED ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION
4071 Hannagan Road, Suite T
BELLINGHAM, WA 98226
USA
Phone: +1-360-714-8203
Documents: 5010002 REV F, VM 1000 Owner's Manual
L
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 1-23
I
General
1.8.4 IGNITION CONTROL UNIT

DA40AFM
,,
The electronic ignition control unit LASAR is optional equipment.
Address: UNISON Industries

7575 Baymeadows Way
JACKSONVILLE, FL 32256
USA
Phone: +1-904-739-4066
Webpage: www.unisonindustries.com
Documents: L-1502
LASAR Installation, Operation, and Troubleshooting Manual

Operating
DA40AFM .Diamond AIRCRAFT Limitations
CHAPTER2
Page
2.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................... 2-2

2.2 AIRSPEED ............................................ 2-3
2.3 AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS ........................ 2-4
2.4 POWER-PLANT LIMITATIONS ............................ 2-5
2.5 ENGINE INSTRUMENT MARKINGS ........................ 2-7
2.6 WARNING, CAUTION AND STATUS LIGHTS ................. 2-9
2.7 MASS (WEIGHT) ...................................... 2-11
(~ 2.8 CENTER OF GRAVITY ................................. 2-13
2.9 APPROVED MANEUVERS .............................. 2-14
2.10 MANEUVERING LOAD FACTORS ........................ 2-16
2.11 OPERATING ALTITUDE ................................ 2-17
2.12 FLIGHT CREW ........................................ 2-17
2.13 KINDS OF OPERATION ................................. 2-18
2.14 FUEL ................................................ 2-22
2.15 LIMITATION PLACARDS ................................ 2-24
2.16 OTHER LIMITATIONS .................................. 2-32
2.16.1 TEMPERATURE ................................. 2-32
2.16.2 BATIERY CHARGE .............................. 2-32
2.16.3 EMERGENCY SWITCH ........................... 2-32
2.16.4 OPERATION TIME OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ..... 2-32
2.16.5 DOOR LOCKING DEVICE ......................... 2-33
2.16.6 ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT ........................ 2-33
L• 2.16.7 USE OF THE SUN VISORS ........................ 2-33
EASA
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 2-1
approved
Operating
DA40AFM
Limitations
2.1 INTRODUCTION
Chapter 2 of this Airplane Flight Manual includes operating limitations, instrument

markings , and placards necessary for safe operation of the airplane , its power-plant,
standard systems and standard equipment.
The limitations included in this Chapter are approved.
WARNING
Operation of the airplane outside of the approved operating
limitations is not permissible.
EASA
Page 2 - 2 Rev . 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01 .01-E
approved
Operating
DA40AFM • Diamond AIRCRAFT Limitations
2.2 AIRSPEED
'
Ai,~p,,a . .· t ..... ;··...... ·.\;····.·~~.~{········/:··..... ·.•.····
·~,""•'*• r <.·.·• i··
VA Maneuvering 108 KIAS Do not make full or abrupt
speed control surface movement
(above 980 kg I 2161 lb
above this speed.
up to 1150 kg /25351b)
94KIAS
(780 kg /1720 lb
up to 980 kg /2161 lb)
I If MAM 40-227 is carried

I out:
I 111 KIAS
( I
I
(above 1036 kg /22841b
up to 1200 kg /26461b)
I
I 94 KIAS
I (780 kg /1720 lb
I up to 1036 kg /22841b)
VFE Max. flaps ex- LOG: 91 KIAS Do not exceed these speeds
tended speed with the given flap setting.
T/0: 108 KIAS
VNo Max. structural 129 KIAS Do not exceed this speed
= cruising speed except in smooth air, and
Vc then only with caution.
VNE Never exceed 178 KIAS Do not exceed this speed in

speed in smooth any operation.
air
L
EASA
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page2-3
approved
Operating
Limitations
.Diamond
. AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
2.3 AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS
White arc 49 KIAS- 91 KIAS Operating range with flaps fully extended
Green arc 52 KIAS- 129 KIAS Normal operating range.
Yellow arc 129 KIAS- 178 KIAS 'Caution' range- "Only in smooth air".
Red line 178 KIAS Maximum speed for all operations - vNe·
)
EASA Doc.# 6.01.01-E

Page2 -4 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010
approved
Operating
2.4 POWER-PLANT LIMITATIONS
a) Engine manufacturer :Textron Lycoming
b) Engine designation : 10-360 M1-A
c) RPM limitations
Max. take-off RPM :2700 RPM
Max. continuous RPM :2400 RPM
d) Manifold pressure limitations

Maximum : FULL throttle
e) Oil pressure
Minimum (IDLE) :25 PSi/1.72 bar
Maximum : 98 PSI/6.76 bar
c Normal operating range
f) Oil quantity
Minimum
: 55 to 95 PSI/ 3.8 to 6.55 bar
:4 qts
Maximum :8 qts
g) Oil temperature
Maximum :245 "F (118 "C)
h) Fuel pressure
Minimum : 14 PSI/ 0.97 bar
Maximum : 35 PSI/ 2.4 bar
i) Cylinder head temperature

Maximum : 500 "F (260 "C)
j) Propeller manufacturer : mt-Propeller
EASA
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page2-5
approved
Operating
DA40AFM
Limitations
k) Propeller designation : MTV-12-B/180-17 or

MTV-12-B/180-17f
I) Propeller diameter : 1.80 m (+ 0 mm, - 50 mm)

5 ft 10.9 in(+ 0.0 in,- 2.0 in)
m) Propeller pitch angle (0.75 R) : 10.5° to 30°
n) Oil specification:
Airplane engine oil should be used which meets SAEJ1899 (MIL-L-22851) Standard
(ashless dispersant type). During the first 50 hours of operation of a new or newly
overhauled engine, or after replacement of a cylinder, airplane engine oil should be used
which meets SAEJ1966 (MIL-L-6082) Standard (straight mineral type). The viscosity
should be selected according to the recommendation given in the following table:
)
SAE60
SAE 40 or SAE 50
SAE40
SAE 20-W50 or SAE 15-W50
SAE 30, SAE 40,

or SAE 20-W40
SAE 30 or SAE 20-W30

(J
EASA
Page2-6 Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
approved
Operating
2.5 ENGINE INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
Engine instrument markings and their color code significance are shown in the table below:
NOTE
When an indication lies in the upper or lower prohibited range,
the numerical indication will begin flashing as well.
..
•••••••••
ijed i v~now
Green ·.·.·•.··
Yellow········ .· ~@c:l.
•••••••••••••• arc/bar arc:Jbar arc/bar
arc/bar arc:lbar
lndi-
cation I
= = = = =
lower normal upper
caution caution
prottibited
1 .•.·.
operating prottil>lted
I
··I. range l"@gge range
range~~ . ragge .•.
·····
( Manifold
pressure -- -- 13- 30 inHg -- --
500-2400 2400-2700 above 2700
RPM -- -- RPM RPM RPM
Oil
temp.
-- -- 149- 230 °F 231 -245 °F above 245 oF
Cylinder
head -- -- 150-475 °F 476-500 OF above 500 oF
temp.
Oil below
25-55 PSI 56-95 PSI 96-97 PSI above 97 PSI
pressure 25PSI
Fuel below
pressure 14 PSI
-- 14-35 PSI -- above 35 PSI
Fuel 1 -20 above 20

flow
-- -- US gal/hr
-- US gal/hr
below
Voltage 24.1 -25 v 25.1 -30 v 30.1 -32 v above 32 V
24.1 v
L Ammeter -- - 2-75A -- --
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. a 01-Dec-201 0

EASA
approved I Page 2-7
Operating
DA40AFM
Limitations
Fuel
quantity, 0-15 US gal 1
0 US gal
Standard 0-17 US gal 2
Tank
Fuel
quantity, 0-16 US gal
Long 0 US gal +
Range 0-9 US gal3
Tank
1 up to and including serial number 40.054

)
2 serial number 40.055 and subsequent
3 numerical indication of the additional (auxiliary) fuel quantity, for a total fuel quantity
on one side in the range between 16 and 25 US gal
EASA
Page 2-8 Rev. a 01-Dec-2010
approved
Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Operating
r 2.6 WARNING. CAUTION AND STATUS LIGHTS
The following tables show the color and significance of the warning, caution and status
lights on the annunciator panel. There are two variants of the annunciator panel, 'DAI'
and White Wire' (see Section 7.11 ).
NOTE
Section 7.11 includes a detailed description of the lights on
the annunciator panel.
Color and Significance of the Warning Lights (Red)
...
warpln~dg~ts iR•dr >
.,
. i ' .(' ? .·•·•
.··.·· ···•·· .•...... ·.·•······· ·.
!"'·
V;tri@Ot
.'·< •.. ( : ····•,•• T. ··,···
< •. Y•fl~oJ
. •. , . • . . · •· ·.·.· < . . . {;a~se . .y,
( ····,· ~DAI' ·.•· ·'Whitt Wire• ' · Mel!lnin!J · ·•·•· . ' ' ·,
Oil pressure below 25 PSI

' ........ ... ·
'
OILPR OIL PRESS Oil pressure
FUEL PR FUEL PRESS Fuel pressure Fuel pressure below 14 PSI
Alternator
ALT ALTERNATOR Alternator failure
(Generator)
Operation of starter, or failure
of the starter motor to
START START Starter
disengage from the engine after
starting
Front canopy and/or rear door
DOOR DOORS Doors not completely closed and
locked
Failure in the automatic trim
TRIM FAIL Trim failure system of the autopilot (if
installed)
EASA
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 Page2-9
approved
Operating
DA40AFM
Limitations
Color and Significance of the Caution Lights CAmber)
Fuel quantity Fuel quantity in the left tank

LFUEL
left tank less than 3 US gal (±1 US gal)
Fuel quantity Fuel quantity in the right tank
RFUEL
right tank less than 3 US gal (±1 US gal)
181 caution:
fuel quantity in one tank less
than 3 US gal (±1 US gal)
LOW FUEL Fuel quantity
2"d caution:
fuel quantity in second tank
)
less than 3 US gal (±1 US gal)
VOLT LOW VOLTS Voltage On-board voltage below 24 V
Pitot heating not switched ON,
PITOT PITOT Pitot heating or fault in the Pitot heating
system
Color and Significance of the Status Light <White)
Electronic ignition control unit

IGN Ignition
(if installed) not in operation
rJ
Page2-10 EASA Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Rev.B 01-Dec-2010
approved
Operating
2.7 MASS (WEIGHT)
Maximum take-off mass (Normal Category) : 1150 kg 25351b

if MAM 40-227 is carried out : 1200 kg 26461b
Maximum take-off mass (Utility Category) :980 kg 2161 lb
Maximum landing mass

Original MLG strut : 1092 kg 24071b
Modified MLG strut
I (MAM 40-123/e or OAM 40-283) : 1150 kg 25351b
I Maximum zero fuel mass : 1150 kg 25351b
Max. load in standard baggage compartment 30 kg 661b

Max. load in baggage tube 5kg 11 lb
Max. load in extended baggage compartment (OAM 40-163)

Max. load in forward part 45 kg 1001b
Max. load in aft part 18 kg 401b
Max. total load forward + aft 45 kg 1001b
f11ax. surface load for baggage compartments 75 kg/m 2 15.3 lb/ft2
WARNING
Exceeding the mass limits will lead to an overstressing of the
airplane as well as to a degradation of flight characteristics
and flight performance.
NOTE
The maximum landing mass is the highest mass for landing
conditions at the maximum descent velocity. This velocity was
L. used in the strength calculations to determine the landing gear
loads during a particularly hard landing.
EASA
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 2-11
approved
Operating
DA40AFM
Limitations
NOTE
In some countries the beginning of a flight is defined by
starting the engine.ln those countries a maximum ramp mass
4 kg (91b) above the maximum take-off mass is approved.
At the time of lift-off the maximum permitted take-off mass
must not be exceeded.
EASA Doc. # 6.01.01-E

Page2-12 Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0
approved
Operating
r 2.8 CENTER OF GRAVITY
Datum Plane
The Datum Plane (DP) is a plane which is normal to the airplane's longitudinal axis and
in front of the airplane as seen from the direction of flight. The airplane's longitudinal axis
is parallel with the upper surface of a 600:31 wedge which is placed on top of the rear
fuselage in front of the vertical stabilizer."When the upper surface of the wedge is aligned
horizontally, the Datum Plane is vertical. The Datum Plane is located 2.194 meters
(86.38 in) forward of the most forward point of the root rib on the stub wing.
Center of Gravity Limitations
The center of gravity (CG) for flight conditions must lie between the following limits:
Most forward CG:
( 2.40 m (94.5 in) aft of DP from 780 kg to 980 kg (1720 lb to 2161 lb)
2.46 m (96.9 in) aft of DP at 1150 kg (25351b)
linear variation between these values
If MAM 40-227 is carried out:
2.40 m (94.5 in) aft of DP from 780 kg to 980 kg (1720 lb to 2161 lb)
2.48 m (97.6 in) aft of DP at 1200 kg (26461b)
Most rearward CG:
a) Standard Tank : 2.59 m (102.0 in) aft of DP

b) Long Range Tank : 2.55 m (1 00.4 in) aft of DP
WARNING
L Exceeding the center of gravity limitations reduces the

controllability and stability of the airplane.
EASA
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 Page 2-13
approved
Operating
DA40AFM
Limitations
2.9 APPROVED MANEUVERS
The airplane is certified in the Normal Category and in the Utility Category in accordance
with JAR-23.
Approved Maneuvers
a) Normal Category:
1) All normal flight maneuvers;
2) Stalling (with the exception of dynamic stalling); and
3) Lazy Eights, Chandelles, as well as steep turns and similar maneuvers, in

which an angle of bank of not more than so• is attained.
)
CAUTION
Aerobatics, spinning, and flight maneuvers with more than
so• of bank are not permitted in the Normal Category.
EASA
Page2 -14 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# S.01.01-E
approved
Operating
r b) Utility Category:
1) All normal flight maneuvers;
2) Stalling (with the exception of dynamic stalling); and
3) Lazy Eights, Chandelles, as well as steep turns and similar maneuvers, in

which an angle of bank of not more than go• is attained.
CAUTION
Aerobatics, spinning, and flight maneuvers with more than
go• of bank are not permitted in the Utility Category.
CAUTION
( The accuracy ofthe attitude gyro (artificial horizon) and the

directional gyro is affected by the maneuvers approved under
item 3 if the bank angle exceeds 60•. Such maneuvers may
therefore only be flown when the above mentioned
instruments are not required for the present kind of operation.
L
Rev. 8 EASA
Doc.# 6.01.01-E 01-Dec-201 0 Page 2-15
approved
Operating
DA40AFM
Limitations
()
2.10 MANEUVERING LOAD FACTORS
Table of maximum structural load factors:
Normal Category
Utilitv Category 1,)
Positive 4.4 4.4 2.0

Negative -1.76 -1
WARNING
Exceeding the maximum load factors will lead to an
overstressing of the airplane.
'J
Page2-16 EASA Doc. # 6.01.01-E
Rev.8 01-Dec-2010
approved
Operating
r 2.11 OPERATING ALTITUDE
The maximum demonstrated operating altitude is 16,400 ft (5,000 m).
The maximum approved operating altitude for US registered airplanes is 14,000 ft MSL
unless an approved supplemental oxygen system is installed.
2.12 FLIGHT CREW
Minimum crew number 1 (one person)
Maximum number of occupants:
Normal Category 4 (four persons)
c Utility Category 2 (two persons), both of whom must sit in front
L
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0
EASA
approved I Page 2-17 I
Operating
DA40AFM
Limitations
2.13 KINDS OF OPERATION
Provided that national operational requirements are met, the following kinds of operation
are approved:
* Daytime flights according to Visual Flight Rules (VFR).
* With the appropriate equipment: night flights according to Visual Flight Rules
(NVFR).
* With the appropriate equipment: flights according to Instrument Flight Rules

(IFR).
Flights into known or forecast icing conditions are prohibited.
Flights into known thunderstorms are prohibited.

)
Minimum Operational Equipment (Serviceable)
The following table lists the minimum serviceable equipment required by JAR-23. Additional
minimum equipment for the intended operation may be required by national operating
rules and also depends on the route to be flown.
/J
EASA
Page2-18 Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.Q1-E
approved
Operating
Flight and * Airspeed * Vertical speed indicator (VSI) * SecondVHF

Naviga- indicator radio (COM)
tion
* Attitude gyro (artificial horizon)
* Altimeter * VOR-LOC-
lnstru- * Tum & bank indicator GP receiver
ments * Magnetic
compass
* Directional gyro * Marker
* OAT indicator beacon
receiver
* Chronometer with indication of
hours, minutes, and seconds
* VHF radio (COM) with speaker
and microphone
* VOR receiver
(~ * Transponder (XPDR),
Mode A and Mode C
* 1 headset
Engine * Fuel indicators * Ammeter (included in VM 1000)
lnstru-
ments
* Integrated * Voltmeter (included in
engine VM 1000)
instrument
* Annunciator
panel (all
lights, see 2.6)
L
EASA
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 2-19
approved
Operating
Limitations
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
Lighting * Position lights

* Strobe lights (anti collision
lights)
* Landing light
* Instrument lighting
* Flood light
* Flashlight
Other * Stall warning * Pitot heating system * Emergency
Opera- system battery
tional
Minimum
* Fuel quantity
* Alternate static valve
* Essential bus
)
measuring
Equip-
device (see
ment
7.10)
* Safety belts for
each occupied
seat
* Airplane flight
manual
'J
EASA
Page 2-20 Rev. a 01-Dec-2010
approved
Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Operating
r NOTE
A list of approved equipment can be found in Chapter 6.
NOTE
For the upgrade of an airplane for Night VFR or IFR operation
it is not sufficient to install the required equipment. The retrofit
must be carried out in accordance with the requirements of
the manufacturer (see Service Bulletins) and the national
Airworthiness Authority. Any additional equipment (equipment
which is not listed in the Equipment List in Section 6.5) must
also be approved for the intended kind of operation by the
national Airworthiness Authority.
L
EASA Page 2-21
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-201 0
approved
Operating
DA40AFM
Limitations
2.14 FUEL
Fuel Grade AVGAS 100LL
Fuel Quantity
a) Standard Tank:
Total fuel quantity : 2 x 20.6 US gal (app. 2 x 78 liter)
Unusable fuel : 2 x 0.5 US gal (app. 2 x 2 liter)
Max. indicated fuel quantity:

up to and incl. serial no. 40.054 : 15 US gal (app. 57 liter) per tank
serial no. 40.055 & subsequent : 17 US gal (app. 64 liter) per tank )
Max. permissible difference
between right and left tank : 10 US gal (app. 381iter)
(J
EASA
Page2 -22 Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
approved
Operating
DA40 AFM .Dia~r?c'JJ! Limitations
r b) Long Range Tank (if installed}:
Total fuel quantity : 2 x 25.5 US gal (app. 2 x 96.5 liter)
Unusable fuel : 2 x 0.5 US gal (app. 2 x 2 liter)
Max. indicated fuel quantity : 16 US gal (app. 61 liter) per tank
Indicated quantity auxiliary

fuel tank 0 to 9 US gal (app. 0 to 34 liter) per tank

between right and left tank 8 US gal (app. 30 liter)
CAUTION
If a fuel indicator shows 16 US gal and the aux. fuel indicator
( reads 0 US gal on the same side, then 19 US gal must be
assumed for the calculation of the difference between right
and left tank.
L
EASA
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 2-23
approved
Operating
Limitations
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
2.15 LIMITATION PLACARDS
All limitation placards are shown below. A list of all placards is included in the Airplane
Maintenance Manual (Doc. No. 6.02.01 ), Chapter 11.
On the Instrument Panel:
If MAM 40-227 is not carried out:
Maneuvering speed:
vA =108 KIAS (above 980 up to 1150 kg I above 2161 up to 25351b)

VA= 94 KIAS (780 to 980 kg /1720 to 2161 lb)
This airplane may only be operated in accordance with the Airplane Flight )
Manual. It can be operated in the "Normal" and "Utility'' categories in non-
icing conditions. Provided that national operational requirements are met
and the appropriate equipment is installed, this airplane is approved for the
following kinds of operation: day VFR, night VFR and IFR. All aerobatic
maneuvers including spinning are prohibited.
For further operational limitations refer to the Airplane Flight Manual.
No smoking.
/J
EASA
Page 2-24 Rev. a 01-Dec-2010
approved
Doc. # 6.01.01-E
Operating
r If MAM 40-227 is carried out:
Maneuvering Speed:
=
v A 111 KIAS {above 1036 up to 1200 kg, above 2284 up to 2646 Ib)
=
vA 94 KIAS (780 to 1036 kg, 1720 to 2284 lb)
The airplane may only be operated in accordance with the Airplane
Flight Manual. It can be operated in the ,Normal" and the ,Utility"
categories in non-icing conditions. Provided that national operational
requirements are met and the appropriate equipment is installed, this
airplane is approved for the following kinds of operation: day VFR,
night VFR and IFR. All aerobatic maneuvers including spinning are
prohibited.
For further operational limitations refer to the Airplane Flight Manual.

No smoking.
(_
Next to Each of the Two Fuel Filler Necks:
a) Standard Tank:
AVGAS 100LL
F'\L~
~ 76 1/ 20 US gaL
b) Long Range Tank (if installed):
EASA
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 2-25
approved
Operating
DA40AFM
Limitations
Next to the Fuel Quantity Indication:
a) Standard Tank:
Up to serial number 40.054:
max. indicated fuel quantity: 15 US gal

left and right tank max. 10 US gal difference
For use of max. tank capacity see AFM
Serial number 40.055 and subsequent:
max. indicated fuel quantity: 17 US gal

left and right tank max. 10 US gal difference
)
b) Long Range Tank (if installed):
Fuel qty. Indication: 16 + 9 US gal

max. difference LH/RH tank: 8 US gal
AUX FUEL QTY switch for LH/RH auxiliary fuel quantity
NOTE: See AFM for more information on AUX FUEL
EASA
Page 2-26 Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
approved
Operating
On the Fuel Tank Selector:
a) Standard Tank:
20 US gal.
761
©
(_ b) Long Range Tank (if installed):
25 US gal.
941
L
EASA
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 2-27
approved
Operating
Limitations
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
In the Cowling. on the Door for the Oil Filler Neck:
OIL 1 qt = 0.95 liters
SAE 15W50
ashless dispersant aviation
grade oil (SAE Standard J-1899)
or see AFM Chapter 2
VFR Min./Max.: 4/8 qts
IFR Min./Max.: 6/8 qts
Next to the Flap Selector Switch:
max.
108 KIAS
Next to the Essential Bus Switch (if installed):
Ess. Bus NOT for normal operation. See AFM.
Page 2-28 EASA Doc.# 6.01 .01-E

Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010
approved
Operating
DA40 AFM • Diamond AIRCRAFT Limitations
In the Cockpit, on the Left Fuselage Sidewall:

(if alternate static valve is installed):
a
Alternate Static
OPEN
-r:IffcLOSED
If Alternate Stelle Is open
Emergency Window and
Cockpit Vent must be closed
Next to the Baggage Compartment:
a) Standard Baggage Compartment:
Ill
EASA
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 Page 2-29
approved
Operating
~Diamond
A IRCRAFT
DA40AFM
Limitations
b) Extended Baggage Compartment (Oii.M 40-163, if installed) :
FORWARD BAGGAGE AFT BAGGAGE

COMPARTMENT COMPARTMENT
MAX. 45 kg [100 lb] MAX. 18 kg [40 lb]
ARM: 3.89 m [153.1"] ARM: 4.54 m [178 .7"]
MAX. BAGGAGE TOTAL 45 kg [1 00 lb]

MAX. SURFACE LOAD : 75 kg/m 2 [15 lb/sq.ft.]
CAUTION : OBSERVE WEIGHT AND BALANCE LIMITATIONS
SEE AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL CHAPTER 6
EASA
Page 2-30 Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 Doc. # 6.01 .01-E
approved
Operating
r Beside the Door Locking Device COAM 40-081. if installed):
EMERGENCY EXIT:
The keylock must be
unlocked during flight!
Above the NAV #2 COl COAM 40-206. if installed):
NAV No. 2 not approved

for precision approaches
EASA
Doc. # 6.01 .01-E Rev.B 01-Dec-201 0 Page 2-31
approved
Operating
DA40AFM
Limitations
2.16 OTHER LIMITATIONS
2.16.1 TEMPERATURE
The airplane may only be operated when its temperature prior to operation is not less
1 than -40 •c (-40 "F) and not higher than 54 •c (129 "F).
CAUTION
For cold weather starting of the engine refer to the latest
instructions given by the engine manufacturer.
2.16.2 BATTERYCHARGE
)
Taking off for a Night VFR or IFR flight with an empty battery is not permitted.
The use of an external power supply for engine starting with an empty airplane battery
is not permitted if the subsequent flight is intended to be an IFR flight. In this case the
airplane battery must first be charged.
2.16.3 EMERGENCY SWITCH
IFR flights are not permitted when the seal on the emergency switch is broken.
2.16.4 OPERATION TIME OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Following an alternator failure and with the essential bus (if installed) switched ON, it can
be expected that the systems listed under 3.7.2- FAILURES IN THE ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM are supplied with power for half an hour. After this, electrical power is available
EASA Doc. # 6.01.01-E

Page 2-32 Rev.8 01-Dec-2010
approved
Operating
r for the attitude gyro (artificial horizon) and flood light for another 1.5 hours when the
emergency power pack (if installed) is used.
2.16.5 DOOR LOCKING DEVICE
The canopy and the passenger door must not be blocked by the door locking device during
operation of the airplane.
2.16.6 ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
The use and switching on of electronic equipment other than that which is part of the
equipment of the airplane is not permitted, as it could lead to interference with the
airplane's avionics.
Examples of undesirable items of equipment are:
- Mobile telephones.
( - Remote radio controls.
- Video screens employing CRTs.
- MiniDisc recorders when in the record mode.
This list is not exhaustive.
The use of laptop computers, including those with CD-ROM drives, CD and minidisc
players in the replay mode, cassette players and video cameras is permitted. All this
equipment however should be switched off for take-off and landing.
2.16.7 USE OF THE SUN VISORS
The sun visors (if installed, OAM 40-327) may only be used during cruise. During all other
phases of flight the sun visors must be locked in the fully upward position.
L
01-Dec-2010 EASA
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 Page2- 33
approved
Operating
Limitations
DA40AFM
,,
)
Intentionally left blank.
(J
Page 2-34 Rev. a EASA Doc.# 6.01.01-E
01-Dec-2010
approved
Emergency
DA40 AFM
Procedures
CHAPTER 3
Page
3.1 INTRODUCTION .. . ...... . ..................... .. .. .. .. 3-3

3.1.1 GENERAL . . ... . .. ... . . ............ ... . .. . . .. . .. . . 3-3
3.1.2 CERTAIN AIRSPEEDS IN EMERGENCIES . ........... . . 3-4
3.2 ENGINE PROBLEMS .. . . . ... ...... . ..................... 3-5
3.2.1 ENGINE PROBLEMS ON THE GROUND ..... ........ . . 3-5
3.2.2 ENGINE PROBLEMS DURING TAKE-OFF . ...... . ...... 3-6
3.2.3 ENGINE PROBLEMS IN FLIGHT ..... . .. .. ............ 3-8
3.2.4 RESTARTING THE ENGINE WITH WINDMILLING PROPELLER
........ . .... . .. .. .. . . .... .. . .. . .. . ...... . ..... 3-17
3.2.5 DEFECTIVE ENGINE CONTROLS ... ... . .......... . . 3-18
3.2. 6 RESTARTING THE ENGINE WITH STATIONARY PROPELLER
. .. . ......... . ... ... ........ .... .. . . . ..... ... .. 3-20
3.3 SMOKE AND FIRE .... .. ... ... .. .. . . ....... . ........ . .. 3-22
3.3.1 SMOKE AND FIRE ON THE GROUND ................ 3-22
3.3.2 SMOKE AND FIRE DURING TAKE-OFF .... .. ......... 3-24
3.3.3 SMOKE AND FIRE IN FLIGHT . .. .. .. . ... .. ....... . .. 3-26
3.4 GLIDING ........ . .......... . ............. .. ...... . ... 3-28
3.5 EMERGENCY LANDINGS ...... . . . . . .................... 3-29
3.5.1 EMERGENCY LANDING WITH ENGINE OFF . ..... ..... 3-29
3.5 .2 LANDING WITH A DEFECTIVE TIRE ON THE MAIN LANDING
GEAR .... . ... .. .. .... . . .......... . ... . ...... . . . 3-31
3.5.3 LANDING WITH DEFECTIVE BRAKES .. . . ... .... ..... 3-32
3.6 RECOVERY FROM AN UNINTENTIONAL SPIN . . .......... .. 3-33
Doc.# 6.01 .01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 3 - 1

Emergency
66Diamond
~ AIRCRAFT
DA40 AFM
Procedures
3.7 OTHER EMERGENCIES 3-34

3.7.1 ICING . . . .. ..... . ........ . ...... . ...... . . . ..... 3-34
3.7.2 FAILURES IN THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 3-35
3.7.3 SUSPICION OF CARBON MONOXIDE CONTAMINATION IN THE
CABIN ....... ... ... . . .. .. . . ......... .. ....... . 3-39
3.7.4 'DOOR'-WARNING LIGHT ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3.7.5 EMERGENCY EXIT ..... .. : . . ... ... .. .. .. ... . . ... 3-41
NOTE
Procedures for uncritical system faults are given in Chapter
4B - ABNORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES .
Page 3-2 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

Emergency
DA40AFM • Diamond AIRCRAFT Procedures
3.1 INTRODUCTION
3.1.1 GENERAL
This Chapter contains checklists as well as the description of recommended procedures

to be followed in the event of an emergency. Engine failure or other airplane-related
emergencies are most unlikely to occur if the prescribed procedures for pre-flight checks
and airplane maintenance are followed:
If, nonetheless, an emergency does arise, the guidelines given here should be followed
and applied in order to clear the problem.
As it is impossible to foresee all kinds of emergencies and cover them in this Airplane
Flight Manual, a thorough understanding of the airplane by the pilot is, in addition to his
knowledge and experience, an essential factor in the solution of any problems which may
arise.
WARNING
In each emergency, control over the flight attitude and the
preparation of a possible emergency landing have priority
over attempts to solve the current problem ("first fly the
aircraft"). Prior to the flight the pilot must consider the
suitability of the terrain for an emergency landing for each
phase of the flight. For a safe flight the pilot must constantly
keep a safe minimum flight altitude. Solutions for various
adverse scenarios should be thought over in advance. Thus
it should be guaranteed that the pilot is at no time shocked
by an engine failure and that he can act calmly and with
determination.
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 Page3-3

Emergency
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40 AFM
Procedures
3.1.2 CERTAIN AIRSPEEDS IN EMERGENCIES
~
850 kg 1000 kg 1150 kg 1200 kg
E 18741b 22051b 25351b 26461b
Engine failure after take-off

59 KIAS 66 KIAS 72 KIAS 74 KIAS
(Flaps T/0)
Airspeed for best glide angle
(Flaps UP)
Flaps UP 60 KIAS 68 KIAS 73 KIAS 76 KIAS
Emergency
landing with Flaps T/0 59 KIAS 66 KIAS 72 KIAS 74 KIAS
engine off
Flaps LOG 58 KIAS 63 KIAS 71 KIAS 73 KIAS
Page 3-4 Rev.B 01-Dec-201 0 Doc. # 6.01 .01-E

Emergency
DA 40 AFM ~Diamond
~ A IRCRA FT Procedures
3.2 ENGIN E PROBLEMS
3.2.1 ENGINE PROBLEMS ON THE GROUND
1. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
2. Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . as required
3. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . switch off, if considered
necessary; otherwise
establish the cause of the
problem and re-establish
engine performance
CAUTION
If the oil pressure is below the green sector, the engine must
be switched off immediately.
WARNING
If the problem cannot be cleared , the airplane must not be
flown .
END OF CHECKLIST
Doc. # 6 .01.01 -E Rev. 8 01-Dec-20 10 Page 3 - 5

Emergency
DA40AFM
Procedures
3.2.2 ENGINE PROBLEMS DURING TAKE-OFF
I (a) Take-Off Can Still Be Aborted <Sufficient Runway Length Available)
Land Straight Ahead:
1. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
On the Ground:
CAUTION
If sufficient time is remaining, the risk of fire in the event of
a collision can be reduced as follows: )
- Fuel tank selector . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
- Mixture control lever . . . . . . . . . . . LEAN- shut engine off
- Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
I - Master switch (ALT/BAT) ...... OFF
CONTINUED
Page3-6 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

Emergency
DA40AFM • Diamond
AIRCRAFT Procedures
r I (b) Take-Off Can No Longer Be Aborted
I 1. Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 KIAS (1200 kg, 2646 lb)

72 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
66 KIAS (1000 kg, 22051b)
59 KIAS (850 kg, 18741b)
WARNING
If, in the event of an engine problem occurring during take-off,
I the take-off can no longer be aborted and a safe height has
not been reached, then a straight-ahead emergency landing
should be carried out. Turning back can be fatal.
If Time Allows:
( 2. Fuel tank selector check selected tank
3. Electrical fuel pump .................. . check ON
4. Ignition switch ...................... . check BOTH
5. Throttle ........................... . check MAX PWR
6. RPM lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check HIGH RPM
7. Mixture control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check RICH (leaner above
5000 ft)
8. Alternate Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN
WARNING
If the problem does not clear itself immediately, and the
engine is no lo~ger producing sufficient power, then an
emergency landing must be carried out.
L END OF CHECKLIST
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 3-7

Emergency
~Diamond
AIRCRAFT
DA40 AFM
Procedures
3.2.3 ENGINE PROBLEMS IN FLIGHT
(a) Engine Running Roughly
WARNING
An engine which is running very roughly can lead to the loss
of the propeller. If the engine is running rough ly operation
should only be continued if there is no other alternative .
1. Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 KIAS ( 1200 kg, 2646 lb)

73 KIAS (1150 kg , 25351b)
68 KIAS (1000 kg, 2205 lb)
60 KIAS (850 kg, 1874 lb)
2. Electrical fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check ON

3. Fuel tank selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check selected tank
4. Engine instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check
5. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check
6. RPM lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check
7. Mixture control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . set for smooth running
8. Alternate Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN
9. Ignition status light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check (only if the electronic
ignition control unit is
installed)
10. Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check BOTH
(
CONTINUED
Page 3-8 Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 Doc.# 6.01.01 -E J

Emergency
r 11. Ignition circuit breaker (IGN) . . . . . . . . . . . . pull (only ifthe electronic

ignition control unit is
installed); if rough running is
cleared by doing this, the
circuit breaker should
remain open
12. Throttle/RPM/Mixture try various settings
WARNING
If the problem does not clear itself immediately, and the
engine is no longer producing sufficient power, then an
emergency landing should be carried out.
( END OF CHECKLIST
[ Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Page3-9

Emergency
Procedures
.Diamond
· AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
(b) Loss of Oil Pressure
1. Check oil pressure warning light and oil pressure indicator.
2. Check oil temperature.
2a. If the oil pressure indication drops below the green sector and the oil temperature
is normal (oil pressure warning light does not illuminate or flash):
* Monitor the oil pressure warning light: it is probable that the oil pressure
indication is defective.
* Monitor the oil and cylinder head temperatures.
2b. If the oil pressure indication drops below the green sector while the oil or cylinder
head temperature is rising, or
If the oil pressure warning light illuminates or flashes, or

)
If both of these occur together:
* Reduce engine power to the minimum required.
* Land as soon as possible.
* Be prepared for engine failure and emergency landing.
2c. Oil pressure tending to zero combined with:
Vibration, loss of oil, possibly unusual metallic noise and smoke:
* A mechanical failure in the engine is apparent.
* Shut off engine immediately and
* Carry out emergency landing in accordance with 3.5.1 - EMERGENCY

LANDING WITH ENGINE OFF.
END OF CHECKLIST
tJ
Page 3-10 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.• 6.01.01-E J
Emergency
DA40AFM .Diamond AIRCRAFT Procedures
(c) High Oil Pressure
Check oil temperature.
* If the oil temperature is normal, it is probable that the fault lies in the oil
pressure indication, which should thus be ignored (the airplane should be
serviced).
END OF CHECKLIST
(d) High Oil Temperature
Check cylinder head and exhaust gas temperature.
!' If neither of these is high, it is probable that the fault lies in the oil temperature
indication. The airplane should be serviced. A stable oil temperature
( I indication of 26 "F (-3 "C) or 317 "F (158 "C) suggests a failure of the oil
temperature sensor.
* If the cylinder head temperature or exhaust gas temperature is also high:
- Check oil pressure. If the oil pressure is low, proceed as in 3.2.3 (b)-
LOSS OF OIL PRESSURE.
- If the oil pressure is in the green sector:
- Check mixture setting, enrich mixture if necessary.
- Reduce power; if this produces no improvement, land at the nearest

appropriate airfield.
END OF CHECKLIST
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Page 3-11

Emergency
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
(e) High Cylinder Head Temperature

()
Cylinder head temperature in yellow sector or above:
1. Check mixture setting, enrich mixture if necessary.

2. Check oil temperature.
* If the oil temperature is also high:
- Check oil pressure. If the oil pressure is low, proceed as in 3.2.3 (b)-
LOSS OF OIL PRESSURE.
- If the oil pressure is in the green sector:
- Reduce power; if this produces no improvement, land at the nearest

appropriate airfield.
- Be prepared for possible emergency landing. ()

END OF CHECKLIST
Page3 -12 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.• 6.01.01-E ]

Emergency
r (D High RPM
RPM moves on its own into the yellow sector, or is in the red sector:
1. Check friction adjuster for throttle quadrant.

2. Check oil pressure: Following a loss of oil or oil pressure, the propeller
governor sets a high RPM. In this case the RPM should be regulated using
the throttle. Proceed as in 3.2.3 (b)- LOSS OF OIL PRESSURE.
3. If oil pressure is normal:
* Pull RPM lever back and listen for an associated drop in RPM:
- If the indication does not change in spite of an audible drop in RPM, it

is probable that the RPM indication is defective, which should thus be
ignored (the airplane should be serviced).
- lfthere is no audible drop in RPM, it is probable that the governor system

is defective. In this case the RPM should be regulated using the throttle.
END OF CHECKLIST

Emergency
DA40AFM
Procedures
(ql Loss of RPM

2. Fuel tank selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check
3. Friction adjuster for throttle quadrant . . . . . . check sufficiently tight
4. RPM lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIGH RPM
* Listen for rise in RPM.
- If there is no audible rise in RPM, it is probable that the governor system

is defective. In this case the RPM can be regulated within certain limits
using the throttle.
- Land at the nearest appropriate airfield.

- Be prepared for possible emergency landing.
- If the indication does not change in spite of an audible rise in RPM, it is )

probable that the RPM indication is defective, which should thus be ·
END OF CHECKLIST
'J
Page 3-14 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. #6.01.01-E
Emergency
(hl High Fuel Flow
Fuel flow in the red sector:
1. Electrical fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

2. Fuel pressure ....................... check after 10-15 sec:
* lfthe fuel pressure is low, refer to 3.2.3 (i)-LOW FUEL PRESSURE WITH
THE ELECTRICAL FUEL PUMP SET TO ON.
* If the fuel pressure is in the green sector, or the fuel pressure warning light
is not illuminated, the likely cause is a defective fuel flow indication, which
should thus be ignored (the airplane should be serviced). Fuel flow data
should be taken from the engine performance table in Chapter 5.
3. Check fuel quantity. A rapid reduction in fuel quantity confirms a high fuel
c flow.
END OF CHECKLIST
L
Emergency
DA40AFM
Procedures
(il Low Fuel Pressure with the Electrical Fuel Pump Set to ON
Fuel pressure warning light illuminates, or fuel pressure indication below the green sector:
1. Fuel flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check:
* If the fuel flow is high, there is possibly a leak (between the injection system
and the injectors). Land on the nearest suitable airfield.
* If the fuel flow is in the green sector and the engine is running smoothly, the
likely cause is a defective fuel pressure indication, which should thus be
Monitor engine for power loss and rough operation that could indicate fuel
starvation. If the engine is no longer producing sufficient power, then an
emergency landing should be carried out.
')
END OF CHECKLIST
'J·.
( /
Page 3-16 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

Emergency
3.2.4 RESTARTING THE ENGINE WITH WINDMILLING PROPELLER
NOTE
Restarting the engine is possible at all airspeeds above
70 KIAS up to vNe and up to the maximum demonstrated
operating altitude.
NOTE
As long as an airspeed of at least 65 KIAS is maintained, and
there is no major engine failure, the propeller will continue
to windmill.
1. Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 KIAS
2. Fuel tank selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fullest tank
3. Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check BOTH
( 4. Mixture control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Electrical fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
check appropriate position
check ON
6. Alternate air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN
If Engine Does Not Start:
7. Mixture control lever LEAN

8. Mixture control lever push forward slowly until
engine starts
NOTE
If it is not possible to start the engine:
- Adopt glide configuration as in 3.4 - GLIDING.
- Carry out emergency landing as in 3.5.1 -EMERGENCY
END OF CHECKLIST
[Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 3-17

Emergency
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
3.2.5 DEFECTIVE ENGINE CONTROLS
Defective Mixture Control Cable
(a) Flight and Landing:
1. Maintain altitude to the nearest airfield.

2. During descent, test the reaction of the engine to a higher power setting. A
lean mixture can lead to engine roughness and a loss of power. The
landing approach must be planned accordingly.
WARNING
Go-around may become impossible with the remaining power.
(b) Engine Shut-Down: )

1. Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . set
3. Avionics master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
4. All electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
5. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
6. Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . OFF
I 7. Master switch (ALT/BAT) .............. OFF
END OF CHECKLIST
tJ
Page 3-18 Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Emergency
Defective Throttle Control Cable
(a) Sufficient Engine Power Available to Continue Flight:
1. Approach nearest airfield, control engine power with RPM lever.

2. Perform landing with shut-down engine.
{b) No Sufficient Engine Power Available to Continue Flight:
1. Carry out emergency landing as in 3.5.1 - EMERGENCY LANDING WITH

ENGINE OFF.
END OF CHECKLIST
c Defective RPM Lever Control Cable
(a) Sufficient Engine Power Available to Continue Flight:
1. Approach nearest airfield, control engine power with throttle.

2. Perform normal landing.
WARNING
Go-around may become impossible with the remaining power.
{b) No Sufficient Engine Power Available to Continue Flight:
1. Carry out emergency landing as in 3.5.1 - EMERGENCY LANDING WITH

ENGINE OFF.
END OF CHECKLIST

Emergency
DA40AFM
Procedures
3.2.6 RESTARTING THE ENGINE WITH STATIONARY PROPELLER
NOTE
Restarting the engine is possible at all airspeeds above
80 KIAS up to vNE and up to the maximum demonstrated
operating altitude.
1. Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 KIAS
2. Electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
3. Avionics master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
4. Master switch (BAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check ON
5. Mixture control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check
6. Fuel tank selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check
9. Ignition switch ....................... START
)
NOTE
By increasing the airspeed above approximately 130 KIAS,
the propeller will begin to rotate and the engine can thus be
started. For this, the Ignition switch should be set at BOTH
(see 3.2.4 - RESTARTING THE ENGINE WITH
WINDMILLING PROPELLER). An altitude loss of at least
1000 ft (300 meter) must be allowed for.
if it is not possible to start the engine:
- Adopt glide configuration as in 3.4 - GLIDING

- Carry out emergency landing as in 3.5.1 - EMERGENCY
CONTINUED
Page 3-20 Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

Emergency
DA40AFM • Diamond
AIRCRAFT Procedures
CAUTION
Engine restart following an engine fire should only be
attempted if it is unlikely that a safe emergency landing can
be made. It must be expected that engine restart is impossible
after an engine fire.
END OF CHECKLIST
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 3-21

~Diamond
Emergency
DA40 AFM
Procedures AIRCRAFT
3.3 SMOKE AND FIRE
3.3.1 SMOKE AND FIRE ON THE GROUND
(a) Engine Fire When Starting on the Ground
1. Fuel tank selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

2. Cabin heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
3. Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . apply
After Standstill:
4. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX PWR

5. Master switch (AL T/BAT) .. .. ....... . ... OFF
When the Engine Has Stopped:
6. Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

7. Canopy ... .. ..... .. . ... . . . . .... .. .. open
8. Airplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . evacuate immediately
END OF CHECKLIST
Page 3 - 22 Rev . 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01 .01-E

Emergency
(b) Electrical Fire with Smoke on the Ground
I 1. Master switch (ALT/BAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
If the Engine is Running:
2. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
3. Mixture control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEAN - shut off engine
When the Engine Has Stopped:

5. Canopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . open
6. Airplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . evacuate immediately
( END OF CHECKLIST
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 3-23]

Emergency
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
(.~
3.3.2 SMOKE AND FIRE DURING TAKE-OFF
I (a) If Take-Off Can Still Be Aborted
1. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
2. Cabin heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
3. Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . apply - bring the airplane to
a stop
4. After stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . proceed as in 3.3.1 -
SMOKE AND FIRE ON THE
GROUND
END OF CHECKLIST
I (bl lfTake-Off Cannot Be Aborted

')
1. Cabin heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
2. If possible, fly along a short-cut traffic circuit and land on the airfield.
WARNING
If, in the event of an engine problem occurring during take-off,
I the take-off can no longer be aborted and a safe height has
not been reached, then a straight-ahead emergency landing
should be carried out. Turning back can be fatal.
I 3. Airspeed ............................ 74 KIAS (1200 kg, 26461b)

72 KIAS (1150 kg, 22351b)
66 KIAS (1000 kg, 22051b)
59 KIAS (850 kg, 18741b)
CONTINUED

Emergency
After Climbing to a Height From Which the Selected Landing Area Can Be Reached Safely:

5. Electrical fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
6. Cabin heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
I 7. Master switch (ALT/BAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
8. Emergency window(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . open if required
9. Carry out emergency landing with engine off. Allow for increased landing
distance due to the flap position.
CAUTION
In case of extreme smoke development, the front canopy may
be unlatched during flight. This allows it to partially open, in
order to improve ventilation. The canopy will remain open in
this position. Flight characteristics will not be affected
significantly.
END OF CHECKLIST

Emergency
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40 AFM
3.3.3 SMOKE AND FIRE IN FLIGHT
CAUTION
In the event of smoke or fire, prepare to land the airplane
without delay while completing fire suppression and/or smoke
evacuation procedures. If it cannot be visually verified that
the fire has been completely extinguished, whether the smoke
has cleared or not, land immediately at the nearest suitable
airfield or landing site.
(a) Engine Fire in Flight
1. Cabin heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

2. Select appropriate emergency landing field.
When it Seems Certain that the Landing Field Will Be Reached: )

4. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX PWR
6. Master switch (AL T/BAT) ............... ON
7. Emergency window(s) ................. open if required
8. Carry out emergency landing with engine off.
CAUTION
significantly.
END OF CHECKLIST
CJ
Page 3-26 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E
Emergency
(b) Electrical Fire with Smoke in Flight
1. Emergency switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON if installed

I 2. Master switch (ALT/BAT) ............... OFF
3. Cabin heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
4. Emergency window(s) ................. open if required
5. Land at an appropriate airfield as soon as possible.
CAUTION
I Switching OFF the Master switch (AL T/BAT) will lead to total
failure of all electronic and electric equipment. Also affected
from this are- if installed- the attitude gyro (artificial horizon)
and the directional gyro.
However, by switching the Emergency switch ON (only

installed in the IFR model), the emergency battery will supply
power to the attitude gyro (artificial horizon) and the flood
light.
CAUTION
significantly.
END OF CHECKLIST
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 3-27

Emergency
DA40AFM
Procedures
3.4 GLIDING
1. Flaps .............................. UP
I 2. Airspeed ............................ 76 KIAS (1200 kg, 26461b)
73 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
68 KIAS (1000 kg, 22051b)
60 KIAS (850 kg, 18741b)
NOTE
The glide ratio is 8.8; i.e., for every 1000 ft (305 meter) of
altitude loss the maximum horizontal distance traveled in still
air is 1.45 NM (2.68 km). During this the propeller will continue
to windmill.
With a stationary propeller the glide ratio is 10.3; this

corresponds to a maximum horizontal distance of 1.70 NM
)
(3.14 km) for every 1000 ft altitude. In consideration of a safe
airspeed however, this configuration may not be attainable.
END OF CHECKLIST
Page 3-28 Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

Emergency
r 3.5 EMERGENCY LANDINGS
3.5.1 EMERGENCY LANDING WITH ENGINE OFF
1. Select suitable landing area. If no level landing area is available, a landing

on an upward slope should be sought.
2. Consider wind.
3. Approach: If possible, fly along a short-cut rectangular circuit. On the
downwind leg of the circuit the landing area should be
inspected for obstacles from a suitable height. The degree of
offset at each part of the circuit will allow the wind speed and
direction to be assessed.
I 4. Airspeed 76 KIAS (1200 kg, 2646 lb)
73 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
c 5. lftime allows ........................ advise ATC

68 KIAS (1000 kg, 22051b)
60 KIAS (850 kg, 18741b)
When It Is Certain That the Landing Field Will Be Reached:
7. Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LDG
8. Safety harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tighten
CONTINUED
[ Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 3-29

Emergency
DA40AFM
Procedures
CAUTION
a collision with obstacles can be reduced as follows:
- Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

I -Master switch (ALT/BAT) ....... OFF
9. Touchdown ......................... with the lowest possible

airspeed
END OF CHECKLIST
')

Emergency
3.5.2 LANDING WITH A DEFECTIVE TIRE ON THE MAIN LANDING GEAR
CAUTION
A defective (e.g. burst) tire is not usually easy to detect. The
damage normally occurs during take-off or landing, and is
hardly noticeable during fast taxiing. It is only during the
roll-out after landing or at lower taxiing speeds that a tendency
to swerve occurs. Rapid and determined action is then
required.
1. Advise ATC.
2. Land the airplane at the edge of the runway that is located on the side of
the intact tire, so that changes in direction which must be expected during
( roll-out due to the braking action of the defective tire can be corrected on
the runway.
3. Land with one wing low. The wing on the side of the intact tire should be
held low.
4. Direction should be maintained using the rudder. This should be supported
by use of the brake. It is possible that the brake must be applied strongly -
if necessary to the point where the wheel locks. The wide track of the
landing gear will prevent the airplane from tipping over a wide speed
range. There is no pronounced tendency to tip even when skidding.
END OF CHECKLIST
[ Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 3-31

Emergency
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
3.5.3 LANDING WITH DEFECTIVE BRAKES
In general, a landing on grass is recommended in order to reduce the landing run by virtue
of the greater rolling resistance.
CAUTION
a collision can be reduced as follows:
- Fuel tank selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

-Mixture control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . LEAN- shut off engine
- Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
I - Master switch (ALT/BAT) ....... OFF
)
END OF CHECKLIST
Page 3-32 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Do~# 6.01.01-E l

Emergency
3.6 RECOVERY FROM AN UNINTENTIONAL SPIN
CAUTION
Steps 1 to 4 must be carried out immediately and
simultaneously.
1. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
2. Rudder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . full deflection against
direction of spin
3. Elevator (control stick) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fully forward
4. Ailerons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . neutral
5. Flaps .............................. UP
When Rotation Has Stopped:
6. Rudder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . neutral
7. Elevator (control stick) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pull carefully
8. Return the airplane from a descending into a normal flight attitude. In so
doing do not exceed the 'never exceed speed', VNe·
END OF CHECKLIST
L-
Emergency
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
3.7 OTHER EMERGENCIES
3.7.1 ICING
Unintentional Flight Into Icing Conditions
1. Leave the icing area (by changing altitude or turning back, in order to
reach zones with a higher ambient temperature).
2. Pitot heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
3. Cabin heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
4. Air distributor lever .................... .A (up)
5. RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . increase, in order to prevent
ice build-up on the propeller
blades
7. Emergency window(s) ............ ·..... open if required )
CAUTION
Ice build-up increases the stalling speed. If required for safety
reasons, engine speeds up to 2700 RPM are admissible
without time limit.
8. ATC advise if an emergency is

expected
CAUTION
When the Pitot heating fails, and the alternate static valve is
installed:
- Alternate static valve . . . . . . . . . . . OPEN

- Emergency window(s) .......... close
END OF CHECKLIST
Page 3-34 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. #6.01.01-E l

Emergency
r 3.7.2 FAILURES IN THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
(al Complete Failure of the Electrical System
Due to the strong mechanical design as well as due to the required check of the system
during scheduled inspections, a total failure ofthe electrical system is extremely unlikely.
If, nevertheless, a total failure should occur, all circuit breakers should be checked, pulled
and re-set. If this does not help:
- Set Emergency switch to ON (if installed).
- When necessary, use the flood light for lighting the instruments as well as levers
and switches, etc.
- Set power based on lever positions and engine noise.
- Prepare landing with flaps in the given position.

( - Land on the nearest appropriate airfield.
END OF CHECKLIST
[ Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Page 3-35

Emergency
DA40AFM
Procedures
'\~
(bl Alternator Failure
An alternator failure is indicated by an illuminated or flashing alternator warning light (ALT

or ALTERNATOR) on the annunciator panel and a flashing ammeter on the Vision
Microsystems VM 1000 engine instrument.
I (i) Alternator Failure During Flight
1. Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check; if all are OK, proceed

with step 2
2. Electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . switch OFF all equipment
which is not needed
3. Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check regularly
CAUTION
Those items of equipment which are not needed for the safe )
operation and secure landing of the airplane can be switched
off with the Essential Bus switch (if installed). When the
essential bus is switched ON, only the following items of
equipment are supplied with power:
- NAV/COM 1.
- Transponder (XPDR).
- Flood light.
-Attitude gyro (artificial horizon).
- VM 1000 engine instrument.
- Annunciator panel.
- GPS (if installed).
- Landing light.
- Pitot heating system.
-Flaps. (J
CONTINUED
Page 3-36 Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E ]

Emergency
These items of equipment can be supplied with power by the

battery for at least 30 minutes. Economical use, in particular
of the Pitot heating, and switching off equipment that is not
needed extends the time during which the other equipment
remains available. During the 30 minutes period, the airplane
must be landed at a suitable airfield.
For cases in which the battery capacity is not sufficient to

reach a suitable airfield, an emergency battery is installed in
the IFR model, serving as an additional back-up system for
the attitude gyro (artificial horizon) and flood light. This battery
is switched on with the Emergency switch. It lasts for 1 hour
and 30 minutes when the flood light is switched on.
( I (ii) Alternator Failure on the Ground
I NOTE
I An alternator failure may also be indicted on ground with the
I engine running on IDLE.
I 1. Engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200 RPM

I 2. Electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
I 3. Ammeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check
I
I If the caution light does not extinguish, and the ammeter flashes and
I reads zero:
I - Terminate flight preparation.
L END OF CHECKLIST

Emergency
DA40AFM
Procedures
(c) Starter Malfunction
If the starter does not disengage from the engine after starting (starter warning light
(START) on the annunciator panel remains illuminated or flashing after the engine has
started):
1. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
2. Mixture control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEAN - shut off engine
I 4. Master switch (ALT/BAT) .............. OFF
Terminate flight preparation!
END OF CHECKLIST
(d) Overvoltage )
If a voltage in the upper red sector (above 32 Volts) is indicated:
1. Essential bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON, if installed

2. Master switch (ALT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
WARNING
Leave Master switch (BAT) ON!
3. Equipment that is not needed,

in particular Pitot heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
4. Land on the nearest appropriate airfield.
END OF CHECKLIST
Page 3-38 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

Emergency
DA40AFM .Dia~r!c'JJ! Procedures
r 3.7.3 SUSPICION OF CARBON MONOXIDE CONTAMINATION IN THE CABIN
Carbon monoxide (CO) is a gas which is developed during the combustion process. It
is poisonous and without smell. Since it occurs however usually together with fuel gases,
it can be detected. Increased concentration of carbon monoxide in closed spaces can
be fatal. The occurrence of CO in the cabin is possible only due to a defect. If a smell
I similar to exhaust gases is noticed in the cabin, the measures in the checklist below should
be taken:
I The DA 40 may be equipped with a CO detector (optional equipment, OAM 40-253). If

I the visual alert annunciator illuminates in flight, press the TEST/RESET button. lfthe alert
I continues with the remote light staying ON or a smell similar to exhaust gases is noticed
I in the cabin, the following measures should be taken:
1. Cabin heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

2. Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . open
3. Emergency window(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . open
4. Forward canopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . open
CAUTION
In case of suspicion of carbon monoxide contamination in the
cabin, the front canopy may be unlatched during flight. This
allows it to partially open, in order to improve ventilation. The
canopy will remain open in this position. Flight characteristics
will not be affected significantly.
I NOTE
I The presence of carbon monoxide is indicated by a visual
I alarm if OAM 40-253 is carried out.
END OF CHECKLIST

Emergency
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
3.7.4 'DOOR'-WARNING LIGHT ON
I 1. Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reduce immediately

2. Canopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check visually if closed
3. Rear passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check visually if closed
I
I Canopy Unlocked
I 4. Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . below 140 KIAS

I 5. Land at the next suitable airfield.
I
I Rear Door Unlocked
I 4. Airspeed ............................ below 140 KIAS

I 5. Land at the next suitable airfield.
I .)
I WARNING
I Do not try to lock the rear door in flight. The safety latch may
I disengage and the door opens. Usually this results in a
I separation of the door from the airplane.
I NOTE
I If the rear door has been lost the airplane can be safely flown
I to the next suitable airfield.
END OF CHECKLIST

Emergency
3.7.5 EMERGENCY EXIT
In case of a roll-over ofthe airplane on ground, it can be evacuated through the rear door.
For this purpose release the front hinge of the rear door. The function is displayed on a
placard next to the hinge.
END OF CHECKLIST
L
I Doc.# 6.01.01-E I Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 I Page 3- 4 ]
Emergency
DA40AFM
Procedures
l~
)
I Page3-421 Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 I Doc.#6.01.01-E I

Normal Operating
..
('
CHAPTER4A
Page
4A.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2

4A.2 AIRSPEEDS FOR NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES . . . . 4A-2
4A.3 CHECKLISTS FOR NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES . . . 4A-3
4A.3.1 PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-3
4A.3.2 BEFORE STARTING ENGINE .................... 4A-11
4A.3.3 STARTING ENGINE ............................ 4A-13
c 4A.3.4 BEFORE TAXIING ............................. 4A-19

4A.3.5 TAXIING ..................................... 4A-20
4A.3.6 BEFORE TAKE-OFF ........................... 4A-22
4A.3.7 TAKE-OFF ................................... 4A-25
4A.3.8 CLIMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-27
4A.3.9 CRUISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-29
4A.3.10 MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-31
4A.3.11 DESCENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-33
4A.3.12 LANDING APPROACH ........................ 4A-34
4A.3.13 GO-AROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-36
4A.3.14 AFTER LANDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-37
4A.3.15 ENGINE SHUT-DOWN ........................ 4A-38
4A.3.16 POST-FLIGHT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-39
4A.3.17 FLIGHT IN RAIN .............................. 4A-40
4A.3.18 REFUELING ................................. 4A-40
4A.3.19 FLIGHT AT HIGH ALTITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-40
I Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Page4A-1

Normal Operating
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
4A.1 INTRODUCTION
Chapter 4A contains checklists and describes extended procedures for the normal
operation of the airplane.
4A.2 AIRSPEEDS FOR NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES
I
I
Airspeed for take-off climb
(best rate-of-climb speed Vv) 54 KIAS 60 KIAS 66 KIAS 67 KIAS
(Flaps T/0)
Airspeed for cruise climb
I 60 KIAS 68 KIAS 73 KIAS 76 KIAS
)
Approach speed for normal landing
(Flaps LOG)
Minimum speed during touch & go
(Flaps
(J
Page4A-2 Rev.~ 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Normal Operating
4A.3 CHECKLISTS FOR NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES
4A.3.1 PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTION
I. Cabin Check
a) MET, NAV, mass & CG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . flight planning completed

b) Airplane documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . complete and up-to-date
c) Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pulled out
d) Front canopy and rear door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clean, undamaged, check
locking mechanism function
e) All electrical equipment ................. OFF

f) Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . set in (if one has been
pulled, check reason)
( g) Engine control levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check condition, freedom of

movement and full travel of
throttle, RPM and mixture
levers
h) Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
i) Mixture control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEAN
j) RPM lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIGH RPM
k) Master switch (BAT) ................... ON
I) Annunciator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check function (see 7.11)
m) Fuel quantity ......................... check
CONTINUED
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 Page4A- 3

Normal Operating
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
NOTE
()
Standard Tank:
Depending on the type offuel probes installed, the indicator

can read a maximum of 15 US gal or 17 US gal (refer to
Section 7.10 for details). When the fuel quantity indicator
reads the maximum amount of fuel detectable, the correct
fuel quantity must be determined with the fuel quantity
measuring device. lfthis measurement is not carried out, the
fuel quantity available for flight planning is the indicated
amount.
Long Range Tank:
At an indication of 16 US gal the quantity of auxiliary fuel can

be determined by switching the AUX FUEL QTY switch to the
respective position (LH or RH). The auxiliary fuel quantity is
added to the 16 US gal.
An auxiliary fuel quantity of less than 3 US gal cannot be

indicated by the system. In this case the quantity must be
determined by means of the fuel quantity measuring device
(see Section 7.10- FUEL SYSTEM).
CAUTION
Long Range Tank:
The correct indication of the fuel quantity takes 2 minutes after

actuation of the switch.
CONTINUED
J
Page4A-4 Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 oac. • s.o1.01-e]
Normal Operating
r n). Position lights, strobe lights (ACLs) ........ check

o) Master switch (BAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
p) Check for loose items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . complete
q) Flight controls and trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . free to move and correct
r) Baggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . stowed and secure
s) Emergency axe (if OAM 40-326 installed) . . . stowed and secure
END OF CHECKLIST
II. Walk-around check, visual inspection
CAUTION
A visual inspection means: examination for damage, cracks,
delamination, excessive play, load transmission, correct
attachment and general condition. In addition control surfaces
should be checked for freedom of movement.
CAUTION
In low ambienttemperatures the airplane must be completely
cleared of ice, snow and similar accumulations. For approved
de-icing fluids refer to Section 8.6 - DE-ICING ON THE
GROUND.
CAUTION
Prior to flight, remove such items as control surfaces gust
lock, Pitot cover, tow bar, etc.
CONTINUED
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page4A- 5

Normal Operating
DA40AFM
Procedures
1. Left Main Landing Gear:
a) Landing gear strut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection

b) Strut fairing (if installed) ................. visual inspection
c) Wheel fairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
d) Tire inflation pressure (2.5 bar/36 PSI) . . . . . check
e) Wear, tread depth of tire ................ check
f) Tire, wheel, brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
g) Brake line connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check for leaks
h) Slip marks ........................... visual inspection
i) Chocks remove
2. Left Wing:
~)
a) Entire wing surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
b) Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
c) Air intake on lower surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
d) Openings on lower surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check for traces of fuel (if
tank is full, fuel may spill
over through the tank vent)
e) Tank drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . drain off a small quantity,

check for water and
sediment
f) Stall warning ......................... check (suck on opening)

g) Tank filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection, fuel
quantity must agree with
indicator
h) Tank air outlet in lower surface . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
CONTINUED
(J
Page4A- 6 Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 Doc. # 6.01.01-E
Normal Operating
r i) 2 stall strips on wing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection

j) Pitot probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clean, orifices open
k) Landing/taxi light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
I) Wing tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
m) Position light, strobe light (ACL) .......... visual inspection
n) Mooring ............................. check, clear
o) Aileron and linkage .................... visual inspection
p) Aileron hinges and safety pin ............ visual inspection
q) Foreign objects in aileron paddle . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
r) Flap and linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
s) Flap hinges and safety pin visual inspection
3. Fuselage, Left Side:
a) Canopy, left side ...................... visual inspection

( b) Rear cabin door & window .............. visual inspection
c) Fuselage skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
d) Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
1 e) Autopilot static source (if OAM 40-267
I installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check for blockage
4. Empennage:
a) Stabilizers and control surfaces .......... visual inspection

b) Hinges .............................. visual inspection
c) Elevator trim tab .. : . .................. visual inspection, check
locking wire
d) Rudder trim tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
e) Mooring on fin ........................ check, clear
f) Tail skid and lower fin .................. visual inspection
g) Towing assembly, if fitted visual inspection
CONTINUED
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Page4A-7

Normal Operating
DA40AFM
Procedures
5. Fuselage, Right Side:
a) Fuselage skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection

b) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
c) Canopy, right side ..................... visual inspection
d) Autopilot static source (if OAM 40-267
installed) check for blockage
6. Right Wing:
a) Flap and linkage visual inspection

b) Flap hinges and safety pin ............... visual inspection
c) Aileron and linkage .................... visual inspection
d) Aileron hinges and safety pin . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
e) Foreign objects in aileron paddle . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
f) Wing tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection )
g) Position light, strobe light (ACL) . . . . . . . . . . visual inspectiOI')
h) Mooring ............................. check, clear
i) Entire wing surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
j) 2 stall strips on wing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
k) Tank air outlet in lower surface . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
I) Tank filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual check, fuel quantity
must agree with indicator
m) Openings on lower surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check for traces of fuel (if
tank is full, fuel may spill
over through the tank vent)
n) Tank drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . drain off a small quantity,
check for water and
sediment
o) Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
(J
CONTINUED
Page 4A- 8 Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

Normal Operating
DA40AFM
Procedures
r 7. Right Main Landing Gear:
a) Landing gear strut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection

b) Strut fairing (if installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
c) Wheel fairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
d) Tire inflation pressure (2.5 bar/36 PSI) . . . . . check
e) Wear, tread depth of tires ............... check
f) Tire, wheel, brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
g) Brake line connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check for leaks
i) Chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . remove
8. Front Fuselage:
c a) Oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check dipstick,
b) Cowling ............................. visual inspection

min. 4 qts for VFR operation
min. 6 qts for IFR operation
c) 3 air intakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clear

d) Propeller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection; blade
shake: max. 3 mm (1/8 in);
angular play of blade:
max. 2°
WARNING
Never move the propeller by hand while the ignition is
switched on, as it may result in serious personal injury.
e) Spinner including attachment screws ...... visual inspection
CONTINUED
[Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page4A- 9

Normal Operating
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
f) Nose landing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection

g) Tire and wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
i) Nose landing gear strut fairing (if installed) . . visual inspection
j) Nose landing gear tie-down (if installed) . . . . check, clear
k) Wear, tread depth of tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .• . . . check
I) Wheel fairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection
m) Tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . removed
n) Tire inflation pressure (2.0 bar/29 PSI) ..... check
o) Chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . remove
p) Exhaust ............................. visual inspection
q) Forward cabin air inlets (if installed) . . . . . . . clear
r) Winter baffle for fresh air inlet (if installed) visual inspection
WARNING )
The exhaust can cause burns when it is hot.
Underside:
s) Antennas (if fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual inspection

t) Gascolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . drain off a small quantity of
fuel, check for water and
sediment
u) Venting pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check for blockage
v) Fuselage underside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check for excessive
contamination particularly by
oil, fuel, and other fluids
END OF CHECKLIST
1 Page4A-10 1
Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. • s.o1.01-e]
Normal Operating
4A.3.2 BEFORE STARTING ENGINE
1. Pre-flight inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . complete

2. Rudder pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjusted
3. Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . instructed
4. Safety harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . all on and fastened
5. Baggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check, secured
6. Rear door ............. ·. . . . . . . . . . . . . closed and locked
7. Door lock (if installed) ................. unblocked, key removed
CAUTION
When operating the canopy, ensure that there are no
obstructions between the canopy and the mating frame, for
example seat belts, clothing, etc. When operating the locking
handle do NOT apply undue force.
A slight downward pressure on the canopy may be required

to ease handle operation.
8. Front canopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position 1 or 2 ("Cooling

Gap")
9. Canopy lock (if installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unblocked, key removed
10. Parking brake ....................... set
11. Flight controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . free movement
12. Trim wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T/0
13. Throttle ............................ IDLE
15. Mixture control lever .................. LEAN
16. Friction device, throttle quadrant . . . . . . . . . adjusted
L CONTINUED
[ Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 0 1-Dec-20 10 Page 4A -11

Normal Operating
DA40AFM
Procedures
17. Alternate air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSED

18. Alternate static valve .................. CLOSED, if installed
19. Avionics Master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
20. Essential Bus switch .................. OFF, if installed
CAUTION
When the essential bus is switched ON, the battery will not
be charged unless the essential tie relay bypass
(OAM 40-126) is installed.
21. Master switch (BAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

22. Annunciator panel .................... test (see Section 7.11)
23. Fuel tank selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on full tank
WARNING
)
Never try to start the engine by hand.
END OF CHECKLIST
Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E l

Normal Operating
4A.3.3 STARTING ENGINE
(al Cold Engine
1. Strobe light (ACL) ON

2. Electrical fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON, note pump noise
(=functional check of pump)
3. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 em (1.2 in) forward from

IDLE (measured from rear of
slot)
4. Mixture control lever RICH for 3 - 5 sec, then

LEAN
( 5. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 em (0.4 in) forward from

slot)
WARNING
Before starting the engine the pilot must ensure that the
propeller area is free, and no persons can be endangered.
CAUTION
Do not overheat the starter motor. Do not operate the starter
motor for more than 10 seconds. After operating the starter
motor, let it cool off for 20 seconds. After 6 attempts to start
the engine, let the starter cool off for half an hour.
CONTINUED
[ Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 I Page4A-131

Normal Operating
Procedures
.Diamond
· AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
CAUTION
The use of an external pre-heater and external power source
is recommended whenever possible, in particular at ambient
temperatures below 0 oc (32 °F), to reduce wear and abuse
I to the engine and electrical system. Refer to Section 48.8 -
I STARTING THE ENGINE WITH EXTERNAL POWER.
Pre-heat will thaw the oil trapped in the oil cooler, which can
be congealed in extremely cold temperatures. After a warm-
up period of approximately 2 to 5 minutes (depending on the
ambienttemperature) at 1500 RPM, the engine is ready for
take-off if it accelerates smoothly and the oil pressure is
normal and steady.
6. Ignition switch START
When Engine Fires:

)
7. Mixture control lever .................. rapidly move to RICH
8. Oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . green sector within 15 sec
WARNING
lfthe oil pressure has not mov~d into the green sector within
15 seconds after starting, SWITCH OFF ENGINE and
investigate problem.
10. Master switch (ALT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

11. Ammeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check
12. Fuel pressure ........................ check (14 PSI to 35 PSI)
13. Annunciator panel check
END OF CHECKLIST
Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.Q1-E

Normal Operating
(bl Warm Engine
1. Strobe light (ACL) ON

2. Electrical fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON, note pump noise and
fuel pressure increase
3. Throttle ............................ 3 em (1.2 in) forward from
slot)
4. Mixture control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RICH for 1 - 3 sec, then
LEAN
WARNING
propeller area is free and no persons can be endangered.
(
CAUTION
motor for more than 10 seconds. After operating the starter
L CONTINUED
[Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 I Page 4A - 151

Normal Operating
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
When Engine Fires:
6. Mixture control lever rapidly move to RICH

7. Oil pressure ......................... green sector within 15 sec
WARNING
If the oil pressure has not moved into the green sector within

10. Ammeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check
11. Fuel pressure ........................ check (14 PSI to 35 PSI)
END OF CHECKLIST
IPage4A-161 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E J

Normal Operating
r Ccl Engine Will Not Start After Injection ("Flooded Engine")
1. Strobe light (ACL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

3. Mixture control lever .................. LEAN, fully aft
4. Throttle at mid position
WARNING
propeller area is free and no persons can be endangered.
CAUTION
(_ motor for more than 10 seconds. After operating the starter


6. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pull back towards IDLE
when engine fires
L CONTINUED
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 I Page 4A -171

Normal Operating
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
When Engine Fires:

()
7. Mixture control lever .................. rapidly move to RICH
8. Oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . green sector within 15 sec
WARNING
If the oil pressure has not moved into the green sector within

10. Ammeter ........................... check
11. Fuel pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check (14 PSI to 35 PSI)
)
END OF CHECKLIST
IPage4A-181 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

Normal Operating
4A.3.4 BEFORE TAXIING
1. Avionics Master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

2. Electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON as required
3. Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UP- T/0 - LDG - T/0
(indicator and visual check)
4. Flight instruments and avionics ......... . set, test function, as
required
5. Flood light ON, test function, as
required
6. Ammeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check, if required increase
RPM
7. Fuel tank selector .................... change tanks, confirm that
engine also runs on other
tank (at least 1 minute at
( 1500 RPM)
8. Pitot heating ON, test function;
ammeter must show rise
9. Pitot heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
10. Strobe lights (ACLs) .................. check ON, as required
11. Position lights, landing and taxi lights . . . . . ON, as required
CAUTION
When taxiing at close range to other aircraft, or during night
flight in clouds, fog or haze, the strobe lights should be
switched OFF. The position lights must always be switched
ON during night flight.
12. Idle RPM ........................... check, 600 to 800 RPM
END OF CHECKLIST
Doc. #6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 I Page4A-191

Normal Operating
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
4A.3.5 TAXIING
1. Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . release

2. Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . test on moving off
3. Flight instrumentation and avionics
(particularly directional gyro and
turn and bank indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check for correct indications
CAUTION
When taxiing on a poor surface select the lowest possible
RPM to avoid damage to the propeller from stones or similar
items.
CAUTION
Following extended operation on the ground, or at high
.)
ambient temperatures, the following indications of fuel vapor .
lock may appear:
- Arbitrary changes in idle RPM and fuel flow.

- Slow reaction of the engine to operation of throttle.
- Engine will not run with throttle in IDLE position.
CONTINUED
IPage4A-20 I Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

Normal Operating
DA40AFM
Procedures
r Remedy:
1. For about 1 to 2 minutes, or until the engine settles,

run at a speed of 1800 to 2000 RPM. Oil and cylinder
head temperatures must stay within limits.
2. Pull throttle back to IDLE to confirm smooth running.
3. Set throttle to 1200 RPM and mixture for taxiing, i.e.,

use mixture control lever to set the maximum RPM
attainable.
4. Immediately before the take-off run set the mixture for

take-off, apply full throttle and hold this position for
10 seconds.
(_ NOTE
Vapor lock can be avoided if the engine is run at speeds of
1800 RPM or more. This results in lower fuel temperatures.
END OF CHECKLIST
L" /
"
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page4A-21

Normal Operating
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
4A.3.6 BEFORE TAKE-OFF
CAUTION
Before take-off, the engine must run on each tank for at least
1 minute at 1500 RPM.
1. Position airplane into wind if possible

3. Safety harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on and fastened
4. Rear door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check closed and locked
5. Front canopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . closed and locked
CAUTION
obstructions in between the canopy and the mating frame,
for example seat belts, clothing, etc. When operating the
locking handle do NOT apply undue force.

6. Door warning light (DOOR or DOORS) . . . . check OFF

7. Fuel tank selector .................... fullest tank
8. Engine instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in green sector
9. Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pressed in
CONTINUED
(J
IPage4A- 221 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 0= # 6.01.01-E l
Normal Operating
10. Fuel pressure indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check (approx. 14-35 PSI)

12. Mixture control lever RICH (below 5000 ft)
NOTE
At a density altitude of 5000 ft or above or at high ambient
temperatures a fully rich mixture can cause rough running
of the engine or a los:; of performance. The mixture should
be set for smooth running of the engine.
13. Flaps .............................. check T/0

14. Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check T/0
15. Flight controls ....................... free movement, correct
c: 16. Throttle ............................ 2000 RPM

17.
sense
RPM lever .......................... pull back until a drop of

250 to 500 RPM is reached -
HIGH RPM; cycle 3 times
18. Magneto check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L - BOTH - R - BOTH

Max. RPM drop .. 175 RPM
Max. difference ... 50 RPM
If the electronic ignition
control unit is installed, the
ignition status light must
illuminate and extinguish
after approximately 20 to
30sec
L CONTINUED
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 I

Page 4A- 231
Normal Operating
DA40AFM
Procedures
CAUTION
The lack of an RPM drop suggests a faulty grounding or
incorrect ignition timing. In case of doubt the magneto check
can be repeated with a leaner mixture, in order to confirm a
problem. Even when running on only one magneto the engine
should not run unduly roughly.
19. Circuit breaker ....................... check in

20. Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check in green range
21. Throttle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
22. Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . release
23. Alternate air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check CLOSED
24. Landing light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON as required
25. Pitot heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON as required )
END OF CHECKLIST
J
IPage 4A - 241 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E
Normal Operating
4A.3. 7 TAKE-OFF
Normal Take-Off Procedure
1. Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON/ALT
2. RPM lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check HIGH RPM
3. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX PWR (not abruptly)
WARNING
The proper performance of the engine at full throttle should
be checked early in the take-off procedure, so that the take-off
I can be aborted if necessary.
A rough engine, sluggish RPM increase, or failure to reach

take-off RPM (2680 ± 20 RPM) are reasons for aborting the
( take-off. lfthe engine oil is cold, an oil pressure in the yellow

sector is permissible.
4. Elevator ............................ neutral

5. Rudder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . maintain direction
NOTE
In strong crosswinds steering can be augmented by use of
the toe brakes. It should be noted, however, thatthis method
increases the take-off roll, and should not generally be used.
6. Nose wheel lift-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . at vR = 59 KIAS
CONTINUED
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 I Page4A-251

Normal Operating
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
7. Airspeed ............................ 67 KIAS (1200 kg, 26461b)

66 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
60 KIAS (below 1000 kg,
22051b)
Above a Safe Height:
8. RPM lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2400 RPM

10. Landing light ........................ OFF
END OF CHECKLIST
(J
IPage 4A- 261 Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 Doc. # 6.01.01-E J
Normal Operating
r 4A.3.8 CLIMB
Procedure for Best Rate of Climb
1. Flaps .............................. T/0

2. Airspeed ........................... 67 KIAS (1200 kg, 26461b)
66 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
60 KIAS (1000 kg, 22051b)
54 KIAS (850 kg, 18741b)
3. RPM lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2400 RPM

4. ThrotUe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX PWR
5. Mixture control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RICH, above 5000 ft hold
EGT constant
( 6.
7.
Engine instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in green sector
Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . as required
8. Electrical fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON at high altitudes
CAUTION
Operation at high altitudes with the electrical fuel pump OFF
may cause vapor bubbles, resulting in intermittent low fuel
pressure indications, sometimes followed by high fuel flow
indications.
END OF CHECKLIST
[Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 I Page4A-271

Normal Operating
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
Cruise Climb
()
1. Flaps UP
73 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
68 KIAS (1000 kg, 22051b)
60 KIAS (850 kg, 18741b)
3. RPM lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2400 RPM

4. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX PWR
5. Mixture control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RICH, above 5000 ft hold
EGT constant
6. Engine instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in green sector

7. Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . as required f\ )•
CAUTION
indications.
END OF CHECKLIST
IPage4A-281 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E l

Normal Operating
4A.3.9 CRUISE
1. Flaps .............................. UP
2. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . set performance according
to table
3. RPM lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1800 - 2400 RPM
NOTE
Favorable combinations of manifold pressure and RPM are
given in Chapter 5.
NOTE
To optimize engine life the cylinder head temperature (CHT)
c I
I
should lie between 150 °F (66 °C) and 400 °F (204 °C) in
continuous operation, and not rise above 435 °F (224 °C) in
fast cruise.
NOTE
The oil temperature in continuous operation should lie
between 165 OF (74 °C) and 220 °F (104 °C).Ifpossible, the
oil temperature should not remain under 180 OF (82 °C) for
long periods, so as to avoid accumulation of condensation
water.
4. Mixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . set in accordance with

4A.3.1 0 - MIXTURE
ADJUSTMENT
L CONTINUED
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 I Page 4A - 291

Normal Operating
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
5. Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . as required
6. Fuel tank selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . as required
(max. difference 10 US gal
with Standard Tank,
8 US gal with Long Range
Tank)
7. Electrical fuel pump ................... ON at high altitudes
CAUTION
indications.
)
NOTE
While switching from one tank to the other, the electrical fuel
pump should be switched ON.
END OF CHECKLIST
IPage4A-30 I Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E ]

Normal Operating
DA40AFM • Diamond
AIRCRAFT Procedures
r .
4A.3.10 MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION
1. The maximum permissible cylinder head temperature
(500 °F (260 °C)) must never be exceeded.
2. The mixture control lever should always be moved

slowly.
3. Before selecting a higher power setting the mixture

control lever should, on each occasion, be moved
slowly to fully RICH.
4. Care should always be taken that the cylinders do not

cool down too quickly. The cooling rate should not
exceed 50 °F (22.8 °C) per minute.
Best Economy Mixture
The best economy mixture setting may only be used up to a power setting of 75 %. In
order to obtain the lowest specific fuel consumption at a particular power setting proceed
as follows: Slowly pull the mixture control lever back towards LEAN until the engine starts
to run roughly. Then push the mixture control lever forward just far enough to restore
smooth running. At the same time the exhaust gas temperature (EGT) should reach a
maximum.
The exact value of EGT can be obtained by pressing the far left button on the engine
instrument unit VM 1000. In the Lean mode one bar represents 10 °F (4.6 °C).
CONTINUED
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page4A- 31

Normal Operating
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
Best Power Mixture
The mixture can be set for maximum performance at all power settings. The mixture should
first be set as for 'best economy'. The mixture should then be enriched until the exhaust
gas temperature is approximately 100 •F (55 •c) lower.
This mixture setting produces the maximum performance for a given manifold pressure
and is mainly used for high power settings (approximately 75 %).
END OF CHECKLIST
iJ
IPage4A-321 Rev. a 01-Dec-201 0 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Normal Operating
4A.3.11 DESCENT
1. Mixture control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjust as required for the

altitude, operate slowly
2. RPM lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1800 - 2400 RPM
3. Throttle ............................ as required
CAUTION
When reducing power, the change in cylinder head
temperature should not exceed 50 "F (22.8 "C) per minute.
This is normally guaranteed by the 'self adapting inlet'. An
excessive cooling rate may occur however, when the engine
is very hot and the throttle is reduced abruptly in a fast
descent. This will be indicated by a flashing cylinder head
temperature indication.
CAUTION
indications.
END OF CHECKLIST
L
[ Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 [ Page 4A- 331
Normal Operating
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
4A.3.12 LANDING APPROACH
1. Fuel selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fullest tank

3. Safety harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fastened
4. Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reduce to operate flaps
(108 KIAS)
5. Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T/0
6. Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . as required
7. Landing light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . as required
Before Landing:
8. Mixture control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RICH

10. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . as required )
11. Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . reduce to operate flaps
(91 KIAS)
12. Flaps .............................. LDG
13. Approach speed ...................... 73 KIAS (1200 kg, 26461b)

71 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
67 KIAS (1092 kg, 24071b)
63 KIAS (1000 kg, 22051b)
58 KIAS (850 kg, 18741b)
CAUTION
In conditions such as (e.g.) strong wind, danger of wind shear
or turbulence a higher approach speed should be selected.
CONTINUED
IPage 4A - 341 Rev.8 01-Dec-201 0 Doc. # 6.01.01-E ]

Normal Operating
r I
NOTE
In case of airplanes with a maximum landing mass less than
I the maximum permitted flight mass, a landing with a higher
mass constitutes an abnormal operating procedure. Refer
to Sections 2.7- MASS (WEIGHT) and 48.7- LANDING
WITH HIGH LANDING MASS.
END OF CHECKLIST
c:
L..
~
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 I Page4A-351

Normal Operating
Procedures
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
4A.3.13 GO-AROUND
1. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX PWR

66 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
60 KIAS (1000 kg, 22051b)
54 KIAS (850 kg, 18741b)
3. Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T/0
Above a Safe Height:
4. RPM lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2400 RPM
5. Airspeed ............................ 76 KIAS (1200 kg, 26461b) ,)

73 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
68 KIAS (1000 kg, 2205 lb)
60 KIAS (850 kg, 18741b)
6. Flaps .............................. UP
7. Electrical fuel pump ................... OFF
END OF CHECKLIST
J
IPage 4A- 361 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Normal Operating
r 4A.3.14 AFTER LANDING
1. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
4. Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF I STBY
5. Pitot heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
6. Avionics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . as required
7. Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . as required
8. Flaps .............................. UP
END OF CHECKLIST
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 I Page 4A- 371

Normal Operating
• Diamond A IRCRAFT
DA 40 AFM
Procedures
4A.3.15 ENGINE SHUT-DOWN

3. Avionics Master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
4. All electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
5. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000 RPM
6. Ignition check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF until RPM drops
noticeably, then immediately
BOTH again
7. Mixture control lever .. . . . . ..... .. . . ... LEAN - shut engine off

9. Master switch (AL T/BAT) . . . ... .. .. . . . . OFF
END OF CH ECKLIST
I Page 4A - 381 Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 J

Doc. # 6.01 .01-E
Normal Operating
r 4A.3.16 POST-FLIGHT INSPECTION
1. Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF, remove key

2. Master switch (BAT) .................. ON
3. Avionics Master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
4. ELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check activated:
listen on 121.5 MHz
5. Avionics Master switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

6. Master switch (BAT) .................. OFF
7. Parking brake ....................... release, use chocks
8. Airplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . moor, if unsupervised for
extended period
NOTE
( If the airplane is not operated for more than 5 days, the long-
term parking procedure should be applied. If the airplane is
not operated for more than 30 days, the storage procedure
should be applied. Both procedures are described in the
Airplane Maintenance Manual (Doc. No. 6.02.01) in
Chapter 10.
END OF CHECKLIST
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 I Page 4A- 391

Normal Operating
DA40AFM
Procedures
4A.3.17 FLIGHT IN RAIN
NOTE
Performance deteriorates in rain; this applies particularly to
the take-off distance and to the maximum horizontal speed.
The effect on the flight characteristics is minimal. Flight
through very heavy rain should be avoided because of the
associated visibility problems.
4A.3.18 REFUELING
CAUTION
Before refueling, the airplane must be connected to electrical
ground. Grounding points: unpainted areas (latches) on steps,
left and right.
)
4A.3.19 FLIGHT AT HIGH ALTITUDE
At high altitudes the provision of oxygen for the occupants is necessary. Legal
requirements for the provision of oxygen should be adhered to.
Also see Section 2.11 - OPERATING ALTITUDE.
J
IPage .oA - 40 I Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Do~ #6.01.01-EJ
Abnormal Operating
CHAPTER4B
Page
48.1 PRECAUTIONARY LANDING 48-2

48.2 INSTRUMENT INDICATIONS OUTSIDE OF GREEN RANGE . . 48-4
48.3 FAILURES IN THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-5
48.4 TAKE-OFF FROM A SHORT GRASS STRIP ................ 48-7
48.5 FAILURES IN FLAP OPERATING SYSTEM ................ 48-9
(~ 48.6 FAILURES IN ELECTRICAL RUDDER PEDAL ADJUSTMENT . 48-10
48.7 LANDING WITH HIGH LANDING MASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-11
48.8 STARTING THE ENGINE WITH EXTERNAL POWER . . . . . . . 48-12
L
I Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 48-1
Abnormal Operating
DA40AFM
Procedures
48.1 PRECAUTIONARY LANDING
NOTE
A landing of this type is only necessary when there is a
reasonable suspicion that due to fuel shortage, weather
conditions, or at nightfall the possibility of endangering the
airplane and its occupants by continuing the flight cannot be
excluded. The pilot is required to decide whether or not a
controlled landing in a field represents a lower risk than the
attempt to reach the target airfield under all circumstances.
NOTE
If no level landing area is available, a landing on an upward
slope should be sought. I)
1. Select appropriate landing area.
2. Consider wind.
3. Approach: If possible, the landing area should be overflown at a suitable
height in order to recognize obstacles. The degree of offset at
each part of the circuit will allow the wind speed and direction
to be assessed.

73 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
68 KIAS (1000 kg, 22051b)
60 KIAS (850 kg, 18741b)
5. ATC .......... ·.· .................. . advise
CONTINUED
Page4B -2 Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

Abnormal Operating
r On Fina/Approach:
6. Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LDG
7. Safety harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tighten
8. Touchdown ......................... with the lowest possible
airspeed
CAUTION
If sufficient time is remaining, the risk in the event of a
collision with obstacles can be reduced as follows:
- Fuel tank selector . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

- Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
- Master switch (AL T/BAT) OFF
( END OF CHECKLIST
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page4B- 3

Abnormal Operating
DA40AFM
Procedures
48.2 INSTRUMENT INDICATIONS OUTSIDE OF GREEN RANGE
{a) High Oil Pressure When Starting in Low Ambient Temperatures
- Reduce RPM and re-check oil pressure at a higher oil temperature.
- If on reducing the RPM the indicated oil pressure does not change, it is probable that
the fault lies in the oil pressure indication. Terminate flight preparation.
{b) High Manifold Pressure
If the manifold pressure indicator is clearly above the green range, the reading is faulty.
In this case the performance settings should be undertaken by means ofthe lever settings.
The airplane should be serviced.
{c) Oil Temperature

)
A constant reading of the oil temperature of 26 •F (-3 ·c) or 317 •F (158 •c) suggests
a faulty oil temperature sensor. The airplane should be serviced.
{d) Cylinder Head Temperature and Exhaust Gas Temperature
A very low reading of CHT or EGT for a single cylinder may be the result of a loose sensor.
In this case the reading will indicate the temperature of the engine compartment. The
airplane should be serviced.
END OF CHECKLIST
Page 48-4 Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

Abnormal Operating
48.3 FAILURES IN THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
(a) 'Low Voltage' Caution (VOLT or LOW VOLTS)
This caution is indicated when the normal on-board voltage (28 V) drops below 24 V.
Possible reasons are:
- A fault in the power supply.
- RPM too low.
(i) 'Low Voltage' Caution on the Ground:
1. Engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200 RPM

2. Electrical equipment .................. OFF
( 3. Ammeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check
If the caution light does not go out, and the ammeter flashes and reads
zero:
- Terminate flight preparation.
(ii) 'Low Voltage' Caution During Flight:
1. Electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF if not needed

2. Ammeter ........................... check
If the caution light daes not go out, and the ammeter flashes and reads
zero:
- Follow procedure in 3.7.2 (b)-ALTERNATOR FAILURE.
(iii) 'Low Voltage' Caution During Landing:
- Follow (i) after landing.
L END OF CHECKLIST
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page4B- 5

Abnormal Operating
Procedures
•
Cbl Electronic Ignition Control Unit

Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
\,
If the electronic ignition control unit is installed but inoperative, the white status light for
the ignition (IGN or IGNITION) will be illuminated, and the conventional magneto ignition
will take over the ignition control.
The flight can be continued normally. However, fuel consumption will slightly increase,
and engine starting will become difficult.
END OF CHECKLIST
(J
I Page 48-61 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 I Doc.# 6.01.01-EJ
Abnormal Operating
DA40AFM
Procedures
48.4 TAKE-OFF FROM A SHORT GRASS STRIP
1. Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . apply
2. Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T/0
3. Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX PWR
4. Elevator (control stick) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fully aft
5. .Brakes ............................. release
6. Hold direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . using rudder
NOTE
In strong crosswinds steering can be augmented by use of
the toe brakes. It should be noted, however, thatthis method
increases the take-off roll, and should not generally be used.
( 7. Elevator (control stick) ................. release slowly, when nose

wheel has lifted
Allow airplane to lift off as
soon as possible and
increase speed at low level
8. Airspeed ........................... 67 KIAS (1200 kg, 26461b)

66 KIAS ( 1150 kg, 2535 lb)
60 KIAS (1000 kg, 22051b)
54 KIAS (850 kg, 18741b)
9. RPM lever .......................... 2400 RPM, above safe

altitude
CONTINUED
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page4B -7

Abnormal Operating
DA40AFM
Procedures
10. Flaps .............................. UP, above safe altitude

11. Electrical fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF, above safe altitude
12. Landing light as required
END OF CHECKLIST
(J
Page4B- 8 Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Abnormal Operating
r 48.5 FAILURES IN FLAP OPERATING SYSTEM
Failure in Position Indication or Function
- Check flap position visually.
- Keep airspeed in white sector.
- Re-check all positions of the flap· switch.
Modified Approach Procedure Depending on the Available Flap Setting
(a) Only UP or T/0 Available:
Airspeed ........................... 76 KIAS (1200 kg, 26461b)

73 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
68 KIAS (1000 kg, 22051b)
60 KIAS (850 kg, 18741b)
Land at a flat approach angle, use throttle to control airplane speed and
rate of descent.
(b) Only LDG Available:
Perform normal landing.
END OF CHECKLIST
L
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page4B- 9
Abnormal Operating
DA40 AFM
Procedures
48.6 FAILURES IN ELECTRICAL RUDDER PEDAL ADJUSTMENT
Runaway of Electrical Rudder Pedal Adjustment (Optional Equipment. OAM 40-251 l
NOTE
The circuit breaker for the rudder pedal adjustment is located
below the related switch, on the rear wall of the leg room .
1. Circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pull
END OF CHECKLIST
I Page 4B - 10 I Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

Abnormal Operating
48.7 LANDING WITH HIGH LANDING MASS
NOTE
This Section only applies to airplanes with a maximum landing
I mass less than the maximum flight mass. All landings with
I a current flight mass not exceeding the maximum permissible
I landing mass constitutes a normal operating procedure. Refer
I to Sections 2. 7 - MASS (WEIGHT) and 4A.3.12- LANDING
I APPROACH.
NOTE
The maximum landing mass given in Chapter 2 is the highest
mass for landing conditions atthe maximum descent velocity.
This velocity was used in the strength calculations to
( determine the landing gear loads during a particularly hard

landing.
Perform landing approach and landing according to Chapter 4A, but maintain an increased
airspeed during landing approach.
Approach speed .............................. 73 KIAS (1200 kg, 2646 lb)

71 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
WARNING
Damage of the landing gear can result from a hard landing
with a flight mass above the maximum landing mass.
END OF CHECKLIST
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 0 1-Dec-20 10 Page 48- 11

Abnormal Operating
DA40AFM
Procedures
48.8 STARTING THE ENGINE WITH EXTERNAL POWER
WARNING
The use of an external power supply for engine starting with
an empty airplane battery is not permitted if the subsequent
flight is intended to be an IFR flight. In this case the airplane
battery must be charged first.
WARNING
The external power supply must be operated by a person
made aware of the associated procedures. Special care is
required due to the proximity of the propeller area.
NOTE
Starting the engine with external power is recommended in
particular at ambient temperatures below 0 oc (32 °F), to
)
reduce wear and abuse to the engine and electrical system.
1. Pre-flight inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . complete

2. Rudder pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjusted
3. Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . instructed
4. Safety harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . all on and fastened
5. Baggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check, secured
6. Rear door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . closed and locked
7. Door lock (if installed) ................. unblocked, key removed
CONTINUED
IPage4B-121 Rev.B 01-Dec-201 0 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

Abnormal Operating
r I
I
CAUTION
I obstructions between the canopy and the mating frame, for
I example seat belts, clothing, etc. When operating the locking
I handle do NOT apply undue force.

8. Front canopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position 1 or 2 ("Cooling

gap")
9. Canopy lock (if installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unblocked, key removed
10. Parking brake ....................... set
11. Flight controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . free movement
( 12. Trim wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T/0
13. Throttle ............................ IDLE
14. RPM lever .......................... HIGH RPM
15. Mixture control lever .................. LEAN
16. Friction device, throttle quadrant . . . . . . . . . adjusted
17. Alternate air ......................... CLOSED
18. Alternate static valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSED, if installed
19. Avionics Master switch ................ OFF
20. Essential Bus switch OFF, if installed
CAUTION
When the essential bus is switched ON, the battery will not
be charged unless the essential tie relay bypass
(OAM 40-126) is installed.
L CONTINUED
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 I Page4B-131

Abnormal Operating
DA40AFM
Procedures
21. External power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connect

()
22. Master switch (BAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
23. Annunciator panel test (see Section 7.11 )
24. Fuel tank selector on full tank
WARNING
25. Starting engine procedure refer to 4A.3.3 . . execute

26. External power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . disconnect, close access
panel
)
27. Ammeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . check
28. Master switch (ALT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF, note decrease of
ammeter reading
END OF CHECKLIST
J..
IPage 48 - 141 Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E
Performance
CHAPTERS
PERFORMANCE
Page
5.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................... 5-2

5.2 USE OF THE PERFORMANCE TABLES AND DIAGRAMS ...... 5-2
5.3 PERFORMANCE TABLES AND DIAGRAMS .................. 5-3
5.3.1 AIRSPEED CALIBRATION ........................... 5-3
5.3.2 TABLE FOR SETTING ENGINE PERFORMANCE ........ 5-4
5.3.3 PRESSURE ALTITUDE - DENSITY ALTITUDE ........... 5-7
( 5.3.4 STALLING SPEEDS ................................ 5-8
5.3.5 WIND COMPONENTS .............................. 5-9
5.3.6 TAKE-OFF DISTANCE ............................. 5-10
5.3.7 CLIMB PERFORMANCE- TAKE-OFF CLIMB ........... 5-13
5.3.8 CLIMB PERFORMANCE- CRUISE CLIMB ............. 5-15
5.3.9 CRUISING (TRUE AIRSPEED TAS) .................. 5-17
5.3.10 LANDING DISTANCE- FLAPS LDG ................. 5-18
5.3.11 LANDING DISTANCE - FLAPS UP .................. 5-21
5.3.12 GRADIENT OF CLIMB ON GO-AROUND ............. 5-24
5.3.13 APPROVED NOISE DATA ......................... 5-24
I Doc. # 6.01.01-E ·Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 5-1

Performance .Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The performance tables and diagrams on the following pages are presented so that, on
the one hand, you can see what performance you can expect from your airplane, while
on the other they allow comprehensive and sufficiently accurate flight planning. The values
in the tables and the diagrams were obtained in the framework of the flight trials using
an airplane and power-plant in good condition, and corrected to the conditions of the
=
International Standard Atmosphere (ISA 15 oc /59 °F and 1013.25 hPa /29.92 inHg
at sea level).
The performance diagrams do not take into account variations in pilot experience or a
poorly maintained airplane. The performances given can be attained if the procedures
quoted in this manual are applied, and the airplane has been well maintained.
5.2 USE OF THE PERFORMANCE TABLES AND DIAGRAMS )

In order to illustrate the influence of a number of different variables, the performance data
is reproduced in the form of tables or diagrams. These contain sufficiently detailed
information so that conservative values can be selected and used for the determination
of adequate performance data for the planned flight.
Where appropriate, any flight performance degradation resulting from the absence of wheel
fairings is given as a percentage.
The installation of the optional fairings on the main landing gear struts and/or nose landing
gear strut has only minor effects on the flight performance of the DA 40. Therefore, no
change applies to the performance tables and diagrams.

Performance
5.3 PERFORMANCE TABLES AND DIAGRAMS
5.3.1 AIRSPEED CALl BRATION
180
I
170 ... Flaps UP l/.~
160 ~-:x- Flaps T/0 v~ ""'
-o-- Flaps LOG ~
150 ~
140
~
~
130
r-
/
t
1-
/
( 120
£
Cl) 110 ;r
< 100
u
r-
~ 1?
~
90 .... ~
80 / ?
70
r-
~ ~
60
1-
~ r .
50
... ~
40
v./
40 50 60 70 80 90 I 00 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180
KIAS ___..
L
I Doc.# 6.01.01-E I Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 Page 5-3
Performance .Dia"!.'i!l!J! DA40AFM
5.3.2 TABLE FOR SETTING ENGINE PERFORMANCE
NOTE
If the Long Range Tank is installed:
Auxiliary fuel below 3 US gal cannot be indicated by the

system. If a fuel indicator shows 16 US gal and the auxiliary
fuel indicator reads 0 US gal on the same side, for in-flight
fuel consumption I flight planning a fuel quantity available of
16 US gal must be assumed.
')
Page 5-4 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

DA40AFM Performance
1000 13 21.0
2000 11 52 19.6 20.7
3000 9 48 19.3 20.4
4000 7 45 19.0 20.1
(_ 5000 5 41 18.7 19.8
6000 3 38 18.4 19.5
7000 1 34 18.2
8000 -1 31 17.9
• 9000 -3 27
10000 -5 23
11000 -7 19
12000 -9 16
13000 -11 12
14000 -13 9
15000 -15 6
16000 -17 2
L
I Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 5-5
Performance .Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
1000 13 55 26.4
2000 11 52 26.0
3000 9 48 25.7
4000 7 45 25.4
5000
6000
5
3
41
38
I
)
7000 1 34
8000 -1 31
9000 -3 27
10000 -5 23
The areas shaded grey under each RPM heading are the recommended bands.
Correcting the Table for Variation from Standard Temperature
- At ISA + 15 oc (ISA + 27 oF) the performance values fall by approx. 3% of the

power selected according to the above table.
- At ISA - 15 oc (I SA - 27 °F) the performance values rise by approx. 3 % of the

power selected according to the above table.
(J
Page 5-6 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Performance
r 5.3.3 PRESSURE ALTITUDE • DENSITY ALTITUDE
Conversion from pressure altitude to density altitude.

I I 1[14000~-~--~--~-----.-------. ![ g
CD
~ 4000 "0 :!::! :!::!
::I ::I cu cu
Ecu 3500 Ecu 12000 I '!-\:: I ........ .J I I ~
·u; ~
·u;
e e
:::::1
CD
"0
1: 1:
CD
:::::1 "0
~ 3000 ~ 1000 14000
a. a. 4000
2500 12000
3500
2000 10000 3000

60
1500
I 8000 2500
( 1000 6000
2000
1500
4000
1000
2000 500
-500 0 0
-10 0 1"0 20 3o [•c1

-4 14 32 50 68 86 [•F]
temperature
Example: 1. Set 1013.25 hPa on altimeter and read pressure altitude (900 ft).
2. Establish ambient temperature (+21 •c (70 •F)).
3. Read off density altitude (1800 ft).
L Result: From a performance calculation standpoint the airplane is at 1800 ft.
I Doc.#6.01.01-E J Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 J Page5-;J

Performance • Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
5.3.4 STALLING SPEEDS
Airspeeds in KIAS
Mass: 980 kg <2161 lb)
Mass: 1150 kg C25351b)
Mass: 1200 kg (26461b) (if MAM 40-227 is carried out)
I
I
I /J.
\. --~'-~

Performance
5.3.5 WIND COMPONENTS
F:;st•l D ,·c, c;.'
•
!11 l !Llfl i 111! U1ii li I
II I I : . 1I rLf I . 11 !I ! 41=! i i !i ! , eo
3J
~ J l
i
'l u.·., ~ ',·
,f,
I . .. . .!~ l
1 ';,!. I .
T
I i'
r
!/
i ... )~
I
,
Ti !'·.. . tl· c~!. ±. .

m,· ,:;_, ! l).'l··
1 :1
~~~ •011:
iiJn. !I
1:
1·,
ill II I ll l ' i Ij f.( ~!'fi ! i I: I 6 G0
~ 2 ~ H-
!!
J-i' ...
1
ll,i:,' UY.•'
Y! ,
; y-rl
( t
; Ii ~ ~~I i'
~~j r l
1 J
CIJ
c
c-
(I
li
:l
()
'
.,.-,
)
3
i)
CIJ
w
I
Example: Flight direction 360"

Wind 32"/30 kts
Result: Crosswind component 16 kts
L Max. demonstrated crosswind component 20 kts
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. a 01-Dec-201 0 Page 5-9

Performance • Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
5.3.6 TAKE-OFF DISTANCE
Conditions: - Throttle MAXPWR

- RPM lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2700 RPM
- Flaps .................... T/0
- Lift-off speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . approx. 59 KIAS
- Climb-out speed ............ 67 KIAS (1200 kg, 26461b)

66 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
60 KIAS (below 1000 kg,
22051b)
- Runway .................. level, asphalt surface
)
WARNING
Poor maintenance condition of the airplane, deviation from
the given procedures as well as unfavorable external factors
(high temperature, rain, unfavorable wind conditions, including
cross-wind) will increase the take-off distance.
CAUTION
For a safe take-off the take-off run available (TORA) should
be at least equal to the take-off distance over a 50ft (15m)
obstacle.

Performance
CAUTION
The figures in the following NOTE are typical values. On wet
ground or wet soft grass covered runways the take-off roll
may become significantly longer than stated below. In any
case the pilot must allow for the condition of the runway to
ensure a safe take-off.
NOTE
For take-off from dry, short-cut grass covered runways, the
following corrections must be taken into account, compared
to paved runways (typical values, see CAUTION above):
- Grass up to 5 em (2 in) long: 10% increase in take-off roll.

- Grass 5to 10cm (2to4 in) long: 15% increase intake-off
c roll.
- Grass longer than 10 em (4 in): at least 25% increase in
take-off roll.
- Grass longer than 25 em (10 in): take-off should not be
attempted.
NOTE
On wet grass, a further 10 % increase in take-off roll must
be expected.
NOTE
An uphill slope of 2% (2m per 100m, or 2ft per 100ft)
results in an increase in the take-off distance of approximately
10 %. The effect on the take-off roll can be greater.
L
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 5-11
"'C
Ill
------------------------------ .,
CD
cc
CD
DA 40 - TAKE-OFF DISTANCES a-
(1'1
- T/0 MASS lib) WIND COMPONENT OBSTACLE 3
Dl
I
...... OUTSIDEAIRTEMPERATURE("F) - 88888888 lm/s) - HEIGHT 1ft) - :I
1\J 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 eo 90 100 110 120 lEl ~ C!i ~ ~ l'i f<l \!! o 2 4 6 s 10 o 50
,_____, 2
"''''''""''"''''" ,, "''''''' '":'''''''''' , '' , "'' , ''''' ' ' "i':f"i""i"'l"'j:''
ALTIMETERSEfTING .
... 1013 h,Pa I~-~ inH~········f········!10000ft(!·····
I I I I I I I I I I I
1400
1300
4500
:;o ······---~·-·······+··· .. ····!------
~
co
·=:A,kooe ! :! ~o~~~l-·
Ou1side Air Temperature : 15 •c (59 'F)
·v;····-r ··-r·"~"·I,+Ar4ti·22i
RBgpou
. c; 1~
1200 4000
•
Mass : 1000 kg (2205 lb)
Headwind Component : 10 kt ·
····:····r···t···r···,····' 1100
3500
j. 1000
0
...... I 3000 l£
900-
s·tl
I §.
0 ~
CD BOO~
'? ~ 2500 ~
1\J
0 700 !a0
~=
...... 0
IL
0
600 ~ 2000 ~
~
~ ;:!: ~a
~8.
500
1500
400
300 l1000
200
500
100
0
0 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
p
=It: OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE ("C) - WIND COMPONENT OBSTACLE
....0~
C) - T/0 MASSikg) [let) - HEIGHTim) -
0
......
0
......
m
I
,.
"11
i:
----
~ ~ ~
Performance
r· 5.3.7 CLIMB PERFORMANCE· TAKE-OFF CLIMB
Conditions: - Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX PWR

- RPM lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2400 RPM
- Flaps .................... T/0
- Airspeed ................. 67 KIAS (1200 kg, 26461b)

66 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
60 KIAS (1000 kg, 22051b)
54 KIAS (850 kg, 18741b)
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page5-13

"'0
Dl
co
-----------------------------
DA 40- CLIMB PERFORMANCE- TAKE OFF CLIMB
<D OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE FFJ- ~FLIGHT- MASS [lb]
U1 8 8 8 8 8
~ ~ ~ ~
I
_.. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
r I r I
"'"
r r
0 0
100 0.5
::u
<D
200
::: 300 1.5
co
400 2
500 2.5
0_.. 600 £' 3 ~
0
I
~ .,E.
3.5 ::;
<D 700 ::;
"'
0 ::; :::i
N
I
800 0 4 0
"- "-
0_.. 0
0 900 ~ 4.5 w
1-- !(
1000~ 5
"'I
I
r ..
Oft PRESSURE ALTITUDE 5.5
1100.
\ \ ~ \
t
· · Exa~ple: •· · ·'
1. 1200 6
- Pressure Altitude
········-Outside Air Temperature
........ - Flight Mass
Oft •
15 'C (59 'F) :
1000 kg (2205 Ib) .
•
···········-k~ .
....... f......
1300
1400
6.5
7
Result
········-Rate of Climb 1160ft/min• ................ ! ................................ •·· 1500 7.5
0 5.9 m/s I 1600

8
0
p 1''''1'' II 1II ''1''''1 II ''I' II 'I II ''I' II '1''''1''''1'' II 111 ''I'' 11 I''''' r1 To-.--rT,-rT-.--riTlol-rTO-rTO-rTiol-rlTO-r-11I
'*I:
0>
-20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50~ § g § 8 c
~ ~ ~ )>
0_..
0_..
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE ['C] - --FLIGHT- MASS [kg]
"')>"
Cl
m
I .,
3!:
-----
Performance
r '
5.3.8 CLIMB PERFORMANCE • CRUISE CLIMB
Conditions: - Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX PWR

- RPM lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2400 RPM
- Flaps .................... UP
- Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 KIAS (1200 kg, 26461b)

73 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
68 KIAS (1000 kg, 22051b)
60 KIAS (850 kg, 18741b)
(''
IDoc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page5-15

"'0
Ill
-----------------------------
DA 40- CLIMB PERFORMANCE- CRUISE CLIMB "tl
CD
co
CD
(11
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE ["F] ~ -FLIGHT- MASS [lb] ...3a-
'
8 § 8 8 8
c;; Ill
...... 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 ~ N 0\ ~ :I
0> I 'I I I II n
1' 1 ' 1 ' ' ' ' 111111 '' 111 " ' ' 111111 '''' 1 ' 11 ' 111 ' " ' ' 111 '' 11111111 1 I I I I I I
11 ' I
CD
0 0
100 0.5
::0 200
CD
:::: 300 1.5
00
•
400 2
500 2.5
0
...... c 3 ~
600
0' I .§.
CD 700
"'::J
::;; "'
3.5 ::;;
D
c;>
1\J
0
......
800 u
..~ 4 u
..
::J
0
m·
0
900
1000i:i
I-
4.5 w
5
!;;:
"'l
l>3
1100
1200
~ 5.5
6
~~
~a.
1300 6.5
1400 7
1500 7.5
: 1050ft/min ··· • ···· ···········
0 5.3 mls 8
0
1600
~ 1" 11 I' 1" 11011 I' 1101101 'I 11111" 1111011 I' 11011 "1 I' 1" 11011 I' 1111 "1 1 I r To..,...rTI'l''rT..,..,rT..,..,rT..,-,rrT-rrrT-rrrT-r-1
1
=It: -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 :;a~ ~ 0
0>
g c
~ ~
):o
0...... oliio
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE ['C] ~ -FLIGHT- MASS [kg]
Q
0
m
......
' .,):o
3:
"
~
DA40AFM • Diamond ' AIRCRAFT
Performance
r' 5.3.9 CRUISING <TRUE AIRSPEED TASl
Diagram to establish true airspeed (TAS) at a given power setting.

OAT ["FJ
-4 14 32 50 68 86
1400u
~ ~ r--......
\
1200
u~
lS' ~ '-.....
~~"" "'""
~
1000 14000
u~
!'--..
\ I~
...~ 800 u ........... 0.. .......
"\
12000
......
'"!
L..l
r-..... ~~.:' r-......... ~ -4 ~/.

10000
,:
'U'
b--. \\~:::...
~\~ ~~
!'::: I 6st::l/ 8000 ~
(~- ""' ""

'Ur-............ ~
.......
~~
9
~-- r-....
...,.,.;:
~'-..... J
1/
I
) 105Y.
""
I 175%IJ\
~
6000
4000 ~
+>
<>.
...
t'-.........~ r-.... ~'--....... 1/
'U
II
I
Q.l
/ / R!'i~ 1=1
-200IU"
0
~ ~'--....... 110
1/
120
v 130
/
v
140
/i\
2000
0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 TAS [ktsJ
OAT [°C]
Example: Pressure altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5000 ft

Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 •c (59 •F)
Power setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 %
Result: True Airspeed (TAS) .......... 118 kts
CAUTION
L· In case of operation without wheel fairings the cruising speed

reduces by approximately 5 %.
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 5-17 J

Performance DA40AFM
5.3.10 LANDING DISTANCE· FLAPS LOG
Conditions: - Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE

- RPM lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIGH RPM
- Flaps .................... LOG
- Approach speed ............ 73 KIAS (1200 kg, 26461b)
71 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
63 KIAS (1000 kg, 22051b)
58 KIAS (850 kg, 18741b)
- Runway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . level, asphalt surface
NOTE
A landing mass above 1150 kg (2535 lb) up to 1200 kg
(26461b) will increase the landing distance over a 50ft ( 15 m) )
obstacle and the landing ground roll distance up to 6%.
Landing distance over a 50ft (15m) obstacle approx. 638 m (2093 ft)
Ground roll approx. 352 m (1155 ft)
WARNING
cross-wind, etc.) will increase the landing distance.
Page5-18 Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

Performance
CAUTION
For a safe landing the landing distance available (LOA) should
be at least equal to the landing distance over a 50ft (15m)
obstacle.
CAUTION
ground or wet soft grass covered runways the landing
distance may become significantly longer than stated below.
In any case the pilot must allow for the condition of the runway
to ensure a safe landing.
NOTE
For landings on dry, short-cut grass covered runways, the
c following corrections must be taken into account, compared

- Grass up to 5 em (2 in) long: 5% increase in landing roll.

- Grass 5 to 10 em (2 to 4 in) long: 15% increase in landing
roll.
- Grass longer than 10 em (4 in): atleast 25% increase in
landing roll.
NOTE
On wet grass, a further 10 % increase in landing roll must be
expected.
NOTE
A downhill slope of 2 % (2 m per 100 m, or 2 ft per 100 ft)
results in an increase in the landing distance of approximately
10 %. The effect on the landing roll can be greater.
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Page5-19

------------------------------ DA 40 - LANDING DISTANCES - FLAPS LOG
"a
CD
- LOG MASS pb] WIND COMPONENT OBSTACLE

a-
OUTSIOEAIRTEMPERATUREfF] - 8 8888888 [m/s] - HEIGHT[ft] - 3Ill
o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 eo 90 100 110 120 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ l'i fil ~ o 2 4 6 8 10 50 o ::ll
I' [ I l l , [ I I l l [I I l l [ I I II [I I I I [ ,,1,,1, I I I 1, II 1, I I I, I I I I, I I ,II ,,1 .... 1.... 1.... [.... [.... 1.... 1....1, I I I I I I I I I I I 1---t g
t:
1400
ALTIMETER SETTING : : : : : : :
..... 1013 hPa 129.92 inH~ ....... L l .i ..i ....... L.... L.......L. .....;....... [ i i ' ' ' 1300
r···-·t·····t····-r·····r····-r····
L.
-----~--------~- ------~--------~ ..!. ... .J _ _ _ _ j_ _______ ;________ ~_ ...... .....).....;.....;...;... ) .... ; .... 1200
,.,
........ ,... ·-···!· .....•.. .....
I ..
.... .. ,... 1100
CD 3500
•••
[
... T. 1000
900 ~ 3ooo I
....
0 §. iS
w
c
~
I
800~
z
~
2500 z
0
~
D
!
700
i5 i5
"'....
0
0
800~
i5
z
2000 ~
0
z )>a
500 ~ :5
1500 ~a
~~
Example: Alt~ude
···Pressure 00 ft · · •· · ··•· •· ······•···· ....,... · 400
Ou1side A~ Temperature 1 •c
(59~ ! !
~~nd Component ~ ~kg ( 5 lb) ···· !········!·········!· 300
Resu~: : . 200
LOG Distance Ground Roll : 190 m (624 ftl ·
LOG Distance over 50ft obsta e : 405 m (1329 ft) ~500
. . 100
jlliijillljlllljlliijillljlliljlilljiiiijiiiijlilljliiijlllljlilljllll' jlllljlllljlliijlllijiilijillijlllil
c0 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 ,10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 8 fil 85l fil 8 fil §

~::::5:!..-C)(J)Q)
p OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE ['C) - WIND COMPONENT OBSTACLE
- LOG MASS (kg) [kl) - HEIGHT[m]-
:tl:
en ~
....b ~
....b
I ~
m i:
\.,
-·-,
~ :.;
Performance
5.3.11 LANDING DISTANCE· FLAPS UP
Conditions: - Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE

- RPM lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIGH RPM
- Flaps .................... UP
I - Approach speed ........... 73 KIAS (1200 kg, 26461b)
71 KIAS (1150 kg, 25351b)
63 KIAS (1000 kg, 22051b)
58 KIAS (850 kg, 18741b)
- Runway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . level, asphalt surface
NOTE
I
c
A landing mass above 1150 kg (2535 lb) up to 1200 kg
I (26461b) will increase the landing distance over a 50ft (15 m)
I obstacle and the landing ground roll distance up to 6% .
.................................
Landing distance over a 50ft (15m) obstacle approx. 775 m (2543 ft)
Ground roll approx. 471 m (1545 ft)
WARNING
cross-wind) will increase the landing distance.
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 5-21

Performance .Diamond
· AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
CAUTION
For a safe landing the landing distance available (LDA) should
be at least equal to the landing distance over a 50ft (15 m)
obstacle.
CAUTION
ground or wet soft grass covered runways the landing
distance may become significantly longer than stated below.
In any case the pilot must allow for the condition of the runway
to ensure a safe landing.
NOTE
For landings on dry, short-cut grass covered runways, the
following corrections must be taken into account, compared :)
- Grass up to 5 em (2 in) long: 5 % increase in landing roll.

- Grass 5 to 10 em (2 to 4 in) long: 15% increase in landing
roll.
- Grass longer than 10 em (4 in): at least 25% increase in
landing roll.
NOTE
On wet grass, a further 10 % increase in landing roll must be
expected.
NOTE
A downhill slope of 2 % (2 m per 100 m or 2 ft per 100 ft)
results in an increase in the landing distance of approximately
10 %. The effect on the landing roll can be greater.
Page 5-22 Rev.B 01-Dec-201 0 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

r-'\
I
c
0
------------------------------ Landing Distance - Flaps UP c):o
...
fl 0
'It ):o
en [m] [ft.] "'TI
0
..... v v a:
0
..... lf\~ ~ 1\ 1100
m
I
v ~ ~ ·~
LV
~ F.;; ~ . / 1"'- \
l\ 1000
3600
v [:\ 1.:::::: ~ ~ t-- ~

I'-
f'...
"'")'---.... ['-... f-.... ~
\ 1\
r\\ ~ 900 3000
::c L--- f-...•'
[\\\\
~ ~ 1--' ~ ~ -
F'"
~ r.:::: j:::_.. I::: r-::: t:- -- r-0 ~ 800
•
CD
:c:
....- ..... ~\\\ 700
2500
co t-- r.:::: r:::- ~ r--:~ lilit. F0 ~
. "'~ 600 2000
I": ~'\.~\\
0
.....
I
cCD I
-10 0 10 20 30 40
I I I I I I I I I I I
"'" "' ""1"'-
~""
~~
t-...'''-~
500
400
300
1500
1000
0
m·
~8
c;> 0 20 40 80 80 100 I r--.......""-......~
1\)
200
0 outside air temp. (OAT) -.......::::: 500
..... 100
~i
0
0 0
1150 1000 aso(kg] o 5 10 15 20 1~5--~o [m]
1' ---.-1---,---,1,--,l----.1----r--.-1 headwind 1111 [ft.] 0
2500 2200 1900 Pbl component obstacle height
mass [Ids]
Example: Result:
"tJ
Ill Pressure altitude : 4000 ft Landing distance over 50 ft obstacle : approx. 580 m (1903 ft)
cc
CD
(11
OAT : 8 oc (46 °F) Ground roll : approx. 270 m (886 ft)
I
1\) Mass : 1000 kg (2205 lb)
w
Headwind comp. : 8 kts
Performance DA40AFM
5.3.12 GRADIENT OF CLIMB ON GO-AROUND
TheDA 40 reaches a constant gradient of climb of 7.0% in the following condition:
- Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max. flight mass (1150 kg,

25351b)
- Power setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Take-off
-Flaps .............................. LOG
- Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 KIAS
- ISA, MSL
1 The DA 40 reaches a constant gradient of climb of 7.0 % in the following condition:
: - Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ;::~ ~~~ht mass (1200 kg, )
1 - Power setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Take-off

I - Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOG
I - Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 KIAS
I - ISA, MSL
5.3.13 APPROVED NOISE DATA
ICAO Annex 16 Chapter X : 69.28 dB(A)

JAR-36 Subpart C : 69.28 dB(A)
ICAO Annex 16 Chapter X : 78.4 dB(A)

JAR-36 Subpart C : 78.4 dB(A)
J
Page 5-24 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.Q1-E
Mass & Balance
r
CHAPTER&
MASS AND BALANCE
Page
6.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................... 6-2
6.2 DATUM PLANE ........................................ 6-3
6.3 MASS AND BALANCE REPORT ........................... 6-3
6.4 FLIGHT MASS AND CENTER OF GRAVITY .................. 6-5
6.4.1 MOMENT ARMS ..................... ; ............. 6-9
6.4.2 LOADING DIAGRAM .............................. 6-10
c 6.4.3 CALCULATION OF LOADING CONDITION ............. 6-11

6.4.4 PERMISSIBLE CENTER OF GRAVITY RANGE ......... 6-13
6.4.5 PERMISSIBLE MOMENT RANGE ................... 6-15
6.5 EQUIPMENT LIST AND EQUIPMENT INVENTORY ........... 6-16
I Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 Page 6-1

Mass & Balance DA40AFM
6.1 INTRODUCTION
In order to achieve the performance and flight characteristics described in this Airplane
Flight Manual and for safe flight operation, the airplane must be operated within the
permissible mass and balance envelope.
The pilot is responsible for adhering to the permissible values for loading and center of
gravity (CG). In this, he should note the movement of the CG due to fuel consumption.
The permissible CG range during flight is given in Chapter 2.
The procedure for determining the flight mass CG position at any point in time is described
in this Chapter. Over and above this there is a comprehensive list of the equipment
approved for this airplane (Equipment List), as also a list of that equipment installed when
the airplane was weighed (Equipment Inventory).
Before the airplane is delivered the empty mass and the corresponding CG position are
determined, and entered in Section 6.3 - MASS AND BALANCE REPORT. )
NOTE
Following equipment changes the new empty mass and the
corresponding CG position must be determined by calculation
or by weighing.
Following repairs or repainting the new empty mass and the

corresponding CG position must be determined by weighing.
Empty mass, empty mass CG position, and the empty mass

moment must be certified in the Mass and Balance Report
by an authorized person.
(J
Page6-2 Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 Doc. # 6.01.01-E
Mass & Balance
r NOTE
Refer to Section 1.6 - UNITS OF MEASUREMENT for
conversion of Sl units to US units and vice versa.
6.2 DATUM PLANE
The Datum Plane (DP) is a plane which is normal to the airplane's longitudinal axis and
in front ofthe airplane as seen from the direction of flight. The airplane's longitudinal axis
is parallel with the upper surface of a 600:31 wedge which is placed on top of the rear
fuselage in front of the vertical stabilizer. When the upper surface of the wedge is aligned
horizontally, the Datum Plane is vertical. The Datum Plane is located 2.194 meter
(86.38 in) forward of the most forward point of the root rib on the stub wing.
( 6.3 MASS AND BALANCE REPORT
The empty mass and the corresponding CG position established before delivery are the
first entries in the Mass and Balance Report. Every change in permanently installed
equipment, and every repair to the airplane which affects the empty mass or the empty
mass CG must be recorded in the Mass and Balance Report.
For the calculation of flight mass and corresponding CG position (or moment), the current
empty mass and the corresponding CG position (or moment) in accordance with the Mass
and Balance Report must always be used.
Condition of the airplane for establishing the empty mass:
- Equipment as per Equipment Inventory (see Section 6.5)
- Including brake fluid,lubricant (7.61iter =8 qts), plus unusable fuel (41iter =approx.
1 US gal).
'
~
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page6-3

3::
iJ Ill
Ill Ill
co Ill
CD go
a>
I Ill
~
Ill
iii
::II
00 n
CD
::II
::0 g.
CD c:
0
:<-
co
c:
en
,.en
3::
•
Cil
0
......
"C
0
::I.
0 z
,.
en
::J
c
s·~
I
0
CD
~
0
!e.
..., Ill
c: ,.
a...,c: ):
~=
......
0 !!!.. z
0
...,
0
~~
m
CD
..c ::a
c: m
-a· "tt
0 ~a.
3
;a ~
CD
0
:::r
Ill
::J
0 co
0 CD
p ~
=1:1:
a>
0......
,.
c
0......
m
I
,.
~
Q
'TI
3::
~ ~ -.)
Mass & Balance
r 6.4 FLIGHT MASS AND CENTER OF GRAVITY
The following information enables you to operate your DA 40 within the permissible mass
and balance limits. For the calculation ofthe flight mass and the corresponding CG position
the following tables and diagrams are required:
6.4.1 - MOMENT ARMS

6.4.2 - LOADING DIAGRAM
6.4.3 -CALCULATION OF LOADING CONDITION
6.4.4 -PERMISSIBLE CENTER OF GRAVITY RANGE
6.4.5 - PERMISSIBLE MOMENT RANGE
The diagrams should be used as follows, taking the fuel tank size into account:
Empty Mass
c Take the empty mass and the empty mass moment of your airplane from the Mass and
Balance Report, and enter the figures in the appropriate boxes under the column marked
'Your DA 40' in Table 6.4.3- CALCULATION OF LOADING CONDITION.
Oil
The difference between the actual amount of oil in the engine (check with dipstick) and
the maximum oil quantity is called 'Oil not added'; this mass and its related moment are
counted as negative. The empty mass of the airplane is established with the maximum
amount of oil in the engine, thus the 'missing' oil must be subtracted. If the airplane is
flown with maximum oil, the 'Oil not added' entry should be zero.
In our example 6.0 qts have been measured on the dip-stick. We are thus 2.0 qts short
of the maximum, which equates to 1.91iter. Multiplying this quantity by the mass density
of 0.89 kilograms per liter gives a mass of 'Oil not added' of 1.7 kg. (in US units: 2.0 qts
multiplied by the mass density of 1.86 lb/qts gives a mass of 3.71b).
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-201 0 Page6-5

Mass & Balance • Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
Baggage
The DA 40 may be equipped with one of the following baggage compartment variants:
(a) Standard baggage compartment.
(b) Standard baggage compartment with 'baggage tube'.
(c) Extended baggage compartment (OAM 40-163). It consists of a forward and an

aft part.
Depending on the baggage compartment variant installed in your DA 40 the following

calculations must be done in Table 6.4.3- CALCULATION OF LOADING CONDITION:
For variants (a) and (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . use row 5 of the table; row 6 is filled with '0'
For variant (c) ..................... use row 6 of the table; row 5 is filled with '0'
)
a) Standard Tank:
The fuel quantity can be read on the fuel indicators.
NOTE
Depending on the type of fuel probes installed, the indicator
can read a maximum of 15 US gal or 17 US gal (refer to
Section 7.1 0 for details). When the fuel quantity indicator
reads the maximum amount of fuel detectable, a fuel quantity
up to 20 US gal can be in the fuel tank. In this case the fuel
quantity must be measured with the fuel quantity measuring
device (see Section 7.10- FUEL SYSTEM).
Page6-6 Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

Mass & Balance
~.
~
b) Long Range Tank:
Read the fuel quantity indicated on the fuel quantity indicators.
NOTE
At an indication of 16 US gal the amount of auxiliary fuel can
be determined by switching the AUX FUEL QTY switch to the
respective position (LH or RH). The indicated auxiliary fuel
quantity is added to the 16 US gal.
An auxiliary fuel quantity of less than 3 US gal cannot be

indicated by the system. In this case the quantity must be
determined by means of the fuel quantity measuring device
(see Section 7.10- FUEL SYSTEM).
CAUTION
( The correct indication of the fuel quantity takes 2 minutes after
actuation of the switch.
I Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page6-7

Mass & Balance • Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
Moments
Multiply the individual masses by the moment arms quoted to obtain the moment for every
item of loading, and enter these moments in the appropriate boxes in Table 6.4.3 -
CALCULATION OF LOADING CONDITION.
Total Mass and CG
Add up the masses and moments in the respective columns. The CG position is calculated
by dividing the total moment by the total mass (using row 7 for the condition with empty
fuel tanks, and row 9 for the pre take-off condition). The resulting CG position mu~t be
within the limits.
CAUTION
For airplanes equipped with the optional Long Range Tank,
a restricted range of permitted CG positions applies.
)
As an illustration the total mass and the CG position are entered on Diagram 6.4.4 -
PERMISSIBLE CENTER OF GRAVITY RANGE. This checks graphically that the current
configuration of the airplane is within the permissible range.
Graphical Method
Diagram 6.4.2 - LOADING DIAGRAM is used to determine the moments. The masses
and moments for the individual items of loading are added. Then Diagram 6.4.5 -
PERMISSIBLE MOMENT RANGE is used to check whether the total moment associated
with the total mass is in the admissible range.
The result found with the graphical method is however inaccurate. ln"doubtful cases the
result must be verified using the exact method given above.
Page6- 8 Rev. a 01-Dec-201 0 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

Mass & Balance
r 6.4.1 MOMENT ARMS
The most important lever arms aft of the Datum Plane:
Oil 1.00m 39.4in

Front seats 2.30m 90.6 in
Rear seats 3.25m 128.0 in
Wing tanks (Standard & Long Range) 2.63m 103.5 in
Baggage in standard baggage compartment 3.65m 143.7 in
baggage in baggage tube 4.32m 170.1 in
- Baggage in extended baggage compartment
forward part 3.89m 153.1 in
aft part 4.54m 178.7 in
4.54 m (178.7 in)
2.194 m (86.4 in)

ECD
ii
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 Page6-9
Load Mass
[lb] [kg] en
"tl Front :..~ iii:
Dl
Ill Ill
co ~ /Seats
,.c
Ill
(I) / r
0) / 0 1111
I 500 r- 225 IJI
...... ' Dl
0
/
/ Rear
Seats
z
G)
iii
:I
n
f- 200 / ' c ID
/
'
/ ' ;;
::0 / /
G)
400 f-
~
/
~
/
175 '
Fuel Quantity /
co / iii:
•
/
[US gal] [Liters] f- / /
150
0 200 - /
/
' / '
/
...... 50 r- 300 f- /
' /
0
I /
0 - 125 ' '
m·
(I)
-</
/ /
0
r- /<_____
~
0
...... 40 f- 150 - -,.(,Long Range Tank (--- -)
)>=
/
100 '
0 /
- 200 f-
/ / '
I 1.
30 -
75
/
v '
/ Standard Tank
~g
100 -
~a.
/
20 f- -
-
,/
/
(; /'
50
,£ ~<-
100 r- --~:_ 1--- Fwd. Ext. Ba~gage Compt. (---- OAM 40-163)
50 -
-- -··
II I I I
10 r-
~/ -Aft Ext. Baggage Compt. (---- OAM 40-163)
0 r-
f- 25 ~;.
-· ~nda~ Bag~age ,comfartmjnt ( l)
iJ:.-
0 ,-
p
Oil- - - r- Baggage Tube ( ·-----···)
""b
0)
I I I
[kgm] ~
...... 100 200 300 400 500
b
...... I I I I I I I I I I
I
[ln.lb]
m
101000 201000 30,000 40,000 501000
Load~Moment
Mass & Balance
6.4.3 CALCULATION OF LOADING CONDITION
CAUTION
For airplanes equipped with the optional Long Range Tank,
a restricted range of permitted CG positions applies.
NOTE
For the mass (weight) of the fuel, a density of 0.72 kg/liter
(6.01 lb/US gal) is assumed. For the mass (weight) of the
engine oil, a density of 0.89 kg/liter (1.86 lb/US qt,
0.84 kg/US qt) is assumed.
NOTE
In the following example it is assumed that the fuel tank is
not full at take-off.
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page6-11

Mass & Balance .Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
Empty mass (from Mass 735 1760

and Balance Report) 1620 152,762
2 Oil not added -1.7 -1.7

Lever arm: 1.00 m (39.4/n) -1 -158
3 Front seats 150 345

Lever arm: 2.30 m (90.6 in) 331 29,989
4 Rear seats 75 243.8

Lever arm: 3.25 m (128.0 in) 165 21,120
5 Standard baggage compt. 0 0

Lever arm: 3.65 m (143. 7 in) 0 0
Baggage tube 0 0
6
Lever arm: 4.32 m (170.1/n)
Fwd. extended baggage
0 0
l )
compartment 27 105
60 9.186
Lever arm: 3.89 m (153.1/n)
Aft extended
baggage compartment 18 81.7
40 7.148
Lever arm: 4.54 m (178.7in)
1003.3 2533.8
2212 220.047
261.4
and242,714
ln.tb) must be divided by the related total
mass (1 003.3 and 1 kg respectively)
(2212 and 2431/b) and then located in Diagram 6.4.4 - PERMISSIBLE CENTER OF
GRAVITY RANGE.
As in our example CG positions (2.525 m and 2.535 m respectively) (99.48and99.84/n)
and masses fall into the area, this condition is allowable.
Page6-12 Rev.8 01-Dec-201 0 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

The CG's shown in the diagram are those that from the example in Table 6.4.3 -
CALCULATION OF LOADING CONDITION.
Forward Flight CG Limit:
2.40 m (94.5 in) aft of Datum Plane at 780 to 980 kg (1720 to 21611b)
2.46 m (96.9 in) aft of Datum Plane at 1150 kg (25351b)
2.40 m (94.5 in) aft of Datum Plane at 780 kg to 980 kg (1720 lb to 2161 lb)
2.48 m (97.6 in) aft of Datum Plane at 1200 kg (26461b)

Mass & Balance
Rearward Flight CG Limit:

.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
\,
2.59 m (102.0 in) aft of Datum Plane (Standard Tank)
2.55 m (100.4 in) aft of Datum Plane (with Long Range Tank installed)
(J. ·
~

~'
c
0
----------------------------------
p FLIGHT MASS MOMENT pn.lb]
~ 'V
Ol m·
0 160000 180000 200000 ;:u
..... !!!:
0
..... Cii
fl)
I
m iD
1150 r-
m
!!!:
::0 1100
CD !!!:
:< m
CD z
-1
~
0
z
Ci)
..... m
6
~
0
.....
0
800
780 !!!:
2200 2400 2600 2800, Dl
(I)
"'0
Dl
co
.... "'
0 "'....
Ul & "'"'.... ~
0
(I)
CQ
CD
"' "'
0
"' MOMENT [kgm)
"' FLIGHT MASS 0
"' liD
Ill
Ol Dl
I ii'
.....
(11
:I
n
CD
Mass & Balance .Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
6.5 EQUIPMENT LIST AND EQUIPMENT INVENTORY

All equipment that is approved for installation in the DA 40 is shown in the Equipment
List below.
The items of equipment installed in your particular airplane are indicated in the appropriate
column. The set of items marked as 'installed' constitutes the Equipment Inventory.
NOTE
The equipment listed below cannot be installed in any
arbitrary combination. The airplane manufacturer must be
contacted before removing or installing equipment, with the
exception of replacing a unit by an identical unit.
1. ~)
Page 6-16 Rev.8 01-Dec-201 0 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

--------------------~~·~--------------------
DA40AFM .Diamond Mass and Balance
AIRCRAFT
Airplane Serial No.: Registration: Date: Mass Lever Arm
---
Description Type Part No. Manufacturer SIN installed lb kg in m
AVIONICS COOLING
----
Cooling fan Cyclone 21·3 Port CRB122253 Lone Star Aviation
Cooling fan ACF328 ACF 328 Sandia Aerospace
COMMUN/CA T/ON .
COMM #1 antenna DMC63-1/A DM
COMM #2 antenna DMC63-2 DM
COMM#1 KX125 069-01 028· 1101 Bendix/King 11.46 5.2 70.08 1.78
COMM#1 KX 155A 069-01032-0201 Bendix/King 3.7 1.68 70.08 1.78
COMM #1 KX 165 069-01025-0025 Bendix/King 5.65 2.56 70.08 1.78
COMM#1 KX 165A 069-01033-0101 Bendix/King 4.0 1.81 70.08 1.78
COMM#1 KX 165A/8.33 kHz 069-01 033·0201 Bendix/King 4.0 1.81 70.08 1.78
COMM#1 GNS430 01 1-0028[).00 Garmin 5.1 2.31 70.08 1.78
COMM#1 GNS430 011·00280.10 Garmin 5.1 2.31 70.08 1.78
COMM#1 GNS530 011·00550.00 Garmin 6.8 3.08 70.08 1.78
COMM#1 GNS 530 011·0055[). 10 Garmin 6.8 3.08 70.08 1.78
COMM #2 KX 155A 069-01032-0201 Bendix/King 3.7 1,68 70.08 1.78
COMM#2 GNS430 011-00280.00 Garmin 5.1 2.31 70.08 1.78
COMM#2 GNS430 011-00280.10 Garmin 5.1 2.31 70.08 1.78
Audio Panel/ Marker /ICS KMA28 066-011 76-0101 Bendix/King 1.5 0.68 70.08 1.78
Doc. No. 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 6-17

Mass and Balance
AirplaneSetillt·•JII~;:· ····. ·.·•·.·

. } ....·.·•··.·... ···.....·......• J:legi$lltion: Date: ··}···· Mass · Lever Arm
.··., ············ (}·.....•.. \.•. ......
Description • i ••·· . ·• ··. · ·· · I.
. ··}··
Type .......·.······· .. Part No.
·.
.. ············
MarilifactiJrer ....· SIN installed lb kg I /in m
I Audio Panel/ Marker /ICS GMA340 011-00401-10 Garmin 1.2 0.54 70.08 1.78
----
ICS PM1000 II 11922 PS Engineering 0.75 0.34 70.08 1.78
---
----
Headset. pilot Echelon 100 Telex
------
Headset, co-pilot Echelon 100 Telex
Headset. LH pax Echelon 100 Telex
----
Headset RH pax Echelon 100 Telex
Speaker FRS8/40hms Visaton
Handmic 100TRA 62800-001 Telex
AUTOPILOTSYSTEM
Autopilot system KAP 140 Bendix/King
065-00176-5402
I Flight computer (w/o alt. preselect) KC 140 (without MAM 40-099 or
MSB 40-018)
Bendix/King 2.02 0.918 70.08 1.78
065-00176-7702
I Flight computer (with alt preselect) KC 140 (without MAM 40-099 or
MSB 40-018)
Bendix/King 2.02 0.918 70.08 1.78
065-00176-5403
I Flight computer (w/o alt. preselect) KC140 (with MAM 40-099 or
MSB40-018)
Bendix/King 2.02 0.918 70.08 1.78
065-00176-7703
I Flight computer (with alt preselect) KC 140 (with MAM 40-099 or
MSB40-018)
Bendix/King 2.02 0.918 70.08 1.78
Rev. a 01-Dec:2Q10 Page)> -18

--------------------~~~·--------------------
AIRCRAFT
J\iwlaneseriai.No.:i }·.· · ·•· ·.·.· •·•· · · . ·..... Registration: •.• · • · · . .... · ......... ....... Date:
· Mass Lever Arm
· .....·.········ •····.··· ..
• lb . >I :~g i/ .• >in<·····••• · · · · •·• ~n.:·.·.· · ·
········.·
·Pestription • . ·. .. <.·.····(( 1·•/······· ifype·.·················.·•···.··· · • ·.· · · · ·•· f!art~b: r·.· ·•· ·•· · · .· . · Manufacturer SIN ·.t• · · · •· · •·iriStalll!d
<.
I Flight computer KC 140 065-00176-7904 Bendix/King -2.02 0.918 70.08 1.78
I Pttch servo KS270C 065-00178-2500 Bendix/King 2.7 1.224 154.0 3.93
I Pttch servo mount KM275 065-00030-0000 Bendix/King 1.08 0.488 154.0 3.93
I Roll servo KS271 C 065-00179-0300 Bendix/King 2.3 1.044 120.0 3.06
I Roll servo mount KM275 065-00030-0000 Bendix/King 2.7 1.224 120.0 3.06
I Trim servo KS 272 C 065-00180-3500 Bendix/King 2.22 1.005 87.2 2.21
I Trim servo mount KM277 065-00041-0000 Bendix/King 1.09 0.494 87.2 2.21
----
Configuraijon module KCM 100 071-00073-5000 Bendix/King 0.06 0.026 70.08 1.78
Sonalert sc SC628 Mallory
Control sijck DA4-2213-12-90 Diamond
----
......-------
CWSsijck 031-00514-0000 Bendix/King
----
AP-dist switch 031-00428-0000 Bendix/King
Trim swttch assy 200-09187-0000 Bendix/King
----
ELECTRICAL POWER
----
I Battery CB24-11 M (G243) Concorde (Gill) 28.0 12.7 47.0 1.19
----
I Battery RG24-11M Concorde 26.4 11.97 47.0 1.19
----
I Battery RG24-15M Concorde 29.5 13.38 47.0 1.19
I
----
Emergency battery (28 pes.) MN 1500AA Duracell 1.52 0.69 70.08 1.78
I Emergency battery (Uthium) 041-2560-93-00 Excel! 0.564 0.256 66.5 1.69
Doc. No. 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page6-19

Mass and Balance
Airplane Serial No.: .··

. /.·
Registration: · ...· ... Date: .······Mass ··.···Lever Arm
DescriJltion
.•.. • > •..
Type·.····<< ...... ··...· Part No. ManufaCturer Ii /SIN installed 'lb ) .·· kg . ····•··In m
Ammeter VM1000 4010050 Vision Microsyst.
Ammeter current sensor VM1000 3010022 Vision Microsyst.
Voltmeter VM1000 4010050 Vision Microsyst.
Voltage regulator VR2000-28-1 (D) Electrosyst.. Inc.
External power connector
Alternator ALU-8521LS ALU-8521LS
Diamond
Electrosyst.. Inc.
--=----:
DC-AC Inverter MD26 MD 26-28 Mid Continent
EQUIPMENT
I Safety belt pilot 5-01·0 Series 5-01-1 C0701 Schroth 3.36 1.524 92.52 2.35
I Safety belt. co-pilot 5-01·0 Series 5-01-1 C5701 Schroth 3.36 1.524 92.52 2.35
I Safety belt LH pax 5-01·0 Series 5-01-185701 Schroth 3.0 1.36 126.7 3.22
I Safety belt RH pax 5-01·0 Series 5-01-180701 Schroth 3.0 1.36 126.7 3.22
I Safety belt receptacle, pilot Schroth 0.54 0.245 92.52 2.35
I Safety belt receptacle, co-pilot Schroth 0.54 0.245 92.52 2.35
I Safety belt receptacle, LH pax Schroth 0.54 0.245 126.7 3.22
I Safety bett receptacle, RH pax Schroth 0.54 0.245 126.7 3.22
I
----
ELT untt E-01 ACK 3 1.36 173.2 4.40
----
ELT remote swttch E0105 ACK
I ELT antenna E0109 ACK
Doc. No. 6.01~-E Rev. 8 01-Dec:2_Q1 0 Page 6-20

--------------------~~~------------------~
AIRCRAFT
Airplane Serial No.:···· . -..•••.-•. - _ )i . Registration: Date:_ < Mass . • -.• Lever Ami
Description i. if
1·-· Type •· -· -• f'art No. . ... Man!lfacturer s/111 > I installed lb kg .•.•. .mi .
. in··--· r
----
Ell unit JE2-NG JE-1978-1NG Jollie! 2.43 1.1 173.2 4.40
ELT remote switch JE-1978-16 Jolliet
ELT antenna JE-1978-73 Jolliet
I
I
Ell unit
ELT buzzer
ME406 453-6603
452-6505
Artex
Artex
------- 2 0.91 173.2 4.40
I ELT antenna WHIP 110-773 Artex
I ELT remote switch (ACE) 453-0023 Artex
----
I ELT module interface 453-1101 Artex
----
Winter baffle DA4-2157-00-00 Diamond
Armrest DA4-521 0-50-91 Diamond
Baggage extension (OIIM 40-163)
Baggage net (OAM 40-163)
Baggage tray (01\M 40-164)
----
FUGHT CONTROLS
Flaps control unit (instr. panel) 430550 Diamond
----
---
Flaps actuator assy 430555 Diamond
I Stall warning horn assy 'A' DM-2739-1 0-00 Diamond
I Stall warning horn assy 'B" DM-2739-1 O-OOX01 Diamond
Doc. No. 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 6-21

Mass and Balance
Airplane Seriat·•No.:···· MasS······.•·•···.·· .•·.·.•••·teverArm

.···
···•············ .... \ Reg!iitration: ··.

Dat~;i•
....... \ ....·.···•······· / ..
·. TYPe /
<· .. .··.····
installed . . •. (lb·
----
··.·
Desi:riptillrl · · · .·.·. .( ( ··· l"anNo. Martutacturer SIN kg·····.·.··· iin · m
··················. ·.t···················
----
I Stall warning horn assy ·c· DA4-2739-1 O-OOX02 Diamond
----
I Stall warning horn assy "D" DA4-2739-1 O-OOX03 Diamond
----
I Stall warning horn assy "E' DA4-2739-1 O-OOX04 Diamond
I Stall warning horn assy "F" DA4-2739-1 0-00X05 Diamond
----
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
----
Fire extinguisher. portable HAL1 AIR Total 4.85 2.2 110.0 2.794
I
----
Fire extinguisher. portable ' 1 A620T Amerex 2.43 1.1 110.0 2.794
----
First aid kit
I Emergency axe G45912 Fiskars 1.23 0.558 78.74 2.00
FUEL
Fuel qty indicator VM1000 4010028 Vision Microsyst.
Fuel qty sensor lH VM1000 30100-11 Vision Microsyst.
Fuel qty sensor RH VM1000 30100-11 Vision Microsyst.
Fuel qty sensor lH (auxiliary fueO VM1000 30100-50 Vision Microsyst.
Fuel qty sensor RH (auxiliary fuel) VM1000 30100-50 Vision Microsyst.
Doc. No. 6.01.QI-E Rev. a 0 1-Dec:2P1 0 Page6- 22

/~
------------------~~~'------------------~
Mass and Balance
AirplaneSeriai·No.: ....... Registration: Date: • ................... Mass ·.··· LeverANri

Description .·· ···.• I .·.. Type Part NO. Manufacturer SIN installed lb k!J in m
HYDRAULIC
Master cylinder 10-54 Cleveland
Parking valve 60-59 Cleveland
Brake assembly 30-239 Cleveland
INDICATING I REC. SYSTEM

Digital chronometer LC-2 AT420100 Astro Tech
Digital chronometer Model803 Davtron
Flight timer 85000-12 Hobbs
Flight timer 85094-12 Hobbs
Annunciator panel (system) Diamond
Annunciator panel WW-IDC001 White Wire
I CO detector Model452-201 CO Guardian LLC
LANDING GEAR
MLG wheel fairing inst. DM-3215-00-00 Diamond
MLG speed kit LH DM-3219-01-00 Diamond
MLG speed kit RH DA4-3219-02 -00 Diamond
NLG wheel fairing inst. DA4-3225-00-00 Diamond
Doc. No. 6.01.01-E Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 Page 6-23

Mass and Balance
Airplane Serial No.: • >

Registration: .·.· .. ·· Date: Mass Lever Arm
Description . ·•.• Type .·.··••• i i / Pan No. Manufacturer SIN installed lb kg I in m
NLGspeedk~ DM-3229-00-00 Diamond
NLG strut fairing inst. DA4-3227 -00-00 Diamond
NLGtie-down DA4-1 001-00-00 Diamond
----
LIGHTS
----
Map I Reading light assy crew W1461.0.01 0 Rivoret
----
Cabin Light W1461.0.01 0 Rivoret
----
lnstr.lradio lights dimmer assy WW-LCM-002 Wh~Wire
----
Glareshield lamp assy DM-3311-1 0-01 Diamond Aircraft
----
Glareshield light inverter APVL328-8-3-L-18QF Quantaflex
Strobe I Pos. light assy LH A600-PR-D-28 01-0790006-05 Whelen
----
Strobe I Pas. light assy RH A600-PG-D-28 01-0790006-07 Whelen
----------
----
I Strobe light power supply LHIRH A490ATS-CF-14128 01-0770062-05 Whelen 1.592 0.722 101.0 2.566
----
Taxi light 70346 01-0770346-05 Whelen
----
Landing light 70346 01-0770346-03 Whelen
----
Electro luminescent lamps Quantafiex 1600 Quantafiex
I
----
Ballast GENS D1,24V 37776 Newark
I Ballast GENS D1.24V 37776 Newark
I
I
Taxi light
Landing light
HID LAMPD15
HIDLAMPD15
39663
39663
Newark
Newark
-----
----
Doc. No. 6.01.0J-E Rev.8 01-Dec_::201o Page~-24
----------------------------~
I"'\~----------------------------~
AIRCRAFT
Airplane .Serial No.:······< > · R~gi~ration: .i .I .oate:.•· .· · · .· · · · · · ·•·••.••••·{< <.· Mass Lever Ami
Des¢ription ••• > > .·
·•··•••·•··••· JY!le
ii( • · ·•· ...... 1··••·•···••···· PintNo.•••.·.··•·••······
•••••• •••••••••••••
Manufacturer
•••
•••. ·•·.·.•· . SJI'j >inStalled •it(/ ·> "!I •

······ ....... <•• i ..... i·
---
----
NAVIGATION
Pilot/static probe. heated DAI·9034-57-00 Diamond
P/S probe HTR fail sensor DA4-3031-01-00 Diamond
Altimeter inHg/mbar, primary 5934PD-3 United Instruments 1.9 0.86 70.08 1.78
Altimeter inHg/mbar, primary LUN 1128 1128-14B6 Mikrotechna 1.39 0.63 70.08 1.78
Altimeter inHg/mbar, secondary 5934PD-3 United Instruments 1.9 0.86 70.08 1.78
Altimeter inHg/mbar, secondary LUN 1128 1128-14B6 Mikrotechna 1.39 0.63 70.08 1.78
Vertical speed indicator 7000 United Instruments 1.2 0.54 70.08 1.78
Vertical speed indicator LUN 1144 1144-A4B4 Mikrotechna 0.9 0.4 70.08 1.78
Airspeed indicator 8025 United Instruments 0.7 0.32 70.08 1.78
Airspeed indicator LUN 1116 1116·B4B3 Mikrotechna 0.77 0.35 70.08 1.78
Outside air temp. indication 301F(C) Davtron 0.27 0.124 70.08 1.78
Magnetic compass C2400L4P Airpath 0.65 0.293 70.08 1.78
Compass system C/0 KCS55A Bendix/King
Slaved gyro KG102A 060-00015-0000 Bendix/King 4.3 1.95 70.08 1.78
HSI KI525A 066-03046-0007 Bendix/King 3.38 1.53 70.08 1.78
Slaving unit (vertical) KA51B 071-01242-0001 Bendix/King 0.2 0.91 70.08 1.78
Slaving unit (horizontal) KA51B 071-01242-06 Bendix/King 0.2 0.91 70.08 1.78
Flux valve KMT 112 071-01052-0000 Bendix/King 0.3 0.14 101.0 2.566
Directional gyro, free AIM2051BLD 505·0031-931 BF-Goodrich 2.6 1.18 70.08 1.78
Attitude indicator AIM1100-28L{OF) 504-0111-936 BF-Goodrich 2.20 1.0 70.08 1.78
Doc. No. 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 6-25

Mass and Balance
Airplane Serial No;: . . < .~egistration: ... Date: .. Mass Lever Arm
Description· .
·. . ·.·. :.
Type Part. No; ·•· .· ·•· ! . Manufacturer . :, SIN Installed .. ·. lb kg In m
I Attitude indicator AIM11 00-28LK(OF) 504-0111-938 SF-Goodrich 2.20 1.0 70.08 1.78
I Attitude indicator AIM1100-28LK(2F) 504-0111-941 SF-Goodrich 2.20 1.0 70.08 1.78
I Tum coordinator w/o AP pickup 1394T1 00-(3Z) Mid Continent lnstr. 0.822 0.373 70.08 1.78
I Tum coordinator 1394T100-(12RZ) Mid Continent lnstr. 1.41 0.64 70.08 1.78
I Tum coordinator 1394Tl 00-(12RA) Mid Continent lnstr. 1.41 0.64 70.08 1.78
I Tum coordinator 1394T100-(12RB) Mid Continent lnstr. 1.41 0.64 70.08 1.78
Marker antenna Cl102 Comant
I DME KN62A 066-01068-0004 Bendix/King 2.6 1.18 70.08 1.78

DME antenna KA60 071-01174-0000 Bendix/King
I Transponder KT76A 066-1062-10 BendiX/King 0.85 0.39 70.08 1.78
I Transponder KT76C 066-01156-0101 Bendix/King 0.2 0.09 70.08 1.78
I Transponder GTX327 011-00490-00 Garmin 2.4 1.09 70.08 1.78
I Transponder GTX330 011-00455-00 Garmin 3.4 1.54 70.08 1.78
I XPDR antenna KA60 071-01174-0000 Bendix/King
I XPDR antenna KA60 071-01591-0001 Bendix/King

XPDR antenna KA61 071-00221-0010 Bendix/King
Altitude digitizer D120-P2-T TCI
Altitude data system SAE5-35 305154-00 Sandia Aerospace
I ADF KR87 066-01072-0004 Bendix/King 2.9 1.32 70.08 1.78
Doc. No. 6.01.Q1-E Rev. 8 01-Dec~2~01 0 Page_§.- 26

----------------~~~~----------------~
AIRCRAFT
Airplane Serial No.: ·..·.··.·.·· Registration: Date: Mass ·teverAmi

Description ....•... Type Part No. ···. [ Manufacturer S/N installed lb kg •. ill \ lim.
•••••••••••••••••••••
ADF antenna KA44B 071 ·01 234·0000 Bendix/King
I ADF indicator Kl227 066·03063·0001 Bendix/King 0.7 0.32 70.08 1.78
I ADF indicator Kl227 066-03063-00 Bendix/King 0.7 0.32 70.08 1.78

NAV antenna coupler Cl505 Com ant
I NAVIGS antenna coupler Cl507 Comant 0.20 0.089 106.1 2.685

dual NAV/dual GS antenna coupler Cl 1125 Comant
VORILOC/GS antenna CI157P Com ant
NAVICOM #1 KX 125 069-01028-1 101 Bendix/King 11.46 5.2 70.08 1.78
NAVICOM #1 volt conv. KA39 071-01041-001 Bendix/King
NAV/COM#1 KX155A 069·01032-0201 Bendix/King 3.7 1.68 70.08 1.78
NAVICOM#1 KX 165 069-01025-0025 Bendix/King 5.65 2.56 70.08 1.78
NAV/COM#1 KX165A 069-01033-0101 Bendix/King 4.0 1.81 70.08 1.78
NAVICOM#1 KX 165A. 8.33 kHz 069-01033-0201 Bendix/King 4.0 1.81 70.08 1.78
NAV/COM#2 KX155A 069-01032-0201 Bendix/King 3.7 1.68 70.08 1.78
NAVCOM/GPS #1 GNS430 01 1-00280-00 Garmin 6.5 2.95 70.08 1.78
NAVCOMIGPS #1 GNS430 011 ·00280-10 Garmin 6.5 2.95 70.08 1.78
NAVCOM/GPS #1 GNS 530 01 1·00550-0 Garmin 8.5 3.86 70.08 1.78
COl. VORILOC #1 Kl208 066-03056-0000 Bendix/King 1 0.45 70.08 1.78

DA40AFM MADiamond
~ AIRCRAFT
Mass and Balance
Airplane$eriai·. Noi: .. ·. Registration:. . ··

···• L
Date: ..···,··· .. •·• .•·. Mass- Lever Arm
.. · .....·.··············•·....·.········ Malillfatturer\ m
1 • r-an .....IJ•• , .•..... 1.. / :)IN ..·...... ··•· •·• inStalled ··.lb········ ·.·.··'
·•·••·••··• •.··•·•••··•·.·.·• i ) i . r}'Jie.•·•·•··•-•·\n···•.·····•·····-••
I CDI, VOR/LOC #2 Kl208 066-03056-0000 Bendix/King 1 0.45 70.08 1.78
I CDI, VORILOC/GS #1 GI106A 013-00049-01 Garmin 1.4 0.64 70.08 1.78
I CDI, VOR/LOCIGS #2 GI106A 013-00049-01 Garmin 1.4 0.64 70.08 1.78
I GPS KLN 89B 066-01148-0102 Bendix/King 3 1.36 70.08 1.78
I GPS KLN 94 069-01 034-0101 Bendix/King 3 1.36 70.08 1.78

GPSantenna KA92 071-01553-0200 Bendix/King
GPS antenna Ill GA56 011-00134-00 Garmin
GPS antenna 112 GA56 011-00134-00 Garmin
GPS annunciation unit MD41-1488 Mid Continent
GPS I AP switch assy MD41-528 Mid Continent
I Multifunction display I GPS KMD 150 066-01174-0101 Bendix/King 3.3 1.5 70.08 1.78
Stormscope WX-500 805-11500-001 Goodrich
Stormscope antenna NY-163 805-10930-001 Goodrich
Strike finder display SF 2000 2000-009 Insight
Strike finder sensor SF 2000 2000-022 Insight
I TAS processor TAS 600 70-2420-x TAS600 Avidyne/Ryan
I TAS processor TAS 610 70-2420-x TAS610 Avidyne/Ryan
I TAS processor TAS620 70-2420-x TAS620 Avidyne/Ryan
I Transponder coupler 70-2040 Avidyne/Ryan
I TAS antenna, top 572-1750-31 L Sensor Systems
I TAS antenna, bottom S72-1750-32L Sensor Systems
Doc. No. 6.0~-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2Q10 Pag~j!- 28

,
--------------------~~~------------------~ ¥,_____---,
AIRCRAFT
Airplane Serial No.: Registration: Date: Mass lever Arm

Description Type Pan No. Manufacturer SIN installed lb kg in m
ENGINE
Engine I0-360.M1A Textron Lycoming
ENGINE FUEL CONTROL

Fuel flow transmitter VM1000 3010032 Vision Microsyst.
Fuel pressure transmitter VM1000 3010017 Vision Microsyst.
ENGINE IGNITION SYSTEM

SlickSTART booster SS1001 Unison
Lasar ignition controller LC-1002-03 LC-1002-03 Unison
Lasar ignition harnedd LH-1004-43 Unison
Magneto RHILH 4370/4347 Slick
Magneto RHILH 4770/4771 Slick
ENGINE INDICA T/NG

RPM sensor VM1000 3010005 Vision Microsyst.
Manffold pressure sensor VM1000 3010016 Vision Microsyst.
Cyl. head temp. probes (4 each) VM1000 1020061 Vision Microsyst.
EGT probes VM1000 1020060 Vision Microsyst.
Doc. No. 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-201 0 Page 6-29

Mass and Balance
Airplane SerialJijo~: Registration: .·· Date: Mass Lever Arm

.. ,.
Description ) '.' ·'TyPe·,,.,·.,, .. ·..·,·• '· Part No; Manufacturer ' SIN installed lb I kg In m
Data processing unit DPU 4010067 Vision Microsyst.
Data processing untt DPU 4010081 Vision Microsyst.
lntegr. engine data display VM1000 4010050 Vision Microsyst.
VO board assy 3020003 Vision Microsyst.
VO board assy 3020018 Vision Microsyst.
ENGINE OIL
Oil temperature sensor VM1000 3010021 Vision Microsyst.
Oil pressure transducer VM1000 3010018 Vision Microsyst.
ENGINE STARTING
Starter 149-24LS Skytec
PROPELLER SYSTEM
I Propeller MTV-12-B/180-17 mt-Propeller 47.0 21.32 15.0 0.381
I Propeller MTV-12-B/180-171 mt-Propeller 47.0 21.32 15.0 0.381

Propeller governor C-210776 Woodward 3.05 1.385 29.4 0.747
Propeller governor MT-P-420-10 mt-Propeller 2.0 0.907 29.4 0.747
I Propeller governor MT-P860-23 P-860-23 mt-Propeller 2.05 0.93 29.4 0.747
Doc. No. 6.01-.Q_1-E

'-------~L·_........___ _____-------~v~----------~-----·~il------'
Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 6-30
------------------~~~.------------------~
AIRCRAFT
...
Airplane Serial No.:·· . ·.. , Registration: .·. Date: .·,· Mass LeVerArm. · · ·
Description .·• . . . . . i ..
.·····"]"ype Manufacturer 5/N lb kg ·. in·.·····.·,···••'•
... ·····.·
······ Part No.····· ···•··•·· . •.· · · i.nstalled <•·m····.·
AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL Doc.No. 6.01.01(-E) Diamond
1l The Amerex A 620 T fire extinguisher is UL approved and can be used in airplanes registered in Canada and the USA. For airplanes
registered in other countries, refer to the national Airworthiness Authority.
Place:--------- Date:---------- Signature:-----------

Mass and Balance
Doc. No. 6.0. 1..0~-E / Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 I Pag~~ -.32
I ~ v ~
--.v r l_
...__/
'-- "---'"
• · · · - --·- ~ ·-~~ · ~·" "'6' " " " " uaoaon.c: n<:VI>IUII lUI UldiiiUIIU A ll Clan: mass wergnt oauast Kit L4l-/1Ub·U1-UU, drawing II (41-7106-01-00
--·--·-·-- 0 ... .. ..
installed by Aero Restorations, Inc. on October 22, 2008 at Hobbs 85.3 under Work Order II 08-2984. I certify t hat this Weight & Balance was prepared
in accordance with cur rent regulations of the Federal Aviation Adm i nistrat~~¥to service for t he work performed. Pertinent
details ofthe maintenance are on file at this repair station under W/0 26045. - ~::::l '1:' C:::: for Midwest Corporate Aviation
CRSIIB\I'(R657C.
WEIGHT & BALANCE REVISION (REPLACEMENT}
Diamond DA40XL SERIAL40.698 REGISTRATION N216DG Page 1 of1
Changes of Weight Actual
OAT£ DESCRIPTION OF ADDITION SUBTRACTION EMPTY WEIGHT
Moment
Weight Moment Weight Arm [in.) Weight Moment
Arm [in.] [in.lbs) Arm [in .]
[lbsl [in.lbs) [lbs] [kgs] [m) [lbs] [in .lbs]
[kgm]
1784.00 98.26 175297.64
Mass Ballast
05-Nov-13 17.40 435.00
Installation 17.40 25.00 435.00
New Empty Weight 1801.4 97.55 175732.64

Airframe Log
Midwest Corporate Aviation. S/N: 40.698 Date: 11/4/13 Hobbs: 590.40
This date calculated replacement Weight and Balance Revision for Diamond Aircraft mass weight bal last kit C41-7106-01-00, drawing II (41-7106-01-00
installed by Aero Restorations, Inc. on October 22, 2008 at Hobbs 85.3 under Work Order II 08-2984. I certify that t his Weight & Balance was prepared
in accordance with current regulations of t he Federal Aviation Ad m i nistrat~ i :?~ to service for the work performed. Pertinent
details of the maintenance are on file at this repair station under W/0 26045. ~__;} -c, C::::::: for M idwest Corporate Aviation
CRSIIBVYR657C.
·.. ;
,-.:
'
I
•r•-•,-1 .. _._
~- ''• .. .': ···'
·. ··~:-:. ~;·~: ...r. :::-- •..-.••. ~:

I
I
Model: DA 40
.Diamond. Serial Number:
Registration:
40.698
N 2t6tJ6
Aircraft Specific Weighting Report Issue Date: L...-_ 18.09.06
__:...:...:....:...;_.::....:__ _J
Data with reference to the Type Certificate Data Sheet and the Flight Manual
Reference Plane: Vertical plane 2194 mm(86.38 in) in front of wing leading edge at root rib.
Horizontal reference line: Wedge 600:31 (2.96°), 2910mm (114.57 in) aft of step in the cockpit rim .
Equipment List dated: 18 09 06
Cause for Weighing : . . 0RlGIN AL
Weight and Balance Calculations
Weight Condition:
Include brake flu id, engine oil and unusable fuel (2 liters/0.5 US gal on each side) .
Empty Weight: Finding Arm: (Measured)
Support Gross Tare Net Weight Lever Arm

kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs mm in.
Front, G2 105.2 232.0 0 0 105.2 232.0 X2 940 37.01
Main, G,LH 348.4 768.0 0 0 348.4 768 .0 X1LH 2738 107.80
Main, G,RH 355.6 784 .0 0 0 355.6 784.0 X1RH 2719 107.05
EMPTY WEIGHT, G 809.2 1784.0
Empty Weight Centre of Gravity. Xw:
Empty Weight CG Formula
XcG =
(G,LH·x,LH+G,RH* x ,RH) + (G2* X2)
G2 + G1LH + G1RH
= _ l__ 2_.4_9_6_m
98.261 _ __,
in.
Empty Weight Moment. M:
Empty Weight Moment Formula
M =G x XcG = 2019.65 kg·m

175297.64 in ·lbs
Maximum Permitted Useful Load:
Maximum Ramp Weight 1150.0kg 2535 lbs

Empty Weight 809 .2 kg 1784.0 lbs
Maximum Useful Load 340 .8 kg 751 .0 lbs
Data to be entered into the Flight Manual·

Empty Weight, G: Empty Weight Moment, M:
l 2019.65Jkg·m
I 809.21kg
1784.0:lbs L 175297. 6~ in·lbs
Place: D.A.I.C. - CYXU Authorizing ~p Authorizing Signature
G~2)
Date: 18.09.06
~
.;;> -
7
Airplane
Description
CHAPTER 7
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE
AND ITS SYSTEMS
Page
7.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................... 7-3
7.2 AIRFRAME ........................................... 7-3
7.3 FLIGHT CONTROLS .................................... 7-4
7.4 INSTRUMENT PANEL ................................. 7-10
7.5 LANDING GEAR ...................................... 7-13
7.6 SEATS AND SAFETY HARNESSES ...................... 7-15
c
7.7 BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT ............................ 7-16
7.8 CANOPY, REAR DOOR, AND CABIN INTERIOR ............ 7-17
7.9 POWER PLANT ...................................... 7-20
7.9.1 ENGINE, GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.9.2 OPERATING CONTROLS ......................... 7-21
7.9.3 PROPELLER .................................... 7-24
7.9.4 ENGINE INSTRUMENTS .......................... 7-25
7.10 FUEL SYSTEM ....................................... 7-31
7.11 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ................................ 7-40
7.11.1 GENERAL ..................................... 7-42
7.11.2 DAIANNUNCIATORPANEL(WARNING,CAUTIONANDSTATUS
LIGHTS) ....................................... 7-46
7.11.3 WHITE WIRE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL(WARNING, CAUTION AND
STATUS LIGHTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
7.12 PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM ............................... 7-54
L 7.13
7.14
STALL WARNING ..................................... 7-54
AVIONICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
I Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 0 1-Dec-20 10 Page 7- 1

Airplane
Description
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
7.15 CO-MONITOR (IF INSTALLED) .......................... 7-55

7.15.1 SELF TEST SEQUENCE ......................... 7-55
7.15.2 IN-FLIGHT CO ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
7.15.3 UNIT FAILURE INDICATION ...................... 7-56
J
Page7-2 Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E
Airplane
Description
r 7.1 INTRODUCTION
Chapter 7 contains a description of the airplane and its systems, together with operating
instructions.
For details about optional equipment see Chapter 9.
7.2 AIRFRAME
Fuselage
The GFRP fuselage is of semi monocoque molded construction. The fire protection on
the firewall is of a special fire-resistant matting, which is covered on the engine side by
stainless steel cladding. The two main bulkheads are GFRP/CFRP items.
c The wings have a front and rear spar; each wing has a top shell and a bottom shell - a
'fail safe' concept. The wings, as well as the aileron and flaps, are made of GFRP/CFRP,
and are principally of sandwich construction. An aluminum fuel tank is installed in each
of the wings.
Empennage
The airplane has a 'T' tail of GFRP semi monocoque construction. Both the stabilizers
have twin spars and a skin with no sandwich. Rudder and elevator are of sandwich
construction.
L
Airplane
Description
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
7.3 FLIGHT CONTROLS
The ailerons, elevator and wing flaps are operated through control rods, while the rudder
is controlled by cable. The flaps are electrically operated. Elevator forces can be balanced
by a trim tab on the elevator, which is operated by a Bowden cable.
Ailerons
Construction: GFRP/CFRP composite sandwich
Hinges: There are 4 hinges, which are hinge pins mounted in an aluminum
bracket. They are secured in position by a roll pin. The absence of this
roll pin can lead to the loss of the hinge pin and a consequent loss of flight
safety.
Operation: A rod-end bearing is screwed into a steel push rod and locked by means
of a nut which has locking varnish applied to it. Damage to this varnish
can indicate a twisting and thus a change to the adjustment. The
)
connection between the rod-end bearing and the control horn is a bolt,
the nut of which is likewise sealed with locking varnish.
The aluminum control horn is attached to the aileron with 3 screws.
/J,'
'
A
A
Page 7-4 Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

Airplane
Description
Construction: GFRP/CFRP composite sandwich
Hinges: There are 6 hinges, which are hinge pins mounted in an aluminum
bracket. They are secured in position by a roll pin. The absence of this
roll pin can lead to the loss of the hinge pin and a consequent loss of flight
safety. Another aluminum fitting is located at the fuselage and is attached
to a torsion tube. The torsion tube is located in the fuselage, creating a
connection between the left and right flaps.
Operation: A rod-end bearing is screwed into a steel push rod and locked by means
of a nut which has locking varnish applied to it. Damage to this varnish
can indicate a twisting and thus a change to the adjustment. The
connection between the rod-end bearing and the control horn is a bolt,
the nut of which is likewise sealed with locking varnish.
( The flap control hom is attached to the flap with 3 screws.
The flaps are driven by an electric motor and have 3 settings:
- Cruise (UP), totally retracted

- Take-off (T/0), and
- Landing (LOG).
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page7-5

Airplane
Description
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
The flaps are operated by means of a 3-position flap selector switch on the instrument
panel. The positions of the switch correspond to the positions of the flaps, the Cruise
position ofthe switch being at the top.lfthe switch is moved to another position, the flaps
continue to travel automatically until they have reached the position selected on the switch.
The UP and LOG positions are additionally protected by a limit switch to guard against
over-running the end positions.
The electrical flap drive has an automatic circuit breaker which can also be operated
manually.
Flap Position Indicator:
The current flap position is indicated by means of three lights beside the flap selector
SWitcfC
When the upper light (green) is illuminated, the flaps are in the Cruise position (UP);
When the center light (white) is illuminated, the flaps are in Take-off position (T/0);
When the lower light (white) is illuminated, the flaps are in Landing position (LOG).
)
When two lights are illuminated simultaneously, the flaps are between the two indicated
positions. This is the case only when the flaps are traveling.
Page 7-6 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

Airplane
Description
r· Elevator.
Construction: GFRP sandwich
Hinges: 5 hinges
Operation Steel push-rods;
Two of the bellcrank bearings are accessible to visual inspection next

to the lower hinge of the rudder. The elevator hom and its bearing, as
well as the connection to the push-rod, can be visually inspected at the
upper end of the rudder.
Construction: GFRP sandwich
Hinges: Upper hinge: One bolt.
Lower hinge: Bearing bracket including rudder stops, held by 4 screws

to the rear web of the vertical stabilizer. The mating part on the rudder
is a bracket which is attached to the rudder by 2 bolts. The bolts and nuts
are accessible to visual inspection.
Operation: Steel cables, the eyes of which are connected to the bolts on the bracket.
L.
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page7-7
Airplane
Description
DA40AFM
Elevator Trim
The trim control is a black wheel in the center console to the rear of the engine controls.
To guard against over-rotating, the trim wheel incorporates a friction device. A mark on
the wheel shows the take-off (T/0) position.
Tum wheel to the front =nose down

Tum wheel to the rear =nose up
Pedal Adjustment
NOTE
The pedals may only be adjusted on the gro_und!
The pedals are unlocked by pulling the black T-grip handle, which is located behind the
rear attachment, straight back . )
NOTE
When adjusting rudder pedals to install the control surfaces
gust lock pull straight back on T-grip, do not pull up.
Forward Adjustment:
Whilst keeping the handle pulled, push the pedals forward with your feet. Release the
handle and allow the pedals to lock into place.
Rearward Adjustment:
Using the unlocking handle, pull the pedals back to the desired position. Release the
handle and push the pedals forward with your feet until they lock into place.
IJ
Airplane
Description
Electrical Pedal Adjustment <Optional Equipment. OAM 40-251)
NOTE
The pedals may only be adjusted on the ground I
The pedals are adjusted using a rocker switch, located on the rear wall of the leg room.
The related circuit breaker is located below the switch.
Forward Adjustment
To move the pedals forward, depress lower side of switch. When pedals are in correct
position, release switch.
Rearward Adjustment
c I
I
I
To move the pedals in the rearward direction, depress upper side of switch. When pedals
are in correct position, release switch.
Locking
I Upon release the switch moves automatically to the 'power off position, so locking the
I pedals in the present position.
L
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page7-9
Airplane
Description
DA40AFM
7.4 INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel Variants
TheDA 40 can be equipped with one of numerous instrument panel variants. Therefore
only two example variants (VFR and IFR) are described in this section. The equipment
that is actually installed in a particular airplane is listed in the Equipment Inventory in
Section 6.5. The airplane manufacturer must be contacted before removing or installing
equipment, with the exception of replacing a unit by an identical unit.
\)
Page 7-10 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

Airplane
Description
r
4
30 =-ti
31
32
32
VFR instrument panel (example)
30
L IFR Instrument panel (example)
I Doc.#6.01.01-E I Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 I Page7-11J

Airplane
Description
DA40AFM
. ti~ ....,· . ,.=.,_\,.{:'::,~:.;:=,,: . llllaJor.thstlilm•l)t&ariil:t:f:JI)ttoi~.·.··•·... > ·• . ·.·. •. . /•! ... •

1 Electrical switches, ignition switch 18 ADF indicator
2 Circuit breakers* 19 Course deviation indicator (CDI)
3 Emergency switch 20 Audio amplifier I intercom I marker
beacon receiver
4 Rotary buttons for instrument
lighting and flood light
21
.
GPS Annunciation Control Unit
5 Flap selector switch 22 GPS

6 OAT indicator 23 Radio I VOR, No. 1
7 Fuel quantity indicator 24 Remote DME switch
8 Engine instruments 25 Radio I VOR, No. 2
g---(jQilts (Annl.lhclalot Panel) 26 DME -
10 Chronometer 27 ADF receiver

11 Altimeter 28 Autopilot control unit (optional)
12 Vertical speed indicator (VSI) 29 Transponder
13 Attitude gyro (artificial horizon) 30 Stall warning hom
14 Horizontal situation indicator (HSI) 31 Microphone socket
15 Airspeed indicator 32 Ventilation nozzles
16 Tum & bank indicator 33 Alternate Static Valve (optional for
VFR version)
17 Slaving meter 34 ELT operating unit (RCPI)
*) Designations and abbreviations used to identify the circuit breakers are explained in
Section 1.5- DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS.
Cockpit Ventilation
Ventilation in the front is provided by the movable ventilation nozzles (17) in the instrument
panel. Furthermore there are spherical nozzles in the roll bar on the left and right side
next to the front seats as well as on the central console above the passengers' heads.
The spherical nozzles are opened and closed by twisting. (J
Page 7-12 Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Airplane
Description
7.5 LANDING GEAR
The landing gear consists of a main landing gear of sprung steel struts, and a
free-castering nose wheel which is sprung by an elastomer package.
The wheel fairings are removable. When flying without wheel fairings, it should be noted
that there is a reduction in some areas of performance (see Chapter 5).
Wheel Brakes
Hydraulically operating disk brakes act on the wheels ofthe main landing gear. The wheel
brakes are individually operated by means of toe pedals.
Parking Brake
( The lever is located on the small center console under the instrument panel, and is in
the upper position when the brakes are released. To operate the parking brake pull the
lever downwards until it catches. Brake pressure is built up by multiple operation ofthe
toe brake pedals, and is maintained until the parking brake is released. To release, the
lever is pushed upwards.
L
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 7-13
Airplane
Description
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
Hydraulic System Schematic
brake pedals, brake pedals,

pilot co-pilot
parl<ing brake
valve
')
brake cylinder, LH brake cylinder, RH
(J
Page 7-14 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E
Airplane
Description
r 7.6 SEATS AND SAFETY HARNESSES
To increase passive safety, the seats are constructed using a carbon fiber/Kevlar hybrid
material and GFRP. The seats are removable to facilitate the maintenance and inspection
of the underlying controls. Covers on the control sticks prevent loose objects from falling
into the area of the controls.
The seats have removable furnishings and are equipped with energy-absorbing foam
elements.
The seats are fitted with three-point safety harnesses. The harnesses are fastened by
inserting the end ofthe belts in the belt lock, and are opened by pressing the release on
the belt lock.
The backs of the rear seats can be laid forward after pulling upwards on the knob of the
locking bolt.
L
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 Page 7-15
Airplane
Description
DA40AFM
7.7 BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT

\~
The DA 40 may be equipped with one of the following baggage compartment variants:
(a) Standard baggage compartment.
(b) Standard baggage compartment with 'baggage tube'.
(c) Extended baggage compartment (OAM 40-163). It consists of a forward and an

aft part.
Without a baggage net, no baggage may be loaded.
Standard Baggage Compartment
The baggage compartment is located behind the rear seats.
Baggage Tube (if installed)
On the back side of the standard baggage compartment the baggage tube may be
_)
installed. It is separated by a cloth cover.
Extended Baggage Compartment COAM 40-163 and OAM 40-164. if installed)
The extended baggage compartment consists of the standard baggage compartment

behind the rear seats and the baggage extension mounted between the baggage
compartment frame and ring frame No. 1.
The baggage extension has a door that may be hinged up to keep items from sliding aft
or hinged down to carry long items.
The baggage tray may be installed in the bottom of the standard baggage compartment.
The lid of the baggage tray and the bottom of the baggage extension form a flat loading
surface. The lid has mounting provisions for the tow bar. The space under the lid may
be used to carry small items such as the gust lock and the fuel quantity measuring device.

Airplane
Description
r 7.8 CANOPY. REAR DOOR. AND CABIN iNTERIOR
Front Canopv
The front canopy is closed by pulling down on the canopy frame, following which it is locked
by means of a handle on the left hand side of the frame. On locking, steel bolts lock into
mating holes in polyethylene blocks.
"Cooling gap" position: A second setting allows the bolts to lock in, leaving a gap under
the front canopy.
The front canopy can be blocked by a locking device (optional) on the left side near the
canopy opening lever by turning the key clockwise. The closed and blocked canopy can
be opened from inside by pulling the lever inside the opening handle.
WARNING
c The airplane may be operated with the front canopy in the

"cooling gap" position on the ground only. Before take-off the
front canopy must be completely closed and locked, but not
blocked with the locking device.
A window on the left hand side of the canopy can be opened for additional ventilation or
as an emergency window. Some serial numbers have another window on the right hand
side of the canopy.
[ Doc.# 6.01.o1-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 7-17

Airplane
Description
DA40AFM
Rear Door
The rear door is closed in the same way, by pulling down on the frame or on the handle
(if installed) and locking it with the handle. A gas pressure damper prevents the door from
dropping; in strong winds the assembly must be held. The rear door is protected against
unintentional opening by an additional lever.
The door can be blocked by a locking device (optional) on the left side near the door
opening lever by turning the key clockwise. The closed and blocked door can be opened
from inside by pulling the lever inside the opening handle.
WARNING
The rear door must be closed and locked, but not blocked
with the locking device before the engine is started.
Heating and Ventilation
Heating and ventilation are operated using two levers located on the small center console
under the instrument panel.
Left lever: up = heating ON
down = heating OFF
Central lever (Air distribution lever):
up =airflow to canopy (.A)

down =airflow to floor (T)
(J
Page 7-18 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Airplane
Description
Emergency Axe
If OAM 40-326 is incorporated an emergency axe is installed on the floor panel under
the pilot's seat (see Figure below).
If the canopy can not be opened in case of an emergency use the emergency axe to
break through the canopy.
WARNING
Make sure not to harm other persons by using the emergency
axe.
WARNING
Beware of sharp edges and fragments of the broken canopy.
[ Doc. # 6.01.D1-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 7-19

Airplane
Description
DA40AFM
7.9 POWER PLANT
7.9.1 ENGINE. GENERAL
Lycoming I0-360-M1A: Air-cooled four-cylinderfour-stroke engine. Horizontally-opposed

direct-drive engine with fuel injection and underslung exhaust.
Displacement:
Max. power: 180 HP (134.2 kW) at 2700 RPM at sea level and ISA.
Max. continuous power: 160 HP (119.3 kW) at 2400 RPM at sea level and ISA.
The principal engine accessories at the front of the engine are the propeller governor,
-the-starter motor, and the alternator. The ignition (optionally controlled by an electronic
control unit), the twin magneto system and the mechanical fuel pump are at the rear of
the engine. Fuel is supplied via a fuel injection system.
Further information should be obtained from the engine operating manual.

)
The engine instruments are on the right hand side of the instrument panel.
The ignition switch is designed as a key-operated lock. The ignition is switched on by

moving the switch to the right from the OFF position to the L-R-BOTH positions. A further
tum to the right to the START position will operate the starter motor.
(J
Page 7-20 Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.Q1-E
Airplane
Description
7.9.2 OPERATING CONTROLS
The engine performance is controlled by means of three levers: throttle, RPM lever and
mixture control lever, situated together as a group on the large center console (also
referred to as the throttle quadrant). Front and rear are defined in relation to the direction
of flight.
- Left hand lever with large, black knob.
This lever is used to set the manifold pressure (MP). When the throttle is furthestforward,
the engine is being provided with extra fuel for high performance settings.
Lever forward (MAX PWR) =Full throttle, higher MP

Lever to rear (IDLE) =Idle, low MP
(
High manifold pressure means that a large quantity of fuel-air mixture is being supplied
to the engine, while low manifold pressure means a lesser quantity of fuel-air mixture is
being supplied.
RPM Lever
- Central lever with blue hand I~.
Lever forward (HIGH RPM) = High RPM, fine pitch

Lever to rear (LOW RPM) =Low RPM, coarse pitch
By means ofthis lever the propeller governor controls the propeller pitch and thus engine
RPM (= propeller RPM). A selected RPM is held constant by the governor independent
L of the airspeed and the throttle setting ('Constant Speed').
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 Page 7-21

Airplane
Description
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
The propeller governor is flanged onto the front of the engine. It regulates the supply of
engine oil to the propeller. The propeller governor oil circulation is an integral part of the
engine oil circulation system. Following a defect in governor or oil system, the blades go
the finest possible pitch (maximum RPM), thus allowing continuation of the flight.
CAUTION
Following failure of the governor or a serious drop in oil
pressure, the RPM should be adjusted using the throttle.
Every effort should be made not to exceed 2700 RPM.
CAUTION
The throttle and RPM lever should be moved slowly, in order
to avoid over-speeding and excessively rapid RPM cnanges.
The light wooden propeller blades produce more rapid RPM
changes than metal blades.
)
Mixture Control Lever
-Right hand lever with red handle and lock to avoid inadvertent operation.
This lever is used to set the proportions in the fuel-air mixture which is supplied to the
engine.
Lever forward (RICH) = Mixture rich (in fuel)

Lever to rear (LEAN) = Mixture lean (in fuel)
lfthe lever is atthe forward stop, extra fuel is being supplied to the engine which at higher
performance settings contributes to engine cooling.
Page 7-22 Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

Airplane
Description
In cruise, the mixture should be made leaner in order to reach the appropriate fuel-air
mixture. The leaning procedure is given in Chapter 4.
To shut off the engine the mixture control lever is pulled to the rear stop. Air without fuel
is thus drawn in.to the cylinders and the engine dies. When the engine is stationary there
is thus no fuel in the cylinders.
Alternate Air
In the event of the loss of manifold pressure because of icing or blocking of the air filter,
there is the possibility of drawing air from the engine compartment. The operating lever
for alternate air is located under the instrument panel to the left of the center console.
To open alternate air the lever is pulled to the rear. Normally, alternate air is closed, with
the lever in the forward position.
Placard on the lever, forward position:
I ALTERNATE AIR I
Placard on the lever, visible when lever is in the rearward position:
ALTERNATE AIR
ON
L
Airplane
Description
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
7.9.3 PROPELLER
A mt-Propeller MTV-12-B/180-17 type or MTV-12-B/180-17f type, hydraulically-regulated

3-bladed constant speed propeller is installed. It has wood-composite blades with fiber-
reinforced plastic coating and stainless steel edge cladding; in the region of the propeller
hub the leading edge is coated with adhesive PU foil. These blades combine the lowest
weight whilst minimizing the chance of vibration.
CAUTION
Operation on the ground at high RPM should be avoided as
far as possible, as the blades could suffer stone damage. For
this reason a suitable site for engine runs (magneto and
propeller checks) should be selected, where there are no
loose stones or similar items.
WARNING
switched ON, as it may result in serious personal injury.
Governor
One of the following governors may be installed:
Woodward C-210776 Governor, MT P-420-10 Governor (OAM 40-077) or MT P-860-23

Governor (OAM 40-289).
Page 7-24 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

Airplane
Description
7.9.4 ENGINE INSTRUMENTS
OILP
FUEL P
VOLT
EGT
AMP
CHT
FUEL FLW
OIL T
1 2 3 4 5
Button 1: Lean mode

Button 2: Digital exhaust gas I cylinder head temperature mode
Button 3: Switch in autotrack
Button 4: Fuel computer mode
Button 5: Engine data recorder
Button 3 has an additional function on switch-on: Display mode
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 7-25

Airplane
Description
DA40AFM
Sweep Mode or Pointer Mode
If the switch-on button 3 is kept pressed until the display transfers from activating all
bars/pointers to indicating the actual values, the type of presentation can be selected.
In one case the circular instruments show the values with a pointer as in conventional
analog instruments, whilst in the other case the circular instruments fill with pointers/bars
up to the current value. It remains for the pilot to select his preferred presentation.
Indications on the Vision Microsystems VM 1000 Engine Instrument
MAN Manifold pressure inHg
RPM RPM RPM
EGT Exhaust gas temperature •f )

CHT Cylinder head temperature •f
FUELP Fuel pressure PSI
FUELFLW Fuel flow US gallhr
OILP Oil pressure PSI
OIL T Oil temperature OF
VOLT Voltage v
AMP Intensity of current A
Page 7-26 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

Airplane
Description
r Button 1 - Lean Mode
Upon powering up the unit the Normal mode is shown. Between the colored sector
markings the cylinder head temperatures of the individual cylinders are shown by bars.
Above those are bars showing the exhaust gas temperatures of the individual cylinders.
In the event of the failure of a sensor the relevant indication remains empty. A flashing
cylinder head temperature indication means either that the cylinder is too hot, or that it
is being cooled too rapidly (shock-cooling).
The operation of button 1 causes the display to move to Lean mode. This is confirmed
by two half-bars appearing to the left and right of the bar blocks. In this mode all bars which
previously showed cylinder head and exhaust gas temperature are used for exhaust gas
temperature only. One bar represents 10 °F (4.6 °C). If the columns are completely filled
with bars before the mixture is lean, button 1 should be pressed twice so that the bars
start again at the base of the indicator.
A flashing bar column indicates that the relevant cylinder has reached the hottest exhaust
gas temperature. This point will be marked with a single bar, which can be used as a
reference for enriching the mixture. As an option, the numerical indication can be used
additionally for this purpose.

Airplane
Description
DA40AFM
Button 2: Digital Exhaust Gas I Cylinder Head Temperature Mode
Using this button, the numerical indication for exhaust gas and cylinder head temperature
underneath the graphical representation of these figures is set. Following each sequential
operation ofthe button the exhaust gas and cylinder head temperatures of an individual
cylinder are displayed. In this, the display jumps automatically from the number of the
current cylinder to its current temperature. After the fourth cylinder the display switches
to the Automatic mode, which gives both the number of the cylinder with the highest
exhaust gas temperature as well as (beside it) the number of the hottest cylinder.
Alternating with this, the associated temperatures are displayed.
Button 3: Switch in Autotrack
In the Autotrack mode changes in the engine valuesare shown. If button 3 is operated
in flight, variations from the current values will be displayed, in that the relevant circular
instrument and the annotation AUTOTRACK will start to flash.
)
In order to leave the mode, button 3 must be operated. The mode is left automatically
if there is a critical value to be indicated.
Button 4 - Fuel Computer Mode
By operating button 4 the display is switched from fuel flow (FUEL FLW) to a numerical
indication underneath it. There are 4 modes, which are called up by pressing button 4
in sequence. The modes are:
REM: The remaining fuel is shown is US gal. The steps in this are 0.1 US gal. This mode
is only available if the ADD mode - add up fuel - has previously been activated.
Page 7-28 Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

Airplane
Description
r HRS: This mode shows the remaining flight time (in hours) on the basis of the current
fuel flow. The steps in this indication are tenths of hours. This mode is also only
available if the ADD mode - add up fuel - has previously been activated.
BRN: This mode shows the amount of fuel used (in US gal) since the equipment was
switched on. The steps in this are 0.1 US gal.
ADD: This mode can be used after refueling to bring the fuel quantity, which the
equipment uses for its calculations, up to date. In order to utilize the REM and HRS
modes, the computer needs to be told how much fuel has been taken on. 10 US gal
are added by pressing button 3, while pressing button 5 adds one US gal to the
total. The quantity is confirmed by pressing button 4.1n doing this, the quantity which
has been entered in ADD is added to the previous total under REM. To check the
fuel quantity button 4 should be pressed until REM is shown.
c If too much has been added, button 4 should not be pressed for confirmation. After
approx. 20 seconds the computer automatically leaves the ADD mode.
CAUTION
Incorrect use ofthe computer in the fuel-computer mode will
result in false statements in the "REM - remaining fuel" and
the "HRS- remaining flight time" modes. Before using the fuel
computer mode in flight the pilot must be certain that he has
understood the operation and use of the equipment. Beyond
this, use of the fuel computer must not be regarded as a
substitute for fuel planning for a flight.
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 7-29

Airplane
Description
DA40AFM
Button 5 - Engine Data Recorder
Operating button 5 will activate the engine data recorder. The digital values shown are
the minimum values recorded by the engine instrument unit during operation, such as
lowest voltage, lowest fuel pressure, etc. The numerical RPM indicator will indicate the
total operating hours.
Pressing button 5 again will show the maximum values encountered. Pressing button 5
still another time will tum off the engine data recorder and the display will return to the
original mode. If button 5 is not pressed for approximately 20 seconds, the display will
automatically return to the original mode.
Data of the engine data recorder can be called during or immediately after flight only. With
each new flighftlle old data will be overwritten.
Page 7-30 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

~~
( !
....
:...
0
0 0
p
'It "11
Ol c:
0 m
...... r-
0......
m
I ENGINE
~-1
m
i:
:;c
CD
:c: fuel distributor bleed line ==l====,;,.,~t...,....r
Q) intake air bleed line
fuel pressure indication "Pl-----11------,
fuel flow indication FF'I----1-----,
0
......
0
I
CD
c;>
I'IJ
0
......
0
mechanical pump
pump bleed line

--+----,
==
----1[~~~~-r~~~~~~~...:.:.:.::..:...===::..:..:...._ _
FIREWALL
RIGHT-HAND TANK
(symmetrical)
LEFT-HAND WING FUSELAGE

"tt
Ill
fC
CD
.......
I
(.,)
......
"'0
Ill
IC
CD
.....,
I
~ ENGINE
::0
CD
:c:
CD fuel distributor bleed line intake air
fuel pressure indication bleed line
fuel flow indication®--+-----.
0
......
I mechanical pump device
0
==t====rpi!IIIIKI:l+:J><~
z
CD
0
......
pump bleed line
0
0
p
=II: LEFT-HAND WING FUSELAGE
en
0
......
0
......
I
m
Airplane
Description
Fuel Pumps
The fuel system is equipped with a mechanical and an electrical fuel pump. The
mechanical pump provides for the normal fuel supply.
The electrical fuel pump is provided as an auxiliary and emergency pump, which does
not operate under normal circumstances. It is operated with the FUEL PUMP switch on
the row of switches on the instrument panel. It is checked during engine start, and is used
as a safety back-up during take-off and landing, as well as when switching fuel tanks.
It is also switched on for safety in the event of a decrease in fuel pressure.
Fuel Tank Selector
The fuel tank selector is situated on the center console. Its positions are LEFT (tank),
RIGHT (~nk) and OFF. The OFF position is reached by turning the selector to the right
while pulling up the safety catch of the fuel tank selector. This is to ensure that an OFF
( selection is not made unintentionally.
a) Standard Tank
20 US gal / ----.)0 US gal.

761 ~. 761
© ~<c
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 7-33

Airplane
Description
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
b) Long Range Tank
Fuel Tanks
Each of the two wing tanks consists of two (standard tank) or three (long range tank)
aluminum chambers which are joined by a piece of flexible hose and two independent
vent hoses. There are two separate vents per tank. The hose terminations are situated
on the underside of the wing, approx. 2 meter (7ft) from the wing tip. One vent acts as
a capillary, both to equalize the air pressure, and to provide a safety factor in the event
of a failure of the other vent. The second vent is a check valve, to allow air to enter the
tank, but prevent flow to the outside.
Page 7-34 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.Q1-E

Airplane
Description
A coarse filter (finger filter) is fitted before the outlet. To allow draining of the tank, there
is an outlet valve at its lowest point. A gascolator sits at the lowest point in the fuel system.
A drain valve is fitted to the gascolator, which can be used to remove water and sediment
which has collected in the fuel system. This valve is fitted centrally on the underside of
the fuselage, approximately 30 em (1 ft) forward of the wing leading edge.
Fuel Quantity Indication
a) Standard Tank
A capacity probe ascertains fuel quantity in the tank. When the fuel quantity indicator reads
zero, only the unusable fuel remains in the tank. The total capacity of each tank is
20 US gal (approximately 76 liter). The maximum quantity that can be indicated is either
15 US gal (up to serial number 40.054) or 17 US gal (serial number 40.055 and
subsequent). The indication up to this quantity is correct. At an actual quantity above
c 15 US gal/17 US gal the indication remains at 15 US gal/17 US gal.
NOTE
When the fuel quantity indicator reads 15 US gal/17 US gal,
the correct fuel quantity must be determined with the fuel
quantity measuring device. If this measurement is not carried
out, the fuel quantity available for flight planning is 15 US gal/
17 US gal.
Doc. # 6.01.01-E .I Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 7-35

Airplane
Description
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
b) Long Range Tank
For ascertaining fuel quantity in the enlarged tanks an additional capacitive probe is used
on each side (LH/RH). When the fuel quantity indicator reads zero, only the unusable
fuel remains in the tank. The usable capacity of each tank is 25 US gal (approximately
941iter).
Up to an actual fuel quantity of 16 US gal the fuel quantity is measured by the standard
probes and is brought to indication on the left and right side ofthe instrument in increments
of 1 US gal.
A fuel quantity between 16 US gal and 25 US gal is ascertained by the additional probes
and is brought to indication in the central area ofthe fuel quantity indicator. The indication
is numerical in 3 US gal steps (in the range from 0 to 3 US gal) and 1 US gal steps (in
the range above 3 US gal up to max. 9 US gal). The side to be indicated can be selected
by the AUX FUEL QTY switch (see figure below) which is located next to the indicator.
The indication on the left and right side of the instrument (0 US gal to max. 16 US gal)
is not affected by the switch.
AUXFUELQTY
LH~ RH
(J
Page 7-36 Rev.B 0 1-Dec-20 10 Doc. # 6.01.01-E
Airplane
Description
r The actual fuel quantity in the respective tank (LH/RH) is the sum of the central indication
and the corresponding indication on the left or right side.
CAUTION
The correct indication of the fuel quantity takes 2 minutes after
actuation of the AUX FUEL QTY switch.
Additional fuel quantity indication

between 16 US gal and 25 US gal
of the tank selected with the AUX
FUEL QTY switch
(_
Doc.# 6.01.Q1-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 7-37

Airplane
Description
DA40AFM
Fuel Quantity Measuring Device

\')
The fuel quantity measuring device allows the fuel quantity in the tank to be determined
during the pre-flight inspection. It functions according to the principle of communicating
containers. The fuel quantity measuring device has a recess which fits the airfoil of the
wing. With this recess the device is held against the stall strip at the leading edge of the
wing. The exact position is marked by a bore in the stall strip. Then the metal connector
is pressed against the drain of the tank. The amount of fuel in the tank can now be read
off from the vertical ascending pipe.
For a correct indication the airplane must be placed on a horizontal ground and the fuel
filler must have been opened before.
The designated place for the fuel quantity measuring device is the bag on the rear side
of the pilot's seat.
CAUTION )
Different fuel measuring devices are used for the standard
tank and the long range tank. The use of the wrong device
results in a wrong indication.
(J
I Page 7- 38 I Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 I Doc.# 6.01.01-E I
DA40AFM • Diamond Airplane
AIRCRAFT Description
L/ a) Standard Tank b) Long Range Tank
I Doc.#6.01.01-E I Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 I Page7-391

: -a
I.....
;!!
I:: n
1m ::1. iii
::II
..... r ~ CD
~
I
~I
..%.. ANNUNCIATION PANEL
I~ g·
OVER- 10' -f
ALTERNATOR WARNING LIGHT I::U
n
VOLTAGE"
PROTECTION ~
..a:-
VOLT. PROT.
!)io
y
:::0
I~I~
CD
:-: ALT ~
CD 1-- ALT. CONT.
•s·
'
' I
I ·---1
-.......au
.;c._
ALTERNATOR m
0_., 1\LTERNATOM CUH:RENf SENSOR I :s:::
I
"
tl
I AVIO
RELAV""" ~
0 BATTERY
z
CD
DATT
~-
I
BATT
.
0
..... I - -1.
0
' l~a
>=
Gj .
..;!:. ~
'
~=
I
-!- ~ ~ I
~·~
I
:!!~
':' 1GOA
jd
':' n
. STARr
-..%....~
~- 8 OJ,.
AVIONICS MASTER SWITCH
~
IGNITION (IGN)
___,.- ~ OTHFR CONSUMF.'R~

"' • B:L ~
~
~
~
Simplified wiring diagram for serial numbers without Essential Bus ~
b_.,
m
I ~
i:
~ ~ ~
AVIONIC
VOLTAGE REGULATOR MAIN SUS
BUS
c
0
p OVER-
=It: VOLTAGE
Ol
0
.....
0
.....
I
m
$1 ALTERNATOR CURRENT SENSOR

:'
co
STARTER
160A
0
.....
I
c
CD
c;>
1\)
0
.....
0
BATTERY
24V
cCD
"tl
~
CD
ESSENTIAL
AVIONIC
BUS
Ill
n
,.
......
~
I
ESSENTIAL BUS :I•
.a
'8: ii
..... CJI-----, 0
:I
:I
-!- CD
Simplified wiring diagram for serial numbers with Essential Bus

Airplane
Description
•Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
7.11.1 GENERAL
The DA 40 has 28 Volt DC system, which can be sub-divided into:
- Power generation
-Storage
- Distribution
-Consumers
Power Generation
The 70 Ampere alternator (generator) is mounted on the front of the engine. It is driven
by a V-belt, and charges the battery. In the event of alternator failure, the battery provides
the system with electrical energy. Given the provision ofthese two independent sources
of electrical power, the complete failure of the electrical system is extremely unlikely.
)
Power is stored in a lead-acid battery which is mounted in the right-hand side of the engine
compartment. It has a capacity of 10 Ampere-hour or more, depending on the battery
type. The battery is connected to the airplane electrical system via the main (70 Ampere)
circuit breaker.
In addition, a non-rechargeable dry battery or a lithium battery pack is installed in the IFR
model as a further source of power for the attitude gyro (artificial horizon) and the flood
light. When the emergency switch is set to ON, these two systems are supplied with power
for 1 hour and 30 minutes, independent of all other electrical consumers.
Distribution
Electrical power is distributed via the main bus and, if installed, the essential bus.
J
Page 7-42 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
DA40AFM • Diamond Airplane
r Master Switch CALT/BATl
The Master switch is divided into a Master switch (ALT) on the left and a Master switch
I (BAT) on the right. Both switches together are known as the Master switch (ALT/BAT).
Consumers
The individual consumers (e.g. radio, electrical fuel pump, position lights, etc.) are
connected to the main bus via automatic circuit breakers.
Designations and abbreviations used to identify the circuit breakers are explained in
Section 1.5 - DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS.
The basic version of the DA 40 is equipped with the electric start boost system
SlickSTART. This system improves the start characteristics by delivering more spark
( energy during the engine start sequence. After engine starting the ignition is controlled
by the conventional retard breaker magneto system.
As an option, the LASAR electronic ignition control unit can be installed instead of the
SlickSTART system. This unit measures manifold pressure and RPM and uses these
parameters to optimize the ignition timing. This provides for smooth engine running and
improved starting behavior. If the electronic ignition control is not in operation, the status
light for the ignition illuminates and the conventional magneto ignition takes over the
ignition control. Also, during operation of the engine on only one magneto, for example
during the magneto check, the ignition is not controlled electronically and the status light
for the ignition should illuminate. For engine restart in flight without the electronic ignition
control being operative an engine speed of more than 500 RPM is necessary. The magneto
ignition is independent of the electrical network, therefore providing safe engine operation
even in the event of a power failure.
L
Airplane
Description
DA40AFM
Voltmeter
The voltmeter displays the potential on the main bus. If the alternator is operating, the
alternator voltage is shown, otherwise it is that provided by the battery.
Ammeter
The ammeter displays the current with which the alternator is being loaded.
Landing and Taxi Lights
Landing and taxi lights are built into the left wing, and are each operated by means of
a switch (LANDING, TAXI) on the row of switches on the instrument panel.
Position-and Strobe Lights
Combined position and strobe lights (anti collision lights) are installed on both wing tips.
Each system is operated by a switch (POSITION, STROBE) on the row of switches on
the instrument panel.
)
Flood Light
A two-dimensional light emitter is mounted above the instrument panel. It illuminates the
instrument panel as well as all levers, switches, etc. With a rotary button (FLOOD) in the
left-hand section of the instrument panel the flood light is switched on and its brightness
is adjusted.
Instrument Lighting
With a rotary button (INSTRUMENT) in the left-hand section of the instrument panel the
internal lighting of the instruments is switched on and its brightness is adjusted.
Page 7-44 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E

Airplane
Description
r Pitot Heating
The Pitot probe, which provides measurement for the Pitot-static system, is electrically
heated. The heating is activated with a switch (PITOT) on the row of switches on the
instrument panel. The temperature is automatically kept constant by means of a thermal
switch on the Pitot probe, and as an additional safety measure a thermal fuse is built in.
If this thermal fuse is activated, the Pitot heating can no longer be switched on, and the
Pitot heating caution will be displayed. In this case the system should be serviced.
NOTE
The Pitot heating caution will also be displayed whenever the
Pitot heating system is switched OFF.
L,
I Doc. # 6.01.01-E I Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 I Page 7 - 45 I
Airplane
Description
DA40AFM
7.11.2 DAI ANNUNCIATOR PANEL

(WARNING. CAUTION AND STATUS LIGHTS)
There are two variants of the annunciator panel ('DAI' and White Wire'). The 'DAI' variant,
which is described below, can be identified by the lights in the shape of a square.
Testing the Annunciator Panel
In the process of the pre-flight check the lights of the annunciator panel must be checked
by operating the test switch. This is to check that the lights have notfailed. All lights must
be serviceable.
Alternator Warning Light CALTl
The alternator warning light illuminates on alternator failure. The only remaining source
of electrical power is the battery. The color is red.
The procedure to be followed upon alternator warning is given in 3.7.2- FAILURES IN )

THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
Low Voltage Caution Light NOLTl
This caution light illuminates when the on-board voltage drops below 24 Volts. It goes
out again when the voltage exceeds 25 Volts. The color is amber.
The procedure to be followed upon low voltage caution is given in 48.3- FAILURES IN
Page 7-46 Rev.8 01-Dec-201 0 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

Airplane
Description
Fuel Pressure Warning light CFUEL PR)
The fuel pressure warning light illuminates when the fuel pressure drops below 14 PSI.
The color is red.
Low Fuel Caution Lights CL FUEL and R FUEL)
Each tank has its own caution light. It starts to flash when the fuel quantity becomes low,
and illuminates permanently when the quantity of usable fuel in the respective tank drops
below 3 US gal (±1 US gal). The indication is calibrated for straight and level flight. The
light may illuminate during turns which are flown with slip, or while taxiing in curves. The
color is amber.
Oil Pressure Warning light COIL PR)
The oil pressure warning light illuminates when the oil pressure drops below 25 PSI. The
( color is red.
The procedure to be followed upon oil pressure warning is given in 3.2.3 - ENGINE
PROBLEMS IN FLIGHT.
Door Warning light CDOOR)
The door warning light illuminates when the front canopy and/or the rear door is not closed
and locked. The color is red.
The procedure to be followed upon door warning is given in 3.7.4- DOOR-WARNING

LIGHT ON.
L
Airplane
Description
DA40AFM
\·~
Status Light for the Ignition CIGN)
This light is only used when the electronic ignition control unit is installed.
The status light for the ignition illuminates when the electronic ignition control is not
operating.ln this case the conventional magneto ignition will be in use. The color is white.
The procedure to be followed upon illumination of the ignition status light is given in
48.3- FAILURES IN THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
Starter Warning Light CSTART)
The starter warning light illuminates when the starter is being operated or when the
connection between the starter motor and the engine has not been broken. This occurs
when the pinion of the starter motor remains engaged with the propeller flywheel. The
color is red.
The procedure to be followed upon starter warning is given in 3. 7.2- FAILURES IN THE )
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
Pitot Heating Caution Light CPITOTl
The Pitot heating caution light is illuminated when the Pitot heating is not switched on,
or when there is a failure of the Pitot heating system. The color is amber.
Prolonged operation of the Pitot heating on the ground can also cause the Pitot heating
caution lightto illuminate. In this case it indicates the activation ofthe thermal switch, which
prevents overheating ofthe Pitot heating system on the ground. This is a normal function
of the system. After a cooling period, the heating system will be switched on again
automatically.
Page 7-48 Rev.8 01-Dec-201 0 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

DA40AFM .
~
.Diamond Airplane
7.11.3 WHITE WIRE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL

(WARNING, CAUTION AND STATUS LIGHTS)
There are two variants of the annunciator panel ('DAI' and 'White Wire'). The 'White Wire'
variant, which is described below, can be identified by the flat front panel and the 'White
Wire' logo on the display in the upper left corner.
Testing the Annunciator Panel
In the process of the pre-flight check , proper functioning of the annunciator panel must
be verified . This functional check is automatically started after switching the battery master
switch ON . All lights are flashed, and the aural alert is muted. By pressing the
'acknowledge' button , the lights are extinguished, and a momentary aural alert is sounded.
This test verifies functionality of the microprocessor, the lights, and the aural signal.
The pilot may initiate additional system tests by holding the 'acknowledge' button for
2 seconds . All lights will begin flashing, and the aural alert will sound continuously.
Warning Messages
A warning is indicated by a continuous aural alert (sounded in the airplane's intercom

system), flashing of the red WARNING light, and flashing of the red warning light
associated with the affected system.
By pressing the 'acknowledge' button, which is now illuminated green, the aural alert will
be terminated, and the WARNING light will be extinguished. The warning light associated
with the affected system will change from flashing to solid illumination .
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 0 1-Dec-20 10 Page 7-49

Airplane
Description
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
Caution Messages
A caution is indicated by a momentary aural alert (sounded in the airplane's intercom

system), flashing of the amber CAUTION light, and flashing of the amber caution light
associated with the affected system.
By pressing the 'acknowledge' button, which is now illuminated green, the CAUTION light
will be extinguished. The caution light associated with the affected system will change
from flashing to solid illumination.
The LOW FUEL caution message is displayed in a slightly different manner (extended
functionality), which is described below.
Alternator Warning Message (ALTERNATOR)
The alternator warning message is displayed on alternator failure. The only remaining
source of electrical power is the battery.
The procedure to be followed upon alternator warning is given in 3.7.2- FAILURES IN

()
Low Voltage Caution Message (LOW VOLTS)
The low voltage caution message is displayed when the on-board voltage drops below
24 Volts. It is terminated when the voltage exceeds 25 Volts again.
The procedure to be followed upon low voltage caution is given in 48.3- FAILURES IN
(J
Page 7-50 Rev.8 0 1-Dec-20 10 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Airplane
Description
Fuel Pressure Warning Message (FUEL PRESS)
The fuel pressure warning message is displayed when the fuel pressure drops below
14 PSI.
Low Fuel Caution Message (LOW FUEL)
As soon as the amount of usable fuel in one tank is less than 3 US gal (±1 US gal), a
caution message is displayed in the usual manner (momentary aural alert, flashing
CAUTION light, flashing LOW FUEl caution light). Termination of the message is also
done as usual ('acknowledge', CAUTION light is extinguished, LOW FUEL caution light
changes to solid illumination).
As soon as the amount of usable fuel in the second tank is also less than 3 US gal
(±1 US gal), a caution message is displayed in a different manner. A continuous aural
alert is sounded in the airplane's intercom system, the amber CAUTION light is flashed,
and the amber LOW FUEL caution light is flashed.
By pressing the 'acknowledge' button, which is now illuminated green, the aural alert will
be terminated, and the CAUTION light will be extinguished. The LOW FUEL caution light
will continue to be flashed.
The indication is calibrated for straight and level flight. The caution message may be
triggered during turns which are flown with slip, or while taxiing in curves.
Oil Pressure Warning Message (OIL PRESS)
The oil pressure warning message is displayed when the oil pressure drops below 25 PSI.
The procedure to be followed upon oil pressure warning is given in 3.2.3 - ENGINE
PROBLEMS IN FLIGHT.
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 0 1-Dec-20 10 Page 7-51

Airplane
Description
DA40AFM
Door Warning Message <DOORS)
The door warning message is displayed when the front canopy and/or the rear door is
not closed and locked.
The procedure to be followed upon door warning is given in 3.7.4- DOOR-WARNING

LIGHT ON.
Status light for the Ignition (IGN>
This light is only used when the electronic ignition control unit is installed.
The status light for the ignition is illuminated when the electronic ignition control is not
operating. In this case the conventional magneto ignition will be in use. The color is white.
The WARNING light, the CAUTION light, and the aural alert will not be activated.
The procedure to be followed upon illumination of the ignition status light is given in )
48.3 - FAILURES IN THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
Starter Warning Message (START>
The starter warning message is displayed when the connection between the starter motor
and the engine has not been broken. This occurs when the pinion of the starter motor
remains engaged with the propeller flywheel.
Furthermore, the START warning light is illuminated continuously as long as the starter
is being operated.ln this case the WARNING light and the aural alert will not be activated.
The procedure to be followed upon starter warning is given in 3.7.2- FAILURES IN THE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
IJ
Page 7-52 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E
Airplane
Description
r Pitot Heating Caution Message CPITOTl
The Pitot heating caution message is displayed when the Pitot heating is not switched
on, or when there is a failure of the Pitot heating system.
Prolonged operation of the Pitot heating on the ground can also cause the Pitot heating
caution message to be displayed. In this case it indicates the activation of the thermal
switch, which prevents overheating of the Pitot heating system on the ground. This is a
normal function ofthe system. After a cooling period, the heating system will be switched
on again automatically.
Trim Failure Warning Message (TRIM FAIL>
The White Wire annunciator panel is prepared for the installation of an autopilot in the
DA 40. When the autopilot is installed and ready for operation, this warning message
indicates a failure of the automatic trim system of the autopilot. For further details, refer
to the Supplement to the AFM for the autopilot (if installed).
Unused Lights
The White Wire annunciator panel has two lights for possible future use. These lights are
currently unused.
L
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page 7-53
Airplane
Description
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
7.12 PITOT..STATIC SYSTEM

()
Total pressure is measured at the leading edge of a Pitot probe under the left wing. Static
pressure is measured at two orifices at lower and rear edges of the same probe. To protect
against dirt and condensation there are filters in the system, which are accessible from
the wing root. The Pitot probe is electrically heated.
In addition, some serial numbers have an alternate static valve installed on the underside
of the instrument panel. With this valve, the static pressure in the cabin can be used as
static pressure source in the event of a failure of the Pitot-static system.
If an autopilot system is installed, additional static sources may be installed (OAM 40-267).
7.13 STALL WARNING
If airspeed drops below approximately 10 to minimum 5 knots above the stalling speed,
the stall warning hom, located in the instrument panel, will sound. The hom becomes
)
progressively louder the closer one gets to stalling speed. Suction at an orifice on the
left wing leading edge activates the hom via a hose. The orifice for the stall warning in
the left wing is marked by a red ring.
7.14 AVIONICS
The radio and navigation equipment is located in the central part of the instrument panel.
A transmit switch for the radio is mounted on the end of each control stick. There are
connection facilities for up to 4 headsets between the front seats.

Airplane
Description
r 7.15 CO-MONITOR (IF INSTALLED)
The airplane may be equipped with a CO detector (OAM 40-253).
I 7.15.1 SELF TEST SEQUENCE
1 When power is applied to the CO detector, a self-test routine begins. The test checks
1 for functionality of the critical components such as the CO sensor, temperature sensor,
1 and the integrity of the total CO detector system.
1 The remote alert light will flash twice. Then the remote light will remain OFF until there
1 is another CO alert or until a failure of the unit occurs.
I 7.15.2 IN-FLIGHT CO ALARM
I If the CO detector visual alert annunciator illuminates in flight, press the TEST/RESET
(_ I button.
1 If the alert continues with the remote light staying ON, proceed with the emergency
I procedure 3.7.3- SUSPICION OF CARBON MONOXIDE CONTAMINATION IN THE
I CABIN.
I NOTE
The remote light will stay on until the CO level goes below
50 PPM.
L
Airplane
Description
DA40AFM
7.15.3 UNIT FAILURE INDICATION

~~
A failure of the CO sensor, temperature sensor, or the micro-controller will result in the
following failure indications:
The remote light will flash at an approximately rate of one flash each four seconds until
the failure is cleared or power is removed from the unit.
,J
I Page?--;-~ Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 I Doc.#6.01.01-E I
Handling
CHAPTERS
AIRPLANE HANDLING, CARE AND MAINTENANCE
Page
8.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................... 8-2

8.2 AIRPLANE INSPECTION INTERVALS ...................... 8-2
8.3 AIRPLANE ALTERATIONS OR REPAIRS .................... 8-3
8.4 GROUND HANDLING I ROAD TRANSPORT ................. 8-3
8.4.1 GROUND HANDLING WITHOUT TOW BAR ............. 8-3
8.4.2 GROUND HANDLING WITH TOW BAR ................. 8-3
8.4.3 PARKING ........................................ 8-5
8.4.4 MOORING ....................................... 8-7
8.4.5 JACKING ........................................ 8-7
8.4.6 ALIGNMENT ...................................... 8-7
8.4.7 ROAD TRANSPORT ............................... 8-8
8.5 CLEANING AND CARE .................................. 8-9
8.5.1 PAINTED SURFACES .............................. 8-9
8.5.2 CANOPY AND REAR DOOR ........................ 8-10
8.5.3 PROPELLER .................................... 8-10
8.5.4 ENGINE ........................................ 8-10
8.5.5 INTERIOR SURFACES ............................ 8-11
8.6 DE-ICING ON THE GROUND ............................ 8-12
L
I Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page8-1
Handling .Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
8.1 INTRODUCTION
Chapter 8 contains the manufacturer's recommended procedures for proper ground

handling and servicing of the airplane. The Airplane Maintenance Manual (Doc. No.
6.02.01) lists certain inspection and maintenance requirements which must be followed
if the airplane is to retain a new plane performance and reliability.
8.2 AIRPLANE INSPECTION INTERVALS
For maintenance work on engine and propeller, the currently effective Operator's Manuals,
Service Instructions, Service Letters and Service Bulletins of Lycoming and mt-Propeller
must be followed. For airframe inspections, the currently effective checklists/manuals of
the manufacturer must be followed.
)
CAUTION
Unscheduled maintenance checks are required after:
- Hard landings.
- Propeller strike.
- Engine fire.
- Lighting strike.
- Occurrence of other malfunctions and damage.
Unscheduled maintenance checks are described in the

Airplane Maintenance Manual (Doc. No. 6.02.01; Section
05-50).
J
PageS- 2 Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Handling
r~ .
8.3 AIRPLANE ALTERATIONS OR REPAIRS
Alterations or repairs of the airplane may be carried out only according to the Airplane
Maintenance Manual, Doc. No. 6.02.01, and only by authorized personnel.
8.4 GROUND HANDLING I ROAD TRANSPORT
8.4.1 GROUND HANDLING WITHOUT TOW BAR
During forward traversing the nose wheel will follow the movement of the airplane. Change
in direction is achieved by pulling on the propeller near the spinner. To traverse in the
rear direction, the tail section of the airplane should be pushed down until the nose wheel
is clear of the ground. This method can also be used to turn the airplane around its main
c
landing gear.
8.4.2 GROUND HANDLING WITH TOW BAR
For pushing or pulling the airplane on the ground, it is recommended to use the tow bar
which is available from the manufacturer. The tow bar is bent apart and engaged in the
appropriate holes in the nose wheel fairing as shown on the picture below. The arresting
knob must be fully engaged.
WARNING
The tow bar mu~t be removed before starting the engine.
CAUTION
The tow bar may only be used for moving the airplane on the
ground by hand. After moving the airplane, the tow bar must
be removed.
[ Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page8-3

Handling .
~
.Diamond A IRCRAFT
DA 40 AFM
NOTE
\
When moving the airplane rearward, the tow bar must be held
firmly to prevent abrupt sideward deflection of the nose wheel.
t "''
I Page B ~ 4 I Red 01 ~Deo~20 10 I Doo. #-.::01 .01 ~~

DA40AFM Handling
"'
~ .
8.4.3 PARKING
For short term parking, the airplane must be positioned into the wind, the parking brake
must be engaged and the wing flaps must be in the retracted position. For extended and
unattended parking, as well as in unpredictable wind conditions, the airplane must be
anchored to the ground or placed in a hangar. Parking in a hangar is recommended.
Control Surfaces Gust Lock
The manufacturer offers a control surfaces gust lock which can be used to block the
primary controls. It is recommended that the control surfaces gust lock be used when
parking outdoors, because otherwise the control surfaces can hit the stops in strong tail
wind. This can lead to excessive wear or damage.
WARNING
The control surfaces gust lock must be removed before flight.
The control surfaces gust lock is installed as follows:
1. Move the rudder pedals fully rearward.

2. Engage the control surfaces gust lock with the pedals.
3. Engage the stick, wrap straps around stick once.
4. Attach the locks and tighten the straps.
For removal, reverse the sequence.
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-201 0 Page 8-5

::!: U;J
LL
~
<(
q
c ~
'0:1' 0
<( (0
c =It
<.i
0
0
"t2t:
6~
e« 0
~
.m
Q
N
uQ)
•
~
co
::>
Q)
a:::
(0
Cl co
:§ Q)
"'C Ol
r::: ro
10 a..
:I:
Handling
r 8.4.4 MOORING
The tail fin of the airplane has a hole which can be used to tie-down the airplane to the
ground. Also on each wing near the wing tip, an eyelet with a metric MB thread can be
installed and used as tie-down points.
8.4.5 JACKING
The DA 40 can be jacked at the two jackpoints located on the lower side of the fuselage's
LH and RH root ribs as well as at tl'le tail fin.
8.4.6 ALIGNMENT
For alignment push down on the tail section at the fuselage/vertical tail junction until the
nose wheel is clear of the ground. With the nose wheel free, the DA 40 can be turned
c around the main landing gear. After turning the airplane into the correct position, release
the tail section until the nose wheel is back on the ground.
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.B 01-Dec-2010 PageB-7

Handling • Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
8.4.7 ROAD TRANSPORT
For transporting the airplane on the road it is recommended that an open trailer be used.
All airplane components must be stored on a cushioned surface and secured to avoid
any movement during transportation.
1. Fuselage:
The fuselage should stand on the main and nose landing gear. It must be ensured that
the fuselage will not move in a forward, backward or upward direction. Furthermore, it
must be ensured that the propeller has sufficient clearance so that it cannot be damilged
due to fuselage movement during transportation.
2. Wings:
For transportation, both wings must be removed from the fuselage. To avoid any damage,
the wings are stored in an upright position on the leading edge with the root rib area
positioned on an upholstered profiled surface with a width of at least 400 mm ( 1.3 ft). The
)
outside wing area (approximately 3m (10ft) from the root rib area) is placed on an
upholstered profiled surface with a minimum width of 300 mm (1 ft).
The wings must be secured to avoid any sliding movement to the rear.
3. Horizontal Stabilizer:
The horizontal stabilizer is stored flat on the trailer and secured with straps, or in an upright
position sitting on the leading edge on a profiled surface. All storing surfaces must be
upholstered with felt or cellular rubber.
(J
Page8-8 Rev. a 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Handling
r 8.5 CLEANING AND CARE
CAUTION
The airplane must be kept clean. The bright surface prevents
the structure from overheating.
CAUTION
Excessive dirt deteriorates the flight performance.
8.5.1 PAINTED SURFACES
The entire surface of the airplane is painted with a white weatherproof two component
( paint. Nevertheless, it is advantageous to protect the airplane against moisture and

dampness. It is recommended to park the airplane in a hangar for prolonged storage.
Moisture that has penetrated must be removed by storing the affected parts in a dry place
and turning them over several times.
Dirt, insects, etc. can be removed with water alone and if necessary with a mild detergent.
An automotive paint cleaner can be used for stubborn spots. For best results, clean the
airplane after the day's flying is ended, so that the dirt will not become ingrained.
Oil stains, exhaust stains, etc. on the lower fuselage skin can be removed with a cold
detergent. Before starting, ensure that the detergent does not affect the surface finish.
Use commercial automotive preservatives without silicone additives to conserve the paint
finish.
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Page8-9

Handling • Diamond AIRCRAFT
DA40AFM
8.5.2 CANOPY AND REAR DOOR

()
The canopy and rear door should be cleaned with 'Piexiklar' or any other acrylic glass
detergent if available; otherwise use lukewarm water. Final cleaning should be done with
a clean piece of chamois-leather or soft cloth. Never rub or polish dry acrylic glass.
8.5.3 PROPELLER
Damage and malfunctions during operation must be inspected by authorized personnel.
The manufacturer uses PU paint or acrylic paint which is resistant to almost any solvent.
The blades may be treated with commercial automotive cleaning agents or preservatives.
The penetration of moisture into the wooden core must be avoided by all means. Should
doubts arise, an appropriately rated inspector must be consulted.
8.5.4 ENGINE )
Engine cleaning is part of the scheduled inspections.
CAUTION
Do not use acidic detergents (e.g. a~tomotive wheel cleaners)
for cleaning the exhaust system.
(J
PageB-10 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E
Handling I
r 8.5.5 INTERIOR SURFACES
The interior should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner. All loose items (pens, bags etc.)
should be removed or properly stored and secured.
All instruments can be cleaned using a soft dry cloth, plastic surfaces should be wiped
clean using a damp cloth without any cleaning agents.
The leather interior should be treated with leather sealer within 3 months since new, and
then at intervals of3 to 6 months. Clean the leather interior with an appropriate mild leather
cleaning agent and a soft cleaning brush for leather.
Note that the acrylic glass windows transmit the ultraviolet radiation from the sun.
{
~
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 PageB-11

I
Gene"' • Diamond AIRCRAFT
8.6 DE-ICING ON THE GROUND
Approved De-Icing Fluids
Kilfrost TKS80
Aeroshell Compound 07
Any source AL-5 (DTD
De-Icing Procedure
1. Remove any snow from the airplane using a soft brush.
2. Spray de-icing fluid onto ice-covered surfaces using a suitable spray bottle.
3. Use a soft piece of cloth to wipe the airplane dry. )
IJ
Page 8-12 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc. # 6.01.01-E
DA40AFM • Diamond
AIRCRAFT
Supplements
CHAPTER9
SUPPLEMENTS
Page
9.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

9.2 LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.3 AMENDMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
L'
OAM 40.061, ·073, -081,
Doc. No. 6.01.01-E Rev.S 09 Sep 2001 ·085, ·092, .()93, .()94 Page 9-1
MAM 40.039/a, -048
Supplements
9.1 INTRODUCTION
r Chapter 9 contains information concerning additional (optional) equipment of the DA 40.
Unless otherwise stated, the procedures given in the Supplements must be applied in
addition to the procedures given in the main part of the Airplane Flight Manual.
All approved supplements are listed in the List of Supplements in this Chapter.
The Airplane Flight Manual contains exactly those Supplements which correspond to
the installed equipment according to the Equipment Inventory of Section 6.5.
L'
OAM40.061, ·073, .081,
Doc. No. 6.01.01-E Rev.5 09 Sep 2001 .085, .092, .093, .()94 Page 9-2
MAM 40.039/a, .()48
--- --
DA40AFM • Diamond
AIRCRAFT
Supplements
9.2 LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS
I A1 1 20-Apr-2001 D
Bendix/King
I lntercomm System,
I A2 Model PM 1000 II 1 20-Apr-2001 D
PS Engineering, Inc.
Transponder, KT 76A
A3 1 20-Apr-2001 D
Bendix/King
( A4
GPS, KLN 89B
1 20-Apr-2001 D
Bendix/King
I Course Deviation Indicator,

AS Kl208 1 20-Apr-2001 D
Bendix/King
I A6
GPS, KLN 94 (VFR Operation}
Bendix/King
2 09-Sep-2001 D
Audio Amplifier /Intercom I

A7 Marker Beacon Receiver, KMA 28 1 20-Apr-2001 D [iJ/
Bendix/King
I VHF Communication/Navigation
L.~
Transceivers,
AS 1 20-Apr-2001 D
KX 155A and KX 165A
Bendix/King
OAM 41J.061, -073, -081,

Doc. No. 6.01.01-E Rev. 5 09 Sep 2001 -085, -092, -093, -094 Page 9-3
MAM 40-039/a, -048
Supplements
I A9
Automatic Direction Finder, KR 87
1 20-Apr-2001 0
Bendix/King
I Distance Measuring Equipment,

A10 KN62A 1 20-Apr-2001 0
Bendix/King
Compass System, KCS 55A

A11 1 20-Apr-2001 0
Bendix/King
Transponder, KT 76C
A12 1 20-Apr-2001 0
Bendix/King
(
I
Autopilot, KAP 140
A13 0 01-Mar-2001 0
Bendix/King
GPS, KLN 94 (IFR Operation)

I A14
Bendix/King
2 09-Sep-2001 0
GPS Annunciation Control Unit,

A15 MD41 1 20-Apr-2001 0
Mid-Continent
oAM 40-061, -C73, -C81,

Doc. No. 6.01.01-E Rev.5 09 Sep 2001 -085, -092, -093, -094 Page 9-4
MAM 40-039/a, -048
DA40AFM • Diamond
AIRCRAFT
Supplements
E1 1 20-Apr-2001 0
I AstroTech
Attitude Indicator,
E2 AIM 11 00-28L(OF) 20-Apr-2001 0 [3"'
BF Goodrich
Attitude Indicator,
E3 AIM 11 00-28LK(OF) DIA 1 20-Apr-2001 0
BF Goodrich
Emergency Locator Transmitter,

( I 81 Model E-01 1 20-Apr-2001 19"' 0
ACK
OiiM 40.061, .073, .081,

Doc. No. 6.01.01-E Rev. 5 09 Sep 2001 -085, -092, .093, .()94 Page 9-5
MiiM 40.039/a, -048
Supplements
9.3 AMENDMENTS
r There are no Amendments at this time.
(_
L
OAM 40-061, -073, -081,
Doc. No. 6.01.01-E Rev. 5 09 Sep 2001 .()85, .()92, .()93, .()94 Page 9-6
MAM 40-039/a, -048
Garmln ltd. Or its subsidiaries
clo Garmln International
r 1200 E. 15101 Street

Olathe, KS 66062 USA
DocumentNo. 190-00492~15
GARMIN G1000 SYNTHETIC VISION AND PATHWAYS OPTION
c This Supplement must be attached to the FAA Approved Airplane Flight

Manual when tile Garmin G1000 Synthetic Vision and Pathways Option
is Installed In accordance with STC SA01480WI-D.
The informatiOn contained herein supplements the information of the
basic Airplane Flight Manual and the airplane specific G1000 Airplane
( Flight Manual Supplement For Limitations, Procedures and
Performance information not contained in this Supplement consult the
basic Airplane Flight Manual and Supplements.
Only Section If, of this supplement "Limitations" is FM APPROVED .
..,..
Robert Mu!Tay
Lead DAS Administrator
Garmin International
DAS-240087..CE
Date: _____f:.__
i:. l/f.!Jf/.........-.....
(. 190-00492.-15 Rev 1 Page 1 of27
L)
~ ~ ~ ~~ ·~
~
.....
N
z 0
0 N
ii:
0
G)
Cl
Ill
D.
rn
~
.:C
c: s:J:
.11!
..Q ~
~ D.
~ 0
z.
:8c: <(
.l!!
z
.s 0
r;,;
.f!l
>
a
CD
.!2
0
t
J:
!!: 1-
z
~
0
0
0
£
ll)
<;
z
i
I "'....
q
0
(!)
r GARMIN G1000 SYNTHETIC VISION AND PATHWAYS OPTION
LOG OF REVISIONS
Revision Page FAA Dale of

Number Number(s) Description Approved Approval
1 All Initial Relesse SeePage 1 SesPage 1
c
( __
l. 190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page3of27

(,
'~
This page is intentionally blank.
()
,')

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 4 of27
·')
(
\
' d
!
CJ
Table of Contents
SECTION I GENERAL •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.•••••••••••••••••••• 7

SECTION II LIMITATIONS ••••••.•••••••••••••••••••••.•••••••••••••••••••••.•••••••••••••••••••• &
SECTION Ill EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ......................................... 10
SECTION IVA NORMAL PROCEDURES .............................................. 11
( SECTION IVB ABNORMAL PROCEDURES ......................................... 19

SECTION V PERFORMANCE •••••••.••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.••.•••••••••••••••••• 20
SECTION VI WEIGHT AND BALANCE ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.••••••••••••••.••• 20
SECTION VII SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS ••••.•••••••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 21
c
( __

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page5of27
~
~
This page is intentionally blank.
·.)
IJ
190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 6of27
SECTION I
GENERAL
This document describes the Synthetic Vision sub system (SVS) that is
an optional part of the Garmin G1 000 Integrated Avionics System. This
information supplements the information presented in the Aircraft Flight
Manual and the aircraft specific Garmin G1000 Aircraft Flight Manual
Supplement.
The purpose of the SVS system is to assist the pilot in maintaining
situational awareness with regard to the terrain and traffic surrounding
the aircraft and the navigational situation relative to the programmed
flight plan . A typical SVS display is shown below.

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 7 of 27
SVS provides additional features on the G1000 primary flight display

(PFD) which display the following information:
Synthetic Terrain; an artificial, database derived, three
dimensional view of the terrain ahead of the aircraft within a field
of view of approximately 30 degrees left and 35 degrees right of
the aircraft heading.
)
Obstacles; obstacles such as towers, including buildings over
200 AGL that are within the depicted synthetic terrain field of
view.
• Flight Path Marker (FPM); an indication of the current lateral
and vertical path of the aircraft. The FPM is always displayed
•
when synthetic terrain is selected for display.
Pathway; a pilot selectable three dimensional representation of
)
the programmed flight plan path that can be selected for display
alone or with the flight director anytime synthetic terrain is
selected for display.
• Traffic; a display on the PFD indicating the position of other
aircraft detected by the Traffic Information System (TIS)
component ofthe G1000 system.
)
• Horizon Line; a white line indicating the true horizon is always
displayed on the SVS display.
•
Horizon Heading; a pilot selectable display of heading marks
displayed just above the horizon line on the PFD.
Airport Signs; pilot selectable "signposts" displayed on the
)
synthetic terrain display indicating the position of nearby airports
that are in the G1000 database.

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 8of27
J
J
r)
' '
• Runway Highlight; a highlighted presentation of the location

and orientation of the runway(s) at the destination airport.
The synthetic terrain depiction displays an area approximating the view
from the pilot's eye position when looking direcUy ahead out the
windshield in front of the pilot. Terrain features outside this field of view
are not shown on the display.
The synthetic terrain display is intended to aid the pilot awareness of the
terrain and obstacles in front of the airplane. It may not provide either the
accuracy or fidelity, or both, on which to solely base decisions and plan
maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. The synthetic vision elements
are not intended to be used for primary aircraft control in place of the
( primary flight instruments.
The Pathway presentation is intended only to aid the pilofs awareness of
the programmed flight path location relative to the airplane's current
posHion. No vertical Pathway information is presented for climbs.
SECTION II
LIMITATIONS
1. Use of the Synthetic Vision system display elements alone

for aircraft control without reference to the G1000 primary
flight instruments or the aircraft standby Instruments Is
prohibHed.
2. Use of the Synthetic Vision system alone for navigation, or
obstacle or terrain avoidance is prohibHed.
3. Use of the SVS traffic display alone to avoid other aircraft is
prohibHed.

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page9of27

(,
SECTION Ill
No change. Refer to the basic aircraft flight manual or aircraft specific
flight manual supplements.
.)
)
--)

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 10of27
')
J
r AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
SECTION IVA
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Turn Synthetic Vision on/off
The SVS system may be turned on or off as desired. To tum the
synthetic vision system on or off;
On the PFD;
PFD key .................................................................................press
SYN VIS key ..........................................................................press
SYN TERR key .................................................... press as desired
( The synthetic vision system will cycle on or off with each press of the
SYN TERR key. The Flight Path Marker is displayed anytime
SYN TERR is selected for display.
Turn Pathways on/off
( On the PFD;
PFD key .................................................................................press
SYN VIS key ..........................................................................press
PATHWAY key .................................................... press as desired
The Pathway display will cycle on or off with each press of the
C. PATHWAY key. The Pathway can be displayed separately or in

conjunction with the flight director.

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 11 of 27

,
NOTE:
If displayed, the Pathway may be quickly turned off by
pressing the PFD softkey at the bottom of the PFD followed by
two presses of the far left PFD soft key.
Tum Horizon Heading on/off
)
OnthePFD;
PFD key ...•.........................•.•........•.•.....•..........•••...................press
SYN VIS key ........•.........•..•.......................................•............press
HRZN HOG key ..................•.........•...................... press as desired
The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with each press of
the HRZN HOG key.
)
Turn Airport Signs on/off
On the PFD;
PFD key ...••.........•...........................•.....................................•press
SYN VIS key ........•....................................................•...........•press )
APTSIGNS key ............................•........: .............• press as desired
The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with each press of
the APTSIGNS key.
_)

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 12of27
(J
Use of Pathway
If Synthetic Terrain is displayed on the PFD, the Pathway may be used
to assist the pilot's awareness of the programmed lateral and vertical
navigation path. The following sections describe the basic use of the
Pathway in various flight segments. For more detailed information,
consult the G1000 Pilafs Guide.
Departure
Prior to departure, load and activate the desired flight plan into the
G1000 FMS, set the initial altitude on the G1000 altilude selector and
(- select GPS on the HSI display just as you would without the SVS
system.
The programmed flight path will be displayed as a series of magenta
boxes along the path at the flight plan altitude subject to the following
conditions;
If the first segment of the flight plan is a heading to altitude leg,
( •
the Pathway will not be displayed for that segment. The first
Pathway segment displayed will be the first GPS course leg.
The Pathway must be within the SVS field of view of 30 degrees
left and 35 degrees right. If the programmed path is outside that
field of view, the Pathway will not be visible on the display until
the aircraft has turned toward the course.
( • The Pathway will be displayed at either the altitude selected on

the G1000 selector OR the altitude published for the procedure
(e.g. SID} WHICHEVER IS HIGHER.
After departure, the primary aircraft control must be by reference to the
primary aircraft instruments. The SVS and Pathway displays should be
used to aid in awareness of the terrain and programmed flight path.

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 13 of27
Prior to intercepting the programmed course, the Pathway will be

displayed as a series of magenta "boxes" with pointers at each comer
that point in the direction of the programmed course. The Pathway
boxes will not be displayed on portions of the course line that would lead
the pilot to intercept the course in the wrong direction.
As the aircraft approaches the center of the programmed course and
altitude, the number of Pathway boxes will decrease to a minimum of
four.
Enroute
When enroute, the Pathway will be displayed along the lateral path
defined by the flight plan, at the altitude selected on the G1000 altitude
selector.
Flight plan changes in altitude that require a climb will be indicated by the
)
Pathway being displayed as a level path at the altitude entered for the
current flight plan leg. Because the G1000 system does not have
information available to it about aircraft performance, climb profiles are
not displayed by the Pathway.
If the programmed flight plan includes one or more defined VNAV
descent segments, the descent path(s) will be displayed by the Pathway
)
as prompted by the G1000 FMS.
If the flight plan includes a significant change in course at a waypoint, the
Pathway boxes toward the currenUy active waypoint will be magenta in
color. The boxes defining the next flight plan segment may be visible,
but will be displayed in a white color. )

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 14 of27
)
(
....
llllllllll __ __.. ,____
--~'
@\l~-1 ~.. -1 r r II
llllilil<>
\ ____ _ -··
Enroute Pathway Altitude Display
Approach
During approach, the SVS and Pathway displays should only be used to
maintain awareness with regard to the surrounding terrain and the
programmed flight path. Primary aircraft control must be accomplished
( by reference to the primary flight instruments and, if desired, the flight
director.
GPS approach
During a GPS approach, the lateral path and altitude will be displayed by
the Pathway in magenta along each segment including the path required
( to track course reversals that are part of the approach procedure (such
as a holding pattern). Approach descent segments will be displayed by
the Pathway as published in the approach procedure.
If Vectors-To-Final is selected as the approach transition, the Pathway
will display the final approach course inbound to the Missed Approach
Point (MAP). The Pathway will be shown level at the altitude set in the

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 15 of 27
G1000 altitude selector, or the Final Approach Fix (FAF) crossing altitude
(whichever is higher), up to the point along the final approach course
where that altitude intercepts the extended VPTH or GP. If the altitude
selector indicates an altitude below the airplane's current altitude, the
Pathway will appear below the airplane altitude and the pilot must use
normal descent techniques to intercept the VPTH or GP. If the altitude
)
selector is left at an altitude above the current airplane altitude, the
airplane will intercept the final approach course below the extended
VPTH or GP, such that the Pathway will be displayed above the airplane
until the aircraft intercepts the VPTH or GP. From the VPTH or GP
intercept point, the pathway will be shown inbound to the MAP along the
published lateral and vertical descent path.
ILS approach
When an ILS approach is programmed into the G1000 FMS, the initial
)
approach segments will be displayed by the Pathway in magenta at the
procedure segment altitudes if they are being flown by reference to a
GPS path. When the G1000 system switches to the localizer inbound to
the final approach fix, the Pathway will be displayed along the localizer
inbound path and glideslope in green.
If Vectors-To-Final is selected as the approach transition, the Pathway
")
will display the final approach course inbound to the Missed Approach
Point (MAP). The Pathway will be shown level at the altitude set in the
G1000 altitude selector, or the Final Approach Fix (FAF) crossing altitude
(whichever is higher), up to the point along the final approach course
where that altitude intercepts the extended GS. If the altitude selector
indicates an altitude below the airplane's current altitude, the Pathway
)
will appear below the airplane altitude and the pilot must use normal
descent techniques to intercept the GS. If the altitude selector is left at
an altitude above the current airplane altitude, the airplane will intercept
the final approach course below the extended GS, such that the Pathway

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 16 of 27
)
will be displayed above the airplane until the aircraft intercepts the GS.
From the GS intercept point, the pathway will be shown inbound to the
MAP along the published localizer and glideslope.
VOR. LOC BC. or other approach
Approach segments for a VOR, LOC BC, ADF or other approach that are
approved to be flown by reference to GPS will be displayed by the
Pathway in a magenta color. Approach segments that are defined by
other than a GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR defined final
approach course, will not be displayed by the Pathway.
Missed approach
(- When the missed approach is selected on the G1000 FMS, the Pathway
to the Missed Approach Holding Point will be displayed just as described
for the departure segment.
The pilot must assure that the aircraft path will, at all times, comply with
the requirements of the published missed approach procedure.
If the initial missed approach leg is heading-to-altitude or a leg defined by
other than a GPS course, the Pathway will not be displayed for that
segment.
If the course to the Missed Approach Holding Point is out of the SVS field
of view during the initial missed approach climb, the Pathway will not be
visible on the PFD until the aircraft is turned toward the course.
The Pathway will be displayed at the published missed approach altitude
OR the altitude set on the G1000 aHitude selector WHICHEVER IS
HIGHER. If the G1000 altitude selector is set to MDA on the final
approach segment and not reset during the initial missed approach, the
Pathway will still be displayed at the published missed approach altitude.

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 17 of 27

'
~
,
{>1[[[[[[[[[[{>---""'------\ <>-~
')
---
,._,NCJJ~IIII"--!V
/
)
\\\
\\
\\\
\\\
' )
<>
Missed Approach Pathway Display

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 18 of 27
J
J
SECTIONIVB
ABNORMAL PROCEDURES
SVS Displays information inconsistent with G1 000 primarv flight
instrumentation.
On the PFD:
PFD key .................................................................................press
SYN VIS key ..........................................................................press
SYN TERR key ......................................................................press
( SVS is removed from the PFD ............................................. Verify

Use G1000 primary displays for navigation and aircraft control.
G1000 operation in display backup mode is required

Select display backup mode on the G1000 system.
( NOTE:
When display backup mode is selected, the MFD will initially
present a non-SVS (blue sky over solid brown ground) display.
SVS will be presented on the backup display within 20
seconds if it was enabled on the PFD when display backup
( was selected.

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 19of27
•
~ •
SECTIONV
PERFORMANCE
No change. Refer to the basic aircraft flight manual or aircraft specific
flight manual supplements. )
SECTION VI
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
No change. Refer to current weight and balance data for your aircraft.

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 20of27
')
SECTION VII
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
General
The SVS sub system is dependent upon terrain data provided by the
underlying G1000 system. If, for some reason , the terrain data is not
available from the G1000, all of the components of the SVS system will
be unavailable. The flight path marker, horizon heading, and airport
signs are all sub-components of the Synthetic Terrain display and are
only available when Synthetic Terrain is enabled . Those features are
selected or de-selected using the PFD softkeys on the SVS menu.

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 21 of 27
Synthetic Terrain
The synthetic (3D) terrain display on the PFD provides a perspective
view of the terrain ahead of the aircraft showing ground features up to 30
degrees left and 35 degrees right of the airplane heading. The terrain
display is derived from the same terrain data contained in the G1000
system that is optionally used to display terrain on the MFD map display.
The terrain data has a resolution of 9 arc-seconds, this means that the
terrain elevation contours in the database are stored broken down into
squares 9 arc-seconds on each side. That data is processed and
smoothed by the G1000 system to provide the synthetic terrain display.
In some instances, terrain features such as lakes in mountainous areas
may be presented by the SVS system as if the lake water extends
somewhat up the mountainside. This is due to the limitations of the
terrain database resolution but is not significant for the approved uses of
)
the SVS system.
The SVS terrain display will show land contours; large water features;
and, towers and other obstacles over 200 ft AGL (including buildings),
that are included in the G1000 obstacle database. In order to provide a
clean, uncluttered PFD display, cultural features on the ground such as;
roads and highways, railroad tracks, cities, and political boundaries
)
(state I county lines) are not displayed on the PFD even if those features
are selected for display on the MFD. The colors used to display the
terrain elevation contours are similar to those used on the MFD map.
The terrain display also includes a north-south, east-west grid to assist in
orientation relative to the terrain.
The terrain display is intended to serve as an awareness tool only. It may
not provide either the accuracy or fidelity, or both, on which to solely
)
base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles.
Navigation must not be predicated solely upon the use of the TAWS,
Terrain or Obstacle data displayed by the G1000 SVS system.

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 22of27
The Terrain/Obstacle/Airport databases·have an area of coverage as

detailed below:
• The Terrain Database has an area of coverage from North 75•
Latilude to South eo• Latitude in all longitudes.
• The Airport Terrain Database has an area of coverage that

includes the United States, Canada, Mexico, Latin America, and
South America.
• The Obstacle Database has an area of coverage that includes the

United States.
NOTE
( The area of coverage may be modified, as additional
terrain data sources become available.
Obstacle and Terrain Alerts and Warnings
Obstacles and terrain displayed on the SVS system may be highlighted if
an alert or warning is generated by the G1000 Terrain or TAWS system.
( If an obstacle alert is presented for an obstacle that is in the SVS field of
view, the obstacle symbol on the PFD will tum yellow in color. If an
obstacle warning is generated by the G1000 system, the obstacle
symbol on the PFD will tum red.
If the G1000 Terrain or TAWS system generates a terrain alert or
warning, the terrain feature displayed on the PFD will be colored yellow
( for an alert or red for a warning for as long as the alert remains valid.
Because the area monitored by the Terrain or TAWS system can be
wider than the field of view that can be displayed by the SVS system, it is
possible to receive an obstacle or terrain audible alert for an obstacle or
terrain that is not shown on the SVS display. In those cases, the object

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 23 of27
'
~.
generating the alert will be left or right of the aircraft. Refer to the other
displays in the aircraft to determine the cause of the message.
Flight Path Marker

)
The SVS display includes a green circular barbed symbol called the
Flight Path Marker (FPM) that represents the current path of the airplane
relative to the terrain display. The FPM is always displayed when
synthetic terrain is displayed and the aircraft ground speed exceeds
30 kt. The FPM indicates the current lateral and vertical path of the
airplane as determined by the GPS sensor. If the FPM is above the
horizon line, the airplane is climbing, and similarly if the FPM is below the
horizon line, the airplane is descending. If the airplane is flying in a
crosswind, the FPM will be offset from the center of the display. In that
)
case, the center of the PFD airplane reference symbol indicates the
airplane heading and the FPM indicates the direction that the airplane is
actually moving, taking into account the crosswind.
The FPM indicates the current path of the airplane but does not predict
the future path. If aircraft attitude, power setting, airspeed, crosswind,
etc. are changed, the FPM will move to indicate the new path resulting
from those changes.
If the FPM is below the terrain or obstacle displayed behind it on the
PFD, the current aircraft path will not clear that terrain or obstacle. If the
FPM is above that terrain or obstacle, the aircraft will clear the terrain or
obstacle IF, AND ONLY IF, THE CURRENT AIRCRAFT
CONFIGURATION IS MAINTAINED, AND THE AIRCRAFT
)
PERFORMANCE WILL PERMIT YOU TO MAINTAIN THE CURRENT
VERTICAL (CLIMB) GRADIENT UNTIL PAST THE TERRAIN OR
OBSTACLE.

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 24of27
:J
~ « •
Pathway
j ..
. .
. - -:::;;..--~~ ~ --
If PATHWAY is enabled on the SVS menu of the PFD and a defined

navigation path has been entered on the G1000, the SVS system will
display a pathway, sometimes called a "highway in the sky" or HITS.
The pathway is a perspective representation of the programmed flight
path. When the aircraft is well off course, the pathway will be displayed
as a number boxes floating in the sky along the programmed lateral and
vertical path. As the aircraft intercepts the programmed flight path, the
number of boxes displayed will be reduced to a maximum of four to avoid
cluttering the PFD display. The pathway is only displayed for navigation
paths that are fully defined by the sensor in use, including GPS and ILS
paths. Because a fully defined lateral and vertical path through space is
not defined by them , a Pathway is not displayed for heading legs, VOR,
LOC, BC or ADF segments. When the Pathway is displayed, the color of
the boxes indicates the sensor generating the path. If the GPS sensor is
in use, the boxes will be magenta colored . If the ILS sensor is defining
the path in use, the boxes will be green.
The Pathway boxes are+- 100ft in vertical dimension and approximately
+-380 ft horizontally from the center of the box. The Pathway
presentation is intended only to aid the pilot in awareness of the
programmed flight path location relative to the airplane's current position.
The pathway is not intended for use as a primary reference in tracking
the navigation path.
If a GPS based descent profile has been programmed either on the
G1000 flight plan page or as part of an approach or STAR, the descent
will be displayed by the Pathway. Climb paths are never displayed by

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 25 of 27
lhe Palhway. If a profile requires a climb, the Palhway will be displayed

as a level segmenl at the higher of the altitude defined by the
programmed path or the G1000 altitude selector.
Traffic
If traffic that is within the SVS field of view is detected by the G1000 TIS
system, a symbol will be displayed on the PFD indicating the direction
and relative altitude of the traffic. The traffic will be displayed as a white
diamond unless it generates a traffic alert. Traffic that causes an alert
will be displayed as a solid yellow circle accompanied by a yellow
TRAFFIC annunciator to the right of top of the airspeed display tape.
Horizon line
The SVS display includes an always visible white horizon line that
represents the true horizon. Terrain will be presented behind the
horizon line, and terrain shown above the horizon line is above the
current aircraft altitude. Terrain that is shown below the horizon line is
below the aircraft altitude .
Horizon Heading
•
A heading scale may be displayed on the PFD horizon line , if selected by
the pilot. The heading marks are spaced in even 30 degree increments
and are presented just above the horizon line with tic marks that intersect
the horizon line. The horizon heading will correspond to that presented

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 26 of 27
(
by the HSI. Because the horizon heading is only displayed in 30 degree

increments, it should only be used for general heading awareness and
not be used to establish the aircraft heading.
Airport Signs and runway highlight

If APTSIGNS is selected, a "sign post" along with a representation of the
runways will be plotted on the SVS display for nearby airports that are
contained in the G1000 airport database. The signpost will become
visible when you are within approximately 15nm of the airport. The text
identifier for the airport will be displayed inside the airport sign when the
aircraft reaches approximately 8 nm from the airport. Once the aircraft
reaches approximately 4.5 nm from the airport, the airport sign will be
removed but the runways presentation will remain . If an approach to a
specific runway has been loaded and activated, that runway will be
highlighted on the SVS display.
When on an approach , the highlight for the approach runway will be
considerably larger than "normal" to assist in visually acquiring the
runway. The oversized highlight will automatically shrink around the
runway depiction so that the runway is proportionally displayed when the
aircraft is within approximately Yz nm of the threshold. Runway
highlighting is displayed even if APTSIGNS are turned off.

190-00492-15 Rev 1 Page 27 of 27
Gannin Ltd. Or its subsidiaries
c!o Gannin International
1200 E. 151~ Street
Document No. 190-00492-10
FAA APPROVED
FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT

GARMIN G 1000 INTEGRA TED AVIONICS SYSTEM WITH
GFC 700 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROl.. SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40 F
Reg No S/N
( This Supplement must be attached to the FAA Approved Airplane Flight

Manual when the Gannin G I000 lnteb'Tated Avionics System and GFC 700
automatic flight control system are installed in accordance with STC
SA01444Wl-D. The infom1ation comained herein supplemenL• the infonnation
of the basic Airplane Flight Manual. For Limitations, Procedures and
Performance information not contained in this Supplement consult the basic
Airplane Flight Manual.
Note: This Airplane Flight Manual Supplement follows the format and content
of the Airplane Flight Manual for the Diamond DA 40 tor consistency and ease
of use.
Only the Limitations Section is FAA APPROVED.
······'
- .<'i:~;~~::~:~1.:?:::· . ::::~.·-·.·-~·;_:~,~:/·'··
Roben Murray
Lead DAS Administrator
Gannin International
DAS-240087 -CE
190-00492-10 Rev 2 Dian>ond DA 40 I DA 40F

Page I of60
1:.,0
0\0
-qo...,
<
oN
0
;;~
oqojO.,
<
0
"'08
-'<:;::
..s! .§
..1:) 0
::2
1:!
:;::
-~
:;::
~
.!:;
·~
~
2,
.~
~
N
~
0
.,~
g
~
~
Gannin Ltd. Or its subsidiaries
c/o Gannin International
1200 E. 151 51 Street

GARMIN G 1000 INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM WITH
GFC 700 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
LOG OF REVISIONS
Revision Page FAA Date of
Number Number(s) Descripdon Approved Approval
Robert
I All Initial Release 7126/2007
Murray
2 All Add Software Levels See Cover See Cover
190-00492-10 Rev 2 Diamond DA 40 IDA 40F

Page 3 of60
~~
< Q
o"""
-...fa
~&!
<
Q
"g
..lc!
Jj
..c::.
..e-
J
l-~
..~
.s
·i!"l
~
2.
·i!"l
~
"'
~
~
~
~
0
0
~
GARMIN G 1000 INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM WITH
GFC 700 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
Table of Contents
SECTION I
GENERAL .......................................................................................... 7
(Not FAA Approved)
SECTIONTI
LIMITATIONS ................................................................................. 12
(FAA Approved)
SECTION III
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ....................................................... 22
( (Not FAA Approved)
SECTIONNA
NORMAL PROCEDURES .............................................................. 36
(Not FAA Approved)
SECTIONIVB
ABNORMAL PROCEDURES ......................................................... 54
(Not FAA Approved)
SECTIONV
PERFORMANCE ............................................................................. 54
·(Not FAA Approved)
SECTION VI
WEIGHT AND BALANCE ............................................................. 54
(Not FAA Approved)
SECTION VII
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................. 55
(Not FAA Approved)

Page 5 of60
1<.0
0\0
'<!" .....
<0
o"'
-...!l'n
~~
<
Q
-g
0
-~Q
..!oo!
I:
..!:!
-
ooC)
..c-
!:1
~
I:
.s~
-~
~
t::s
1:).,
-~
e:;
"'>
~
e
...:.
"'00'<I"
0
~
GARMIN G 1000 INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
SECTION I
GENERAL
I. The G1 000 Integrated Avionics System is a fully integrated flight, engine,

communication, Qavigation and surveillance instrumentation system. The system
consists of a Primary Flight Display (PFD), Multi-Function Display (MFD), audio
panel, Air Data Computer (ADC), Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS),
engine sensors and processing unit (GEA), and integrated avionics (GIA) containing
VHF communications, VHF navigation, and GPS (Global Positioning System).
2. GIA 63 units are standard and provide non-WAAS GPS position information.
Optional GIA 63W units provide WAAS augmented GPS position.
3. The primary function of the PFD is to provide attitude, heading, air data, navigation,
and alerting information to the pilot. The PFD may also be used for flight planning.
The primary function of the MFD is to provide engine information, mapping, terrain
information, and for flight planning. The audio panel is used for selection of radios
for transmitting and listening, intercom functions, and marker beacon functions.
c 4. The primary function of the VHF Communication portion of the G!OOO is to enable
external radio communication. The primary function of the VORIILS Receiver
portion of the equipment is to receive and demodulate VOR, Localizer, and Glide
Slope signals. The primary function of the GPS portion of the system is to acquire
signals from the GPS system satellites (and WAAS satellites if so equipped), recover
orbital data, make range and Doppler measurements, and process this information in
real-time to obtain the user's position, velocity, and time.
5. If the optional GIA 63W W AAS GPS receivers are installed: Provided a GIA 63W
WAAS GPS receiver is receiving adequate usable signals, the G I 000 has been
demonstrated capable of and has been shown to meet the accuracy specifications for:
• VFRIIFR enroute, oceanic, terminal, non-precision instrument
approach (GPS, Loran-C, VOR, VOR-DME, TACAN, NDB, NDB-
DME, RNA V), and approach procedures with vertical guidance
(LNAVNNAV, LPV) operation within the U.S. National Airspace
System in accordance with AC 20-138A.
• Oceanic/Remote per FAA AC 20-138A Appendix I - Two FMSs are
required to be installed, operating and receiving usable signals from
independent GPS sensors (one GPS sensor for those routes requiring
only one Long Range Navigation (LRN) sensor). This does not
constitute operational approval.
• North Atlantic (NAT) Minimum Navigation Performance
Specifications (MNPS) Airspace as defined in AC 91-49 and AC 91-70
- Provided two FMSs are installed, operating and are receiving usable
signals from any two GPS navigation sensors (one GPS sensor for
those routes requiring only one Long Range Navigation (LRN)
sensor). The GPS sensor meets the requirements of FAA AC 20-138A
190-00492-10 Rev 2 Diamond DA 40 I DA 40F

Page7 of60
GARMIN G l 000 INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
Appendix l for primary navigation sensors. This does not constitute
operational approval.
• RNA V (GPS) Approaches - The G l 000 GPS meets the requirements
of AC 20-l38(A) for GPS based RNAV approaches. This includes
RNAV approaches labeled as RNAV (GPS}, provided GPS sensor data
is valid.
The systems meets RNP5 airspace (BRNAV) requirements of AC 90-
96 and in accordance with AC 20-l38A, JAA GAI-20 ACJ 20X4, and
FAA AC 20-138A Appendix I for oceanic and remote airspace
operations, provided it is receiving usable navigation information from
the GPS receiver.
6. If the standard GIA 63 NON-WAAS GPS receivers are installed: Provided a GIA 63
NON-W AAS GPS receiver is receiving adequate usable signals, it has been
demonstrated capable of and has been shown to meet the accuracy specifications for:
VFR/IFR enroute, oceanic, terminal, and non-precision instrument
approach (GPS, Loran-C, VOR, VOR-DME, TACAN, NOB, NDB-
DME, RNAV) operation within the U.S. National Airspace System in
accordance with AC 20-l38A.
Oceanic/Remote per FAA Notice 8110.60 - Two FMSs are required to
)
be installed, operating and receiving usable signals from independent
GPS sensors (one GPS sensor for those routes requiring only one Long
Range Navigation (LRN) sensor. This does not constitute operational
approval.
North Atlantic (NAT) Minimum Navigation Performance
Specifications (MNPS) Airspace as defined in AC 91-49 and AC 91-70
- Provided two FMSs are installed, operating and are receiving usable
signals from any two GPS navigation sensors (one GPS sensor for
those routes requiring only one Long Range Navigation (LRN) sensor).
The GPS sensor meets the requirements of FAA Notice 8110.60 for
primary navigation sensors. This does not constitute operational
approval.
• RNAV (GPS) Approaches- The 01000 GPS meets the requirements
of AC 20-138(A) for GPS based RNAV approaches. This includes
RNAV approaches labeled as RNA V (GPS), provided GPS sensor data
is valid.
• The system meets RNP5 airspace (BRNAV) requirements of AC 90-96
and in accordance with AC 20-l38A, JAA GAI-20 ACJ 20X4, and
FAA Order 8110.60 for oceanic and remote airspace operations,
provided it is receiving usable navigation information from the GPS
receiver.

Page 8 of60
r FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
GARMIN G IOOO INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
Navigation is accomplished using the WGS-84 (NAD-83) coordinate reference datum.
GPS navigation data is based upon use of only the GPS operated by the United States of
America.
7. If the optional TAWS function is installed in the Gl 000, the pilot will receive
appropriate aural warnings and cautions for terrain and obstacles. The pilot should
refer to the DA 40/DA 40F Pilot's Guide for the terrain warning and caution
messages and system information.
GFC700
I. The GFC 700 Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) is a 2 axis autopilot and
flight director system which provides the pilot with the following features: Altitude
Preselect and Altitude Hold (ALT); Flight Level Change with Airspeed Hold (FLC);
Vertical Speed Hold (VS); Vertical Navigation (VPTH) (optional feature);
Navigation tracking for VOR (NAV) and GPS (GPS); Heading Hold (HOG);
Approach mode coupling to VOR (VAPP) or localizer (LOC) and glideslope (OS);
Glidepath coupling (GP) (GIA 63W equipped aircraft only); Back Course (BC)
tracking; and Go Around (GA) pitch/roll guidance. The system consists ofautopilot
controls on the Multi-Function Display (MFD), servos with autopilot processing
c logic, Flight Director processing logic in the GIAs, a control stick-mounted elevator
trim switch, a control stick-mounted trim interrupt and autopilot disconnect switch, a
control stick-mounted CWS (Control Wheel Steering) switch, a throttle-mounted
GA (Go-Around) switch, and PFDIMFD-mounted altitude preselect, heading, and
course knobs.
2. The GFC 700 autopilot contains an electric pitch trim system which is used by the
autopilot for automatic pitch trim during autopilot operation and by the pilot for
manual electric pitch trim when the autopilot is not engaged. The manual electric
pitch trim system is operated by a split switch on the pilot's control stick.
3. The GFC 700 autopilot and manual electric trim (MET) will not operate until the
system has satisfactorily completed a preflight test. The preflight test begins
automatically with initial power application to the autopilot (AVIONIC MASTER
Switch is set to the ON position).
4. The following conditions will cause the autopilot to automatically disconnect:
• Electrical power failure
• Internal autopilot system failure
• AHRS malfunction
• Loss of Air Data Computer information
5. The GFC 700 may be manually disconnected by any of the following means:
• Depressing the red AP DISC button on the pilot's control stick
• Moving the left (outboard) side of the manual electric trim switch on the pilot's
control stick

Page 9 of60
GARMIN G I 000 INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
Pushing the AP button on the autopilot mode controller when the autopilot is
engaged
Depressing the GA button on the left side of the throttle
Pulling the AFCS circuit breaker
• Turning off the AVIONIC MASTER switch
• Turning off the airplane Master ( ALT/BAT) switch
In addition, the CWS (control wheel steering) switch on the pilot's control stick will
disconnect the autopilot servos from the airplane flight controls as long as the CWS
switch is depressed.
6. Power to the GFC 700 autopilot and electric trim system is supplied through the
AVIONIC MASTER switch and the AFCS circuit breaker. The AVIONIC
MASTER switch can be used as an additional means to disable the autopilot and
7.
electric trim system.
The red AP DISC switch on the pilot's control stick will interrupt power to the
manual electric trim for as long as the switch is depressed.
)
8. Loss of instruments or components of the G 1000 system will affect the GFC 700
AFCS as follows:
Loss of the AHRS will cause the autopilot to disconnect. The autopilot and
flight director will be inoperative. Manual electric trim will be available.
Loss of the heading function of the AHRS will result in loss of the HOG mode.
If in HOG mode at the time heading is lost, the autopilot will revert to basic roll
mode(ROL).
• Loss of the MFD will not cause the autopilot to disconnect, and will remain
engaged with limited functionality, but the autopilot cannot be re-engaged after
disconnect by the pilot.
Loss of the PFD will cause the autopilot to disconnect. The autopilot and flight
director will be inoperative. Manual electric trim will be available.
Loss of air data computer information will cause the autopilot to disconnect.
The autopilot will be inoperative. The flight director will be available except
for air data modes (ALT, VS, FLC). Manual electric trim is available.
Loss of GIA #I will cause the autopilot to disconnect. The autopilot, flight
director and manual electric trim will be inoperative. Loss of GIA #2 will also
prevent autopilot and manual electric trim operation, but flight director will be
available.
Loss of the standby airspeed indicator, standby attitude indicator, standby
altimeter, or compass will have no effect on the autopilot.
190-00492-I 0 Rev 2 Diamond DA 40 I DA 40F

Page 10 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
• Loss of both GPS systems will cause the autopilot and flight director to operate
in NAY modes (LOC, BC, VOR, VAPP) with reduced accuracy. Course
intercept and station crossing performance may be improved by executing
intercepts and station crossings in HDG mode, then reselecting NAY mode.
WARNING
FOLLOWING AN AUTOPILOT OR ELECTRIC TRIM MALFUNCTION, DO

NOT RE-ENGAGE THE AUTOPILOT OR MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM, OR
RESET THE AFCS CIRCUIT BREAKER, UNTIL THE CAUSE OF THE
MALFUNCTION HAS BEEN DETERMINED AND CORRECTED.
(~
L
190-00492-1 0 Rev 2 Diamond DA 40 IDA 40F
Page llof60
GARMIN G l 000 INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
SECTION II
LIMITATIONS
2.1 INTRODUCTION
General Limitations:
l. The Garmin G 1000 Cockpit Reference Guide (CRG) must be immediately available
to the flight crew. The required CRG is referenced to the System Software Version
number. The System Software Version number is displayed at the top right side of
the MFD Power-up page.
System Software Garmin GlOOO Cockpit Reference Guide (CRG)
Version revision
PIN 190-00324-07, Revision A, or later appropriate
0369.13
revision.
)
-
2. The G l 000 installation in the DA 40 requires the following or later FAA approved
LRU software versions. Approved LRU software versions are referenced to the
System Software Version number.
LRU Software Version
LRU 0369.i3 0369.13
WAAS Non-WAAS
COM I &2 7.00 7.00
GDCI 2.05 2.05
GEAI 2.07 2.07
GIA I &2 5.31 5.31
GMAI 3.03 3.03
GMUI 2.01 2.01
GPS I &2 2.40 3.03
GRS I 2.10 2.10
GS I &2 3.00 3.00
GTXI 4.06 4.06
MFDI 8.02 8.02
NAY I &2
PFDI
GDL
4.00
8.02
3.i0
4.00
8.02
3.10
(_J
GSA 2.06 2.06

FAA APPROVED Page l2of60
GARMIN 01000 INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
The system's databases and System Software Version number are displayed on the
MFD Power-up page immediately after system power-up and must be
acknowledged. The LRU software versions can be verified on the AUX group sub-
page 5, "AUX- SYSTEM STATUS" along with the system's databases.
3. IFR enroute, oceanic and terminal navigation predicated upon the 01000 GPS
Receiver is prohibited unless the pilot verifies the currency of the database or
verifies each selected waypoint for accuracy by reference to current approved data.
4. GIA 63W IFR operational limitation. The following limitation applies ONLY to the
optional GIA 63W WAAS GPS receivers.
This system does not comply with US 14 CFR Part 91, SFAR 97 requirements for
TSO-CI45atrSO-CI46a equipment. Until complete compliance is demonstrated
and approved by the FAA, authorization to conduct any GPS or W AAS operation
under Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) requires that:
A. Aircraft using the GPS or WAAS capability of the GIA 63W navigation
equipment under IFR must be equipped with an approved and operational
alternate means of navigation appropriate to the flight with the exception of
oceanic and remote operations.
( B. For flight planning purposes, if an alternate airport is required, it must have an

approved instrument approach procedure other than GPS or RNAV that is
anticipated to be operational and available at the estimated time of arrival. All
equipment required for this procedure must be installed and operational.
C. For flight planning purposes, Garmin Prediction Program 006-AOI54-0I with
the 013-00235-00 antenna selection should be used to conf11111 the availability of
RAIM for the intended flight in accordance with the local aviation authority
guidelines for TSO-C 129a equipment. WAAS NOTAMs (or their absence) and
generic prediction tools do not provide an acceptable indication of the
availability for the GIA 63W equipment.
D. When flight planning an LNAVNNAV or LPV approach, operators should use
the Garmin Prediction Program 006-AOI54-0l with the 013-00235-00 antenna
selection in addition to any NOTAMs issued for the approach.
5. Instrument approach navigation predicated upon the GIOOO GPS Receiver must be
accomplished in accordance with approved instrument approach procedures that are
retrieved from the GPS equipment database. The GPS equipment database must
incorporate the current update cycle.
NOTE
Not all published approaches are in the FMS database. The pilot must ensure that the
planned approach is in the database.
(a) Instrument approaches utilizing the GPS receiver must be conducted in the
approach mode (LNAV, LNAV+V, LNNAV, or LPV), and GPSIWAAS
integrity monitoring must be available at the Final Approach Fix. If there is not
sufficient GPSIWAAS integrity at any time after crossing the Final Approach

FAA APPROVED Page 13 of60
GARMIN GIOOO INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
Fix, a Loss Oflntegrity (LOI) will be annunciated on the HSI and the approach
mode will be aborted.
(b) Accomplishment of!LS, LOC, LOC-BC, LDA, SDF, MLS or any other type of
approach not approved for GPS overlay with the G 1000 GPS receiver is not
authorized.
(c) Use of the GIOOO VOR/ILS receiver to fly approaches not approved for GPS
requires VORIILS navigation data to be present on the display.
(d) IFR non-precision approach approval is limited to published approaches within
the U.S. National Airspace System. Approaches to airports in other airspace are
not approved unless authorized by the appropriate governing authority.
(e) RNAV (GPS) approaches must be conducted utilizing the GPS sensor.
(f) When conducting missed approach procedures, autopilot coupled operation is
prohibited until the pilot has established a rate of climb that ensures all altitude
requirements of the procedure will be met.
(g) RNP RNA V operations are not authorized, except as noted in items 5 and 6 of
Section I of this AFMS.
5. If not previously defined, the following default settings must be made in the
"SYSTEM SETUP" menu of the G I 000 prior to operation (refer to Pilot's Guide for
procedure if necessary):
)
(a) DIS, SPD ........... N. ~(sets navigation units to "nautical miles" and "knots")
(b) ALT, VS .......... ..ft fpm (sets altitude units to "feet" and "feet per minute")
(c) MAP DATUM .. WGS 84 (sets map datum to WGS-84, see note below)
(d) POSITION ......... deg-min (sets navigation grid units to degree-minutes)
NOTE
In some areas outside the United States, datums other than WGS-84 or NAD-83 may
be used. If the Gl 000 is authorized for use by the appropriate Airworthiness
authority, the required geodetic datum must be set in the G I 000 prior to its use for
navigation.
6. Operation is prohibited north of 70°N and south of 70°S latitudes. In addition,
operation is prohibited in the following two regions: I) north of 65°N between 75°W
and I20°W longitude and 2) south of 55°S between 120°E and 165°E longitude.
7. The fuel quantity, fuel required, and fuel remaining functions of the FMS are
supplemental information only and must be verified by the flight crew.
8. Navigation must not be predicated upon the use of the TAWS, Terrain or Obstacle
J
data displayed by the G I 000.
9. TAWS must be inhibited prior to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) when conducting an
instrument approach that terminates in a circling to land or side step maneuver.

DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
NOTE: The terrain display Is Intended to serve as a situational awareness

tool only. It may not provide either the accuracy or fidelity, or both, on
which to solely base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or
obstacles.
I 0. Pilots are authorized to deviate from their ATC clearance to the extent necessary to
comply with terrain I obstacle warnings from TAWS.
II. The Terrain/Obstacle/Airport databases have an area of coverage as detailed below:
(a) The Terrain Database has an area of coverage from North 75° Latitude to South
60° Latitude in all longitudes.
(b) The Airport Terrain Database has an area of coverage that includes the United
States, Canada, Mexico, Latin America, and South America.
(c) The Obstacle Database has an area of coverage that includes the United States.
NOTE: The area of coverage may be modified, as additional terrain data sources
become available.
12. To avoid giving unwanted alerts, TAWS must be inhibited when landing at an
airport that is not included in the airport database.
13. The ADF aural identifier must be monitored any time the ADF is used as the primary
source of navigation.
14. If the optional ChartView or FliteChart function is installed, the data is limited to
supplemental use only. Current paper copies of navigation charts and data
appropriate to the intended operation must be available to the pilot.

DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
15. If the optional ChartView function is instaiJed:
At airport locations outside the United States, within ±1.5° either side of zero
degrees latitude or longitude, the aircraft symbol will be either missing or incorrectly
positioned on terminal charts to include airport diagrams and approach procedures.
Disregard the presentation of position information on all terminal charts for airports
within ±1.5° either side of zero degrees latitude or longitude.
The list of affected airports below is subject to change by Jeppesen. This list is
accurate as of 30 MARCH 2007. All airports within ±1.5° either side of zero
degrees latitude or longitude will be affected.
Equatorial Region (zero degrees latitude):
ANYN, FOGR, FOOG, FZEA, FZGN, HKKI, HUEN, SBMD, SBMQ, SBUA,
SECO, SEGS, SEll, SELT, SEMT, SENL, SEQU, SEST, SESV, SETR, SKAC,
VRMG, WIPT, WIOO
Prime Meridian Region (zero degrees longitude):
DAOO, DAOV, DAUA, DAUT, DGAA, DGLE, EGCN, EGDM, EGGW, EGHI,
EGKA, EGKB, EGKK, EGLC, EGLF, EGLK, EGLL, EGNJ, EGNV, EGNX,
EGPB, EGPM, EGSC, EGSS, EGTC, EGTF, EGTK, EGUB, EGUL, EGVN,
EGVO, EGWU, EGXC, EGXE, EGXU, EGXW, EGYD, GAGO, LEAL, LELC,
LEVC, LEZG, LFBC, LFBD, LFBG, LFBH, LFBM, LFBN, LFBP, LFBT, LFBZ,
LFCY, LFDN, LFJR, LFOD, LFOH, LFOT, LFOU, LFOV, LFRG, LFRI, LFRK,
)
LFRM,LFRN
GFC 700 LIMITATIONS

I. The GFC 700 AFCS preflight test must be successfully completed prior to use of the
autopilot, flight director or manual electric trim. Use of the autopilot or manual
electric trim system is prohibited if the preflight test is not satisfactorily completed.
2. A pilot with the seat belt fastened must occupy the left pilot's seat during aiJ
autopilot operations.
3. The autopilot must be off during takeoff and landing.
4. Autopilot maximum engagement speed- 165 KIAS

Autopilot minimum engagement speed- 70 KIAS
Electric Trim maximum operating speed- 178 KIAS

FAA APPROVED Page 16of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
5. Maximum fuel imbalance with autopilot engaged- 8 US gallons (Long range tank
configuration)
- I 0 US gallons (Standard tank
configuration)
6. The autopilot must be disengaged below 200 feet AGL during approach operations
and below 800 feet AGL during all other operations.
1. ILS approaches using the GFC 700 autopilot/flight director are limited to Category I
approaches only.
2 3 AIRSPEED MARKINGS
Marldne: lAS Sie:nlficanee

Low speed awareness - stall is
Red band 20 KIAS - 53 KIAS
imminent
Low speed awareness - reduced
Yellow band 53 KIAS - 58 KIAS
airspeed margin to stall
Operating range with flaps fully
White band 58 KIAS- 91 KIAS
( Green band
Yellow band
58 KIAS- 129 KIAS
129 KIAS - 178 KIAS
extended
Normal operating ranj!e
Caution range - smooth air only
Lower limit of 178 KIAS is the
Red band 178 KIAS and greater
maximum speed for all operations
The airspeed indicator is marked in lAS values.

DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
2.S ENGINE INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
Engine instrument markings and their color code significance are shown in the table
below.
NOTE
When an indication lies in the upper or lower prohibited range, the legend for that
display will change to the color of the prohibited range and will begin flashing as
well.
Red arc Yellow Green arc Red arc or
or bar arc or or bar Yellow bar
= bar = arc or bar =
Lower = Normal = Upper
prohibite Caution operating Caution prohibited
Indication d range range range range range
Manifold
Pressure ..
In.-Hg -- 13-30 - --
*Note 2*
RPM
Oil Temp
-- -- 500-
2700 -- >2700
*Note 3* )
·F -- -- 149-230 231-245 >245
Cylinder Head
476-
Temp -- -- 150-475
500
>500
·F
Fuel Press PSI
(DA 40) 0-14 -- 14-35 -- >35
*Note4*
Oil Press
0-25 25-55 56-95 96-97 >97
PSI
Fuel flow
Gallhr -- -- 1-20 - >20
Voltage
0-24.1 24.1-25 25.1-30 30.1-32 >32
Volts
Amperage
Am_llS
-- -- 2-75 - --
Fuel quantity
US gal
Standard
0 -- <0-17 -- --
Tanks
Fuel quantity
US gal <0-16
Long Range
0 -- 19-24
-- --
Tanks
I 90-00492-10 Rev 2 Diamond DA 40 I DA 40F

DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
Note 2: Not applicable to DA 40 F. Manifold Pressure gauge is not installed in the DA
40F.
Note 3: To prevent nuisance alerts during normal takeoffs, the legend "RPM" and digits
will not tum red or flash until the RPM exceeds 2780.
Note 4: Fuel Pressure· Gauge is optional for DA 40 aircraft.
2.6 WARNING. CAUTION AND STATUS MESSAGES

The following tables show the color and significance of the warning, caution, and
advisory messages which may appear on the G I 000 displays.
NOTE
The 01000 Cockpit Reference Guide and the 01000 Pilot's Guide contain detailed
descriptions of the annunciator system and all warnings, cautions and advisories.
(
.
.
Annunciation
OILPRESLO
FUELPRESLO(DA400ru~
Warning annunciations- Red
Cause
Oil pressure is less than 25 osi
Fuel pressure is less than 14 osi
FUEL PRES HI (DA40 Only) Fuel pressure is greater than 35 osi
ALTERNATOR Alternator failure
Operation of the starter without the key in
the start position, or failure of the starter
STARTER ENGD
motor to disengage from the engine after
starting
Front canopy and/or rear door not
DOOR OPEN
completely closed and locked
Caution annunciations- Yellow
Annunciation Cause
PITOTOFF Pilot heat is not switched on
PITOTFAIL Fault in the pitot heating system
Fuel quantity in the left tank is less than 3
LFUELLOW
US l!al (+I US J!al)
Fuel quantity in the right tank is less than 3
RFUELLOW
US l!al (:1-1 US J!al)
.
LOW VOLTS On-board voltal!e below 24 volts
Advisory annunciations- White

Annunciation Cause
~
'
PFDFANFAIL The cooling fan for the PFD is inoperative.
MFDFANFAIL The coolin!! fan for the MFD is inooerative.
GIAFANFAIL The coolin!! fan for the GIA is inooerative.

GARMIN G I 000 INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM ··~
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40

Minimum operational equipment (serviceable)
Number VFR VFR

Equipment installed Day Night IFR
Primary Flight Display I I I I
Multi-Function Display I I I I
Audio panel I I I I
Air data computer I I I I
Attitude and Heading Reference
System
I - I I
Static dischargers 7 - - 7
GPS 2 - I 2
2.14FUEL
Fuel Quantity: Total fuel quantity:

)
Standard Tanks: 2 x 20.6 US gal (approx. I 56 liters)
Long Range Tanks: 2 x 25.5 US gal (approx. 193 liters)
Unusable fuel: 2 x 0.5 US gal (approx. 3.8liters)
Max. Indicated Fuel Quantity:

Standard Tanks: 17 US gal per tank
Long Range Tanks: 24.0 US gal per tank

between right and left tank:
Standard Tanks: I 0 US gal (approx. 38 liters)
Long Range Tanks: 8 US gal (approx. 30.3 liters)
J
r, FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
2.1 S Limitation Placard
Below the MFD, next to the fuel quantity indication:
Standard Tanks
Fuel qty. Indication: max 17 US gal

Max. difference LHIRH tank: I 0 US gal
Long Range Tanks

Refer to AFM to use entire tank capacity
Max. difference LHIRH tank: 8 US gal
L
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
SECTIONUI
GENERAL
I. If Garmin G I 000 GPS navigation information is not available or invalid,
utilize remaining operational navigation equipment as required.
2. If the G1 000 system reverts to Dead Reckoning mode (indicated by DR
displayed on the HSI), the moving map will continue to be displayed.
Aircraft position will be based upon the last valid GPS position and
estimated by Dead Reckoning methods. Changes in winds aloft can affect
the estimated position substantially. Dead Reckoning is only available in
Oceanic and Enroute modes; Terminal and Approach modes do not support
DR.
3. If Garmin G I 000 GPS navigation information is not available or invalid
and the TAWS option is installed, TAWS will not be available. A white
'TAWS N/A' or red 'TAWS FAIL' annunciator will be displayed on the
PFD (left of selected altitude) or on the MFD TAWS page (lower right
hand comer).
4. If the "GPS NAV LOST" annunciation is displayed the system will flag and
no longer provide GPS based navigational guidance. The crew should
revert to the G I 000 VORIILS receivers or an alternate means of navigation
other than the G I 000 GPS receivers.
5. If the "LOI" (Loss of Integrity) annunciation is displayed in the enroute,
oceanic, or terminal phase of flight, continue to navigate using the GPS
equipment or revert to an alternate means of navigation other than the
G I 000 GPS receiver appropriate to the route and phase of flight. When
continuing to use GPS navigation, position must be verified every 15
minutes using the GIOOO VORIILS receiver or another IFR-approved
navigation system.
6. If the "ABORT APR" or "GPS NAV LOST' annunciation is displayed
while on an approach segment, the pilot shall initiate the missed approach.
7. Aircraft equipped with GIA 63W WAAS GPS receivers. only: If the "APR
DWNGRADE" annunciation is displayed, the pilot shall use LNA V
minima.
8. Aircraft equipped with GIA 63 non-W AAS GPS receivers only: If the
"RAIM UNAVAIL" annunciation is displayed while on an approach
segment, the approach will become inactive and the pilot shall initiate the
missed approach. Missed approach course guidance may still be available
with I nautical mile CD! sensitivity.
9. In an in-flight emergency, depressing and holding the Com transfer button
for 2 seconds will tune the emergency frequency of 121.500 MHz. If the
display is available, it will also show it in the "Active" frequency window.

Page 22 of60
r
~ '
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
I 0. If the white 'TAWS N/A' status annunciator is displayed on the PFD or

MFD TAWS page, the system will no longer provide TAWS alerting or
display relative terrain elevations. The crew must maintain compliance
with procedures that ensure minimum terrain separation.
II. If the red 'TAWS FAIL' status annunciator is displayed on the PFD or
MFD TAWS page, the system will no longer provide TAWS alerting or
display relative terrain elevations. The crew must maintain compliance
with procedures that ensure minimum terrain separation.
12. The following warnings and cautions appear in various locations on the
PFDorMFD.
Annunciation Cause
AHRS Aligning - Keep Attitude and Heading Reference System is aligning.
Wings Level Keep wings level using standby attitude indicator.
ATTITUDE FAIL Display system is not receiving attitude reference
information from the AHRS; accompanied by the
removal of sky/ground presentation and a red X over
the attitude area.
( AIRSPEED FAIL Display system is not receiving airspeed input from
the air data computer; accompanied by a red X
through the airspeed displav.
ALTITUDE FAIL Display system is not receiving altitude input from the
air data computer; accompanied by a red X through
the altimeter display.
VERT SPEED FAIL Display system is not receiving vertical speed input
from the air data computer; accompanied by a red X
through the vertical speed display.
HOG Display system is not receiving valid heading input
from the AHRS; accompanied by a red X through the
digital heading display.
Red X A red X through any display field, such as com
frequencies, nav frequencies, or engine data, indicates
that display field is not receiving valid data.
LOI GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of
flight.
L
190-00492-1 0 Rev 2 Diamond DA 40 I DA 40F
Page 23 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
GFC 700 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

Some emergency situations require immediate memorized corrective action.
These numbered steps are printed in boxes within the emergency procedures
and should be accomplished without the aid of the checklist.
AUTOPILOT OR ELECTRIC TRIM MALFUNCTION/FAILURE
NOTE
An autopilot or electric trim malfunction may be recognized by an

unexpected deviation from the desired flight path, abnormal flight control
or trim wheel movement, or flight director commands which cause
unexpected or contradictory information on the other cockpit displays. It
may be accompanied by the aural autopilot disconnect tone, a red AFCS,
red AP or yellow AP indication on the PFD, or a yellow CHECK
ATTITUDE on the PFD. The autopilot and AHRS monitors normally
detect failures and automatically disconnect the autopilot.
Failure of the electric pitch trim, indicated by a red boxed PTRM

indication on the PFD, may not cause the autopilot to disconnect. Be alert
to possible autopilot out of trim conditions (see AUTOPILOT OUT OF
)
TRIM procedure below), and expect residual ctmtrol forces upon
disconnect. The autopilot will not re-engage after disconnect with failed
pitch trim. If AUTOPILOT OUT OF TRIM ELE indication is present,
expect substantial elevator forces on autopilot disconnect.
I. AP DISC Switch ............................................................... DEPRESS AND HOLD

while grasping control stick fmnly
2. Aircraft Attitude ......................... MAINTAINIREGAIN AIRCRAFT CONTROL,
use standby attitude indicator if necessary
3. Pitch Trim .......................................... RET RIM if necessary, using the trim wheel
4. AP Circuit Breaker........................................................................................ PULL
5. AP DISC Switch .................................................................................... RELEASE
WARNING
FOLLOWING AN AUTOPILOT, AUTOTRIM OR MANUAL

ELECTRIC TRIM SYSTEM MALFUNCTION, DO NOT ENGAGE
THE AUTOPILOT OR OPERATE THE MANUAL ELECTRIC
TRIM UNTIL THE CAUSE OF THE MALFUNCTION HAS BEEN
CORRECTED.

Page 24 of60
r '· FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT <Yellow AP flashing on PFDl
I. AP DISC Switch ........................................................ DEPRESS AND RELEASE

(to cancel disconnect tone)
2. Pitch Trim .......................................... RETRIM if necessary, using the trim wheel
NOTE
The autopilot disconnect may be accompanied by a red boxed PTCH

(pitch) or ROLL on the PFD, indicating the axis which has failed. The
autopilot cannot be re-engaged with either of these annunciations present.
AUTOPILOT OVERSPEED RECOVERY <Yellow MAXSPD on PFDl
I. Throttle ..................................................................................................... REDUCE
c When overspeed condition is corrected:
2. Autopilot ...................................... RES ELECT VERTICAL MODE (if necessary)
NOTE
Overspeed recovery mode provides a pitch up command to decelerate the

airplane at or below the maximum autopilot operating speed (165 KIAS).
Overspeed recovery is not active in altitude hold (ALT) or glideslope
(GS)modes.
LOSS OF NAVIGATION INFORMATION <Yellow VOR, VAPP. GPS or

LOC Dashing on PFDl
NOTE
If a navigation signal is lost while the autopilot is tracking it, the autopilot
will roll the aircraft wings level and default to roll mode (ROL).
I. Autopilot. ......................................................... SELECT HOG on mode controller

2. Nav Source.................................................... SELECT A VALID NAY SOURCE
3. Autopilot .......................................................... SELECT NAY on mode controller
If on an instrument approach at the time the navigation signal is lost:
4. Missed Approach Procedure ........................................ EXECUTE (as applicable)

Page 25 of60
GARMIN G I000 INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
AUTOPILOT OUT OF TRIM <YeUow +-AIL. AIL-+. tELE. or .J..ELE on

PFDl
For tELE, or iELE Indication:
WARNING
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OVERPOWER THE AUTOPILOT IN THE

EVENT OF A PITCH MISTRIM. THE AUTOPILOT SERVOS
WILL OPPOSE PILOT INPUT AND WILL CAUSE PITCH TRIM
TO RUN OPPOSITE THE DIRECTION OF PILOT INPUT. THIS
WILL LEAD TO A SIGNIFICANT OUT-OF-TRIM CONDITION
RESULTING IN LARGE CONTROL STICK FORCE WHEN
DISENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT.
CAUTION
Be prepared for significant sustained control forces in the direction of the

annunciation arrow. For example, an arrow pointing down indicates nose
down control stick force will be required upon autopilot disconnect.
)
NOTE
Momentary illumination (5 sec or less) of the tELE or iELE indication

during configuration or large airspeed changes is normal.
If the annunciation remains:

I. AP DISC Switch............................................................... DEPRESS AND HOLD
while grasping control stick firmly
2. Aircraft Attitude ........................ MAINTAIN/REGAIN AIRCRAFT CONTROL,

4. AFCS Circuit Breaker ................................................................................... PULL
5. AP DISC switch ..................................................................................... RELEASE
WARNING
FOLLOWING AN AUTOPILOT, AUTOTRIM OR MANUAL

ELECTRIC TRIM SYSTEM MALFUNCTION, DO NOT ENGAGE
J
THE AUTOPILOT OR OPERATE THE MANUAL ELECTRIC
TRIM UNTIL THE CAUSE OF THE MALFUNCTION HAS BEEN
CORRECTED.

Page 26 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
For f-AIL, AIL-+ Indication:
I. Rudder Trim ......................................... VERIFY slip/skid indicator is centered
NOTE
Observe the maximum fuel imbalance limitation.
If annunciation remains:
2. Control Stick .............................................. GRASP FIRMLY with both hands
CAUTION
Be prepared for sustained control forces in the direction of the

annunciation arrow. For example, an arrow pointing to the right indicates
that sustained right wing down control stick force will be required upon
autopilot disconnect.
( 3. AP DISC Switch ................................................................................ DEPRESS

4. Autopilot ......................................... RE-ENGAGE if lateral trim re-established
FLASHING YELLOW MODE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE
Abnormal mode transitions (those not initiated by the pilot or by normal

sequencing of the autopilot) will be annunciated by flashing the
disengaged mode in yellow on the PFD. Upon loss of a selected mode,
the system will revert to the default mode for the affected axis, either
ROL or PIT. After I 0 seconds, the new mode (PIT or ROL) will be
annunciated in green.
Loss of selected vertical mode (FLC, VS, AL T, GS, VPTH, GP)

I. Autopilot mode controls ................ SELECT ANOTHER VERTICAL MODE
If on an instrument approach:
2. Autopilot ............................................. DISCONNECT and continue manually,
or execute missed approach
Loss of selected lateral mode (HOG, NAV, GPS, LOC, VAPP, BC):
I. Autopilot mode controls .................. SELECT ANOTHER LATERAL MODE
L If on an instrument approach:
2. Autopilot ............................................. DISCONNECT and continue manually,

Page 27 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
FAILURE OF THE PREFLIGHT TEST (Red boxed PFT on PFDl
I. AFCS Circuit Breaker ......................................................................... PULL
WARNING
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ENGAGE THE AUTOPILOT OR

OPERATE THE MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM UNTIL THE
CAUSE OF THE MALFUNCTION HAS BEEN CORRECTED.
NOTE
When the AFCS circuit breaker is pulled, the PFT FAIL annunciation will be
removed and the autopilot and manual electric trim will be unavailable. Do not
reset the circuit breaker unless the airplane is on the ground.
MAXIMUM ALTITUDE LOSS DUE TO AUTOPILOT. FLIGHT
DIRECTOR OR AHRS MALFUNCTIONS: )
MANEUVER ALTITUDE LOSS
Climb, Cruise, Descent 200 feet
Maneuvering 115 feet
Approach 130 feet
(h) High Fuel Flow- (DA 40 only)
Fuel flow in red sector

I. Fuel pressure ................................. check for red FUEL PRESS LO message
• If fuel pressure is low (FUEL PRESS LO message), there is possibly a
leak (between the injection system and the injectors). Land at the
nearest available airpo~.
• If there is no FUEL PRESS LO message, there is no leak; the likely
cause is a defective fuel flow indication, which should thus be ignored
(the airplane should be serviced). Fuel flow data should be taken from
the engine performance table in Chapter 5 of the AFM.
(g) High Fuel Flow- (DA 40 F only)

Page28 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
I. Fuel Quantity .................................................................. Check and Monitor

2. Power Setting ...................................................................................... Check
Land as soon as practical. Consider the reduced range and endurance due to
possible loss of fuel.
NOTE
Have the airplane inspected before next flight.

(b) Electrical fire with smoke in flight
I. Emergency switch ......................................................................... ON if installed
CAUTION
( Switching OFF the master switch (ALT/BAT) will lead to total loss of all
electronic and electric equipment, including the AHRS and attitude display.
However, by switching the HORIZON EMERGENCY switch ON, the
emergency battery will supply power to the standby attitude gyro (artificial
horizon) and the flood light.
In case of extreme smoke development, the front canopy may be unlatched
during flight. This allows it to partially open, in order to improve ventilation.
The canopy will remain open in this position. Flight characteristics will not be
affected significantly.
2. Master switch (ALT/BAT) ........................................................................... OFF
3. Cabin heat ..................................................................................................... OFF
4. Emergency window(s) ............................................................................... OPEN
5. Use standby instruments for airspeed, altitude and attitude reference, if
necessary
6. Land at the nearest suitable airport as soon as possible
If electronic or avionics equipment is required for continued flight, the
following procedure may be used to isolate the source of the smoke or
fumes:
7. BATtery switch .............................................................................................. ON
8. ESS BUS switch ............................................................................................ ON
L NOTE
This removes power from the main and avionics busses, but does not allow
alternator operation. See the table at the end of this section for the
equipment which is still available.

Page 29 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
If smoke or fumes decrease:

If smoke or fumes persist:
10. ALTernator switch ......................................................................................... ON
I I. ESS BUS switch ........................................................................................... OFF
12. BATT and ESS TIE circuit breakers ......................................................... PULL
This removes power from the essential bus and
restores power to the main and avionics busses. See
the table at the end of this section for the equipment
which will still be available.
13. Use standby instruments for attitude, airspeed and altitude
14. Refer to Section 3.7.2 (b) of this Supplement, Alternator Failure
The equipment available on Essential Bus only (operating on battery only and
the Essential Bus switch selected) is:
Air Data Computer (airspeed, altitude, vertical speed, OAT, TAS)
Attitude and Heading Reference System (attitude, heading)
PFD (in composite mode)
)
Pitot Heat
Flaps
COM!
GPS/NAV I
Transponder
Landing light
Instrument flood lights
Engine instruments
Starter
Refer to the "Essential Bus" area of the circuit breaker panel for a quick
reference to equipment on the Essential Bus.
Equipment available on the Main and Avionics Busses only:
COM2
GPS/NAV2
MFD
Electric fuel pump
Instrument lights
Strobe lights
Position lights
Taxi light
Refer to the "Main Bus" and "Avionics Bus" areas of the circuit breaker panel
for a quick reference to equipment on those busses.
rJ
Page 30 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
3.7.1 ICING
Unintentional flight into icing conditions
I. Leave the icing area (by changing altitude or turning back, in order to reach
zones with a high~r ambient temperature).
2. Pitot heating ................................................................................................... ON
3. Cabin heat ....................................................................................................... ON
4. Air distribution lever ................................................................................. ,&(UP)
5. RPM ................................................................... increase, in order to prevent ice
build-up on the propeller blades
6. Alternate Air (DA 40 only) ....................................................................... OPEN
6a Carburetor Heat (DA 40 F only) ................................................................ HOT
7. Emergency window(s) ................................................................ open if required
CAUTION
Ice build-up increases the stalling speed. If required for safety reasons,
engine speeds up to 2700 RPM are permissible without time limit.
c 8. ATC .............................................................. advise if an emergency is expected

CAUTION
When the pitot heating fails (yellow PITOT FAIL annunciation), and the
alternate static valve is installed:
9. Alternate static valve ............................................................................... OPEN
10. Emergency window(s) .............................................................................. close

Page 31 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
3.7.2 FAILURES IN THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

(bl Alternator failure
An alternator failure is indicated by a red ALTERNATOR message and an
ammeter indication of 0 Amps.
I. Circuit breakers ...................................................................................... Check in
2. ALTernator switch ........................................................................ OFF, then ON
If alternator does not come back on line (message extinguishes and ammeter
indication greater than zero):
3. ESS BUS switch ............................................................................................ ON
4. Switch off any non-essential electrical loads.
5. Land within 30 minutes
IfPFD attitude information is lost prior to landing:
6. HORIZON EMERGENCY Switch................................................................ ON
CAUTION
The following items are available on the Essential Bus:
PFD in composite (backup) format
NAV/COM I
)
GPS I
• Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
• Air Data Computer
• Pitot heat
• Engine instruments
Transponder
Flood light
Landing light
Refer to the ESSENTIAL BUS area of the circuit breaker panel for a
quick reference to equipment on those busses. These items of equipment
can be supplied with power by the battery for at least 30 minutes.
During this 30-minute period, the airplane must be landed at a suitable
airport. Economical use of electrical equipment, in particular of pitot
heat, and switching off equipment that is not needed extends the time
during which the other equipment remains available.
J
Page 32 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
For cases in which the battery capacity is not sufficient to reach a

suitable airport, an emergency battery is installed to power the standby
attitude gyro and floodlight. This battery is switched on with the
HORIZON EMERGENCY Switch. It provides power for I hour and 30
minutes when the floodlight is switched on.
3.8 AVIONICS EMERGENCIES
3.8.1 PFD OR MFD DISPLAY FAILURE
a) DISPLAY BACKUP button on audio panel. .. PUSH (button shall be OUT)
3.8.1.1 AUTOMATIC ENTRY OF DISPLAY REVERSIONARY MODE

( If the PFD and MFD have automatically entered reversionary mode, use the
following procedure:
a) DISPLAY BACKUP button on audio panel. .. PUSH (button shall be OUT)
NOTE
After automatic entry of reversionary mode, it is required to press the
DISPLAY BACKUP button on the audio panel. With the DISPLAY
BACKUP button pushed, if the problem causing the automatic entry of
reversionary mode is resolved the system will remain in reversionary mode.
A maximum of one attempt to return to normal mode is approved using the
following procedure.
b) DISPLAY BACKUP button on audio panei.. .... PUSH (button shall be IN)
• If the system returns to normal mode, leave the DISPLAY BACKUP

button in and continue.
• If the system remains in reversionary mode, or abnormal display
behavior such as display flashing occurs, then return the DISPLAY
BACKUP button the OUT position.

Page 33 of60
GARMIN GIOOO INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM · .. ·~
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
3.8.2 AHRS FAILURE
NOTE
A failure of the Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) is
indicated by removal of the sky/ground presentation and a red X and a
yellow "AHRS FAILURE" shown on the PFD. The digital heading
presentation will be replaced with a yellow "HDG" and the compass rose
digits will be removed. The course pointer will indicate straight up and
course may be set using the digital window.
I. Use Standby Attitude Indicator, magnetic compass and Navigation Map
2. Course .......................................................................... Set using digital window
3.8.3 AIR DATA COMPUTER CADC) FAILURE

NOTE
Complete loss of the Air Data Computer is indicated by a red X and yellow
text over the airspeed, altimeter, vertical speed, TAS and OAT displays.
Some FMS functions, such as true airspeed and wind calculations, will also
be lost.
()
I. Use Standby Airspeed Indicator and Altimeter
2. Land as soon as practical at a suitable airport
3.8.4 ERRONEOUS OR LOSS OF ENGINE AND FUEL DISPLAYS
NOTE
Loss of an engine parameter is indicated by a red X through the data
field. Erroneous information may be identified by indications that do
not agree with other system information. Erroneous indications may be
determined by comparing a display with other displays and other
system information.
I. Set power based on throttle lever position, engine noise, and speed.
2. Monitor other indications to determine the health of the engine.
3. Use known power settings from Table 5.3.2 (DA 40) or Charts 5.3.8 (DA
40 F) of AFM for approximate fuel flow values.
4. Use other system information, such as annunciator messages, ENGINE

SYSTEM page, and AUX - TRIP PLANNING page to safely complete the
flight.

Page 34 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
3.8.5 ERRONEOUS OR LOSS OF WARNING/CAUTION

ANNUNCIATORS
NOTE
Loss of an annunciator may be indicated when engine or fuel displays show
an abnormal or emergency sitoation and the annunciator is not present. An
erroneous annunciator may be identified when an annunciator appears
which does not agree with other displays or system information.
I. If an annunciator appears, treat it as if the condition exists. Refer to the
AFM Emergency or Abnormal procedures or the procedures contained in
thisAFMS.
2. If a display indicates an abnormal condition but no annunciator is present,

use other system information, such as engine displays, ENGINE SYSTEM
page, GAL REM and FFLOW GPH displays, to determine if the condition
exists. If it cannot be determined that the condition does not exist, treat the
c situation as if the condition exists. Refer to the AFM Emergency or

Abnormal procedures or the procedures contained in this AFMS.

Page 35 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
SECTION IVA
NORMAL PROCEDURES
NOTE
Readability of the PFD and MFD displays may be degraded when wearing
polarized sunglasses.
I. DETAILED OPERATING PROCEDURES
Nonnal operating procedures for the G I 000 and GFC 700 are described in
the Garmin GIOOO Cockpit Reference Guide and the Garmin GIOOO Pilot's
Guide.
PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTION
I. Cabin check
a)
b)
c)
MET, NAV, Mass & CG ............................................. flight planning complete
Airplane documents ...................................................... complete and up-to-date
Ignition key .......................................................................................... pulled out
)
d) Front canopy & rear door ···············································v ...... clean, undamaged
e) All electrical equipment ................................................................................ OFF
t) Circuit breakers .............................. set in (if one has been pulled, check reason)
g) Engine control levers ............................ check condition, freedom of movement
Full travel of throttle,
Full Travel of RPM (DA 40 only)
Full Travel of mixture lever
h) Throttle ....................................................................................................... IDLE
i) Mixture control lever ................................................................................ LEAN
j) RPM lever (DA 40 only) .................................................................. mGH RPM
k) Carlluretor Heat (DA 40 F only) .............................................................. COLD
I) Master switch (BAT) ..................................................................................... ON
m) Fuel Quantity .................................................................... check fuel qty. on EIS
· check with fuel qty. measuring device
J
Page 36 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
NOTE
FOR STANDARD TANKS, when the fuel quantity indicator

reads 17 US gal the correct fuel quantity must be determined with the
fuel quantity measuring device. If this measurement is not carried out,
the fuel quantity available for flight planning is 17 US gal.
FOR LONG RANGE TANKS, when the fuel indicator reads
16 US gal the correct fuel quantity must be determined with the fuel
quantity measuring device. There are 3 US gal of ungauged fuel from
16 to 19 US gal. If this measurement is not carried out, the fuel
quantity available for flight planning is 16 US gal.
n) Position lights, strobe light (ACL's) ........................................................... check

o) Master switch (BAT) .................................................................................... OFF
p) Check for loose items ............................................................................ complete
q) Flight controls and trim ................................................. free to move and correct
r) Baggage .................................................................................. stowed and secure
NOTE
Refer to DA 40 and DA 40 F AFMs to complete the Walk-around check, visual
inspection
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE

I. Preflight inspection ............................................................................... Complete
2. Rudder pedals ..................................................................... Adjusted and locked
3. Passengers ............................................................................................ Instructed
4. Safety Harnesses ................................................................... All on and fastened
5. Rear door ................................................................................ Closed and locked
6. Door lock (if installed) ................................................. Unblocked, key removed
7. Front canopy ....................................................... Position I or 2 ("cooling gap'')
8. Canopy lock (if installed) ............................................ Unblocked, key removed
9. Parking brake .................................................................................................. Set
10. Flight controls ................................. Freedom of movement and proper direction
II. Trimwheel ..................................................................................................... T/0
12. Friction device, throttle quadrant ........................................................... Adjusted
13. Throttle ....................................................................................................... IDLE
14. Mixture control lever ................................................................................ LEAN
15. RPM lever (DA 40 only) ................................................................. HIGH RPM
16. Carburetor heat (DA 40 F only) ............................................................... COLD
17. Alternate air (DA 40 only) .................................................................... CLOSED
18. Alternate Static Valve ........................................................ CLOSED, if installed

Page 37 of60
·~
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
l '
19. Avionics master switch ................................................................................. OFF

20. Essential Bus switch ..................................................................................... OFF
CAUTION
When the essential bus is switched ON, the battery will not be charged
unless the essential tie relay bypass (OAM 40-126) is installed.
21. BATtery switch ............................................................................................. ON
22. Fuel tank selector .......................................................................... on fullest tank
WARNING
Never move the propeller by hand while the ignition is switched on, as it
may result in serious personal injury.
J
Page 38 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
STARTING ENGINE IDA 40 only)

W Cold engine
I. Strobe light (ACL) ......................................................................................... ON
2. Electrical fuel pump ........................................................... ON, note pump noise
3. Throttle ........................................................... 3 em (1.2 in) forward from IDLE
(measured from rear of slot)
4. Mixture control lever ........................................ RICH for 3 - 5 sec, then LEAN
5. Throttle ........................................................... I em (0.4 in) forward from IDLE
WARNING
Before starting the engine, the pilot must ensure that the propeller area is
free, and no persons can be endangered.
CAUTION
Do not overheat the starter motor. Do not operate the starter motor for more
than I 0 seconds. After operating the starter motor, let it cool off for 20
seconds. After 6 attempts to start the engine, let the starter cool for 30
minutes before further start attempts.
CAUTION
The use of an external pre-heater and external power source is
recommended whenever possible, in particular at ambient temperatures
below o•c (32°F), to reduce wear and abuse to the engine and electrical
system. Pre-heat will thaw the oil trapped in the oil cooler, which can be
congealed in extremely cold temperatures. After a warm-up period of
approximately 2 to 5 minutes (depending on the ambient temperature) at
1500 RPM, the engine is ready for takeoff if it accelerates smoothly and the
oil pressure is normal and steady.
When engine starts:
6. Mixture control lever ........................................................ rapidly move to RICH
7. Oil pressure ...................................................................... green arc within 15 sec
8. Electrical fuel pump ...................................................................................... OFF
WARNING
If the oil pressure has not moved into the green arc within 15 seconds after
starting, SWITCH OFF ENGINE and investigate problem.
10. Ammeter .................................................................................................... Check
II. Fuel pressure ...................................................... Check no messages illuminated
12. Annunciator section ofPFD ...................................................................... Check

Page 39 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
1hl Warm engine

I. Strobelight(ACL) ......................................................................................... ON
4. Mixture control lever ......................................... RICH for I - 3 sec, then LEAN
WARNING
CAUTION
5. Ignition switch ........................................................................................ START
When engine starts: )
WARNING
I 0. Ammeter .................................................................................................... Check
12. Annunciator section of PFD ...................................................................... Check
J
Page 40 of60
r.
~ .
GARMIN GlOOO INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
(!;} Engine will not start after injection C'flooded engine") Warm engine
(=Functional check of pump)
3. Mixture control lever .................................................................. LEAN, fully aft
4. Throttle ........................................................................................ at mid position
WARNING
CAUTION
5. Ignition switch ........................................................................................ START
( 6. Throttle ........................................... pull back towards IDLE when engine starts

When engine starts:
WARNING
9. ALTematorswitch ......................................................................................... ON
I 0. Ammeter .................................................................................................... Check
L
Page41 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
STARTING ENGINE IDA 40 F only)

!l!)_ Cold engine
2. Mixture ............................................................................................. fully RICH
3. Electrical fuel pwnp ........................................................... ON, note pwnp noise
(=functional check ofpwnp)
4. Throttle ................................................................... '14 travel forward from IDLE
5. Prime ..................................................................... I - 4 seconds (electric pwnp)
WARNING
Use the primer system to prepare the engine for a starting attempt. Do not
use the throttle to pump fuel through the carburetor to the engine for
priming since this may lead to carburetor fire. The primer system delivers
fuel to the cylinders directly.
CAUTION
The priming system is not intended for operation in flight.
WARNING )
CAUTION
seconds. After 6 attempts to start the engine, Jet the starter cool for 30
CAUTION
below 0°C (32°F), to reduce wear and abuse to the engine and electrical
I 500 RPM, the engine is ready for takeoff if it accelerates smoothly and the
6. Starter........................................................................................................ engage
/J
190-00492-I 0 Rev 2 Diamond DA 40 I DA 40F
Page 42 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
When engine starts:

8. Throttle .......................................................................................... set 1000 RPM
WARNING
starting, SWITCH OFF THE ENGINE and investigate problem.
II. Ammeter .................................................................................................... Check
(hl Warm engine
4. Throttle ................................................................... Y. travel forward from IDLE
( WARNING
CAUTION
5. Starter ........................................................................................................ engage
. When engine starts:

7. Throttle .......................................................................................... set I 000 RPM
WARNING
10. Ammeter .................................................................................................... Check
II. Annunciator section of PFD ...................................................................... Check

Page 43 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
(£} Engine will not start after priming {"flooded engine")

3. Mixture ...................................................................................... LEAN, fully aft
4. Throttle ............................................................................................. MAX PWR
WARNING
CAUTION
5. Starter........................................................................................................ engage
When engine starts:

6. Throttle ............................................. pull back towards IDLE when engine ftres
)
WARNING
8. Throttle ......................................................................................... set 1000 RPM
I 0. Ammeter .................................................................................................... Check
J
Page 44 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
BEFORE TAXIING
I. Avionics master switch .................................................................................. ON
2. Electrical equipment ..................................................................... On as required
3. Flaps ............................................................................... UP-T/0-LDG-T/0
4. Flight instruments and avionics ............................. set, test function, as required
5. (set both altimeters)
6. Flood light... .......................................................... ON, test function, as required
7. Ammeter ........................................................... check, if required increase RPM
8. Fuel tank selector ........................................... change tanks, confiOll that engine
also runs on other tank (at least I
minute at 1500 RPM)
9. Pilot heating ........................................................................... ON, test function-
no yellow PITOT FAIL annunciation
10. Pitot heating ............................................................. OFF if not required (yellow
PITOT OFF annunciation)
II. Strobe lights (ACL$) ..................................................... check ON, test function,
as required
( 12. Position lights, landing and taxi lights .................. ON, test function, as required
CAUTION
When taxiing at close range to other aircraft, or during night flight in
clouds, fog or haze, the strobe lights should be switched OFF. The position
lights must always be switched ON during night flight.
13. Throttle .......................................................................... check, 600 to 800 RPM
NOTE
The GFC 700 AFCS system automatically conducts a preflight self-test

upon initial power application. The preflight test is indicated by a white
boxed PFT on the PFD. Upon successful completion of the preflight test,
the PFT is removed, the red AFCS annunciation is removed, and the
autopilot disconnect tone sounds.
14. Primary Flight Display (PFD) ............... NO AUTOPILOT ANNUNCIATIONS

15. Autopilot Disconnect Tone ....................................................................... NOTE
190-00492-I 0 Rev 2 Diamond DA 40 IDA 40F

Page 45 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
BEFORE TAKE-OFF
I. Position airplane into wind if possible
2. Parking brake ................................................................................................... set
3. Safety harnesses .......................................................................... on and fastened
4. Rear door ...................................................................... check closed and locked
5. Front canopy ............................................................................ closed and locked
CAUTION
When operating the canopy, pilots I operators must ensure that there
are no obstructions between the canopy and the mating frame, for
example seat belts, clothing, etc. When operating the locking handle
do NOT apply undue force.
A slight downward pressure on the canopy may be required to ease the
handle operation.
6. Door warning light (DOOR OPEN) .................. Check no messages illuminated
7. Fuel tank selector ............................................................................... fullest tank
8. Engine instruments ....................................................................... in green sector
9.
I 0.
II.
Circuit breakers .................................................................................... pressed in
Fuel pressure ...................................................... Check no messages illuminated
Electric fuel pump .......................................................................................... ON
)
12. Mixture control lever ........................................................ RICH (below 5000 ft)
NOTE
temperatures, a fully rich mixture can cause rough running of
the engine or a loss of performance. The mixture should be
set for smooth running engine.
13. Flaps .................................................................................................... check TIO
14. Trim .................................................................................................... check TIO
15. Flight controls ........................................................ free movement, correct sense
16. Throttle ................................................................................ 2000 RPM (DA 40)
-1800 RPM (DA 40 F)
17. Magneto check ...................................................................... L-BOTH-R-BOTH
Max. RPM drop .......... 175 RPM
Max. difference ............. 50 RPM
CAUTION
The Jack of an RPM drop suggests a faulty ground or incorrect
ignition timing. In case of doubt the magneto check can be repeated
with a leaner mixture, in order to confirm a problem. Even when
running on only one magneto the engine should not run unduly
roughly.

Page 46 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
18. RPM lever (DA 40 only) ...................................... pull back until a drop of max.
500 RPM is reached- HIGH RPM;
Cycle 3 times
!Sa Carburetor Heat (DA 40 F only) ................................................... check function

18b Throttle (DA 40 F only) ................................ MAX PWR, minimum 2200 RPM
NOTE (DA 40 F only)

The result of the ground check at full throttle depends on a
number of environmental factors, e.g. temperature, ambient air
pressure and in particular head or tailwind components.
Headwind will cause a higher RPM than tailwind.
19. Throttle ....................................................................................... set I 000 RPM

20. Carburetor Heat (DA 40 F only) .................................................. check COLD
21. Alternate Air (DA 40 only) ..................................................... check CLOSED
( 22.
23.
Parking brake ......................................................................................... release
Landing light ............................................................................. ON as required

Page47 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
AFTER TAKEOFF- GFC 700 NORMAL PROCEDURES
WARNING
IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE PILOT IN COMMAND TO

MONITOR THE AUTOPILOT WHEN IT IS ENGAGED. THE
PILOT SHOULD BE PREPARED TO IMMEDIATELY
DISCONNECT THE AUTOPILOT AND TO TAKE PROMPT
CORRECTIVE ACTION IN THE EVENT OF UNEXPECTED OR
UNUSUAL AUTOPILOT BEHAVIOR.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MANUALLY FLY THE AIRPLANE

WITH THE AUTOPILOT ENGAGED. THE AUTOPILOT
SERVOS WILL OPPOSE PILOT INPUT AND WILL TRIM
OPPOSITE THE DIRECTION OF PILOT INPUT (PITCH AXIS
ONLY). THIS COULD LEAD TO A SIGNIFICANT OUT-OF-
TRIM CONDITION. DISCONNECT THE AUTOPILOT IF
MANUAL CONTROL IS DESIRED.
THE PILOT IN COMMAND MUST USE PROPER AUTOPILOT

)
MODES AND PROPER ENGINE POWER SETTINGS TO
ENSURE THAT AIRCRAFT SPEED IS MAINTAINED BETWEEN
70 KIAS AND 165 KIAS. IT WILL BE NECESSARY TO CHANGE
ENGINE POWER TO MAINTAIN THE DESIRED RATE OF
DESCENT WHEN OPERATING AT 165 KIAS.
OBSERVE THE MINIMUM AUTOPILOT OPERATING SPEED

OF 70 KIAS. OPERATION IN PITCH (PIT), VERTICAL SPEED
(VS), OR ALTITUDE HOLD (AL T) MODES BELOW THIS
SPEED CAN RESULT IN AN AIRPLANE STALL. IF
INDICATIONS OF AN AIRPLANE STALL ARE PRESENT,
INCLUDING STALL WARNING HORN, LOSS OF CONTROL
EFFECTIVENESS OR AIRFRAME BUFFET, DISCONNECT THE
AUTOPILOT AND MANUALLY RETURN THE AIRPLANE TO
STABILIZED FLIGHT PRIOR TO RE-ENGAGING THE
AUTOPILOT.
NOTE
The NOSE UP and NOSE DN buttons on the mode controller on the

MFD are referenced to aircraft movement. The NOSE UP button will
increase the reference pitch attitude, increase the reference vertical speed
and decrease the reference airspeed. Likewise, the NOSE ON button will
decrease the reference pitch attitude, decrease the reference vertical
rJ
speed, and increase the reference airspeed.

Page 48 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
CLIMB. CRUISE and DESCENT:
Vertical Speed <VSl:

I. Altitude Preselect ........................................................... SET to desired altitude
2. Mode Controller ............................................. SELECT VS on mode controller
3. Vertical Speed Reference .... ADJUST using NOSE UP and NOSE DN buttons
4. White ALT (altitude preselect armed) ....................................... NOTE on PFD
5. Green ALT ....................................... VERIFY UPON ALTITUDE CAPTURE
NOTE
The vertical speed mode is limited to I ,500 ftlmin climb and 3,000
ftlminute descent. Use engine power to maintain appropriate aircraft
speed. If the CWS switch is used while in VS mode, the VS reference
will change to the vertical speed when the CWS switch is released.
Flight Level Change fFLC):
( I. Altitude Preselect ........................................................... SET to desired altitude

2. Mode Controller .......................................... SELECT FLC on mode controller
3. Airspeed Reference ............. ADJUST using NOSE UP and NOSE DN buttons
NOTE
If the airspeed reference cannot be maintained without deviating away

from the selected altitude, the system will maintain level flight until the
power or reference is changed to allow climbing or descending towards
the selected altitude.
The FLC mode is limited to airspeeds between 70 KIAS and 165 KIAS.
Use engine power to maintain appropriate vertical speed. If the CWS
switch is used while in FLC mode, the airspeed reference will change to
the airspeed when the CWS switch is released
Altitude Hold fALTl:

To capture a selected altitude:
I. Altimeter Setting ................................. ADJUST TO APPROPRIATE VALUE
2. Altitude Preselect ........................................... SET TO DESIRED ALTITUDE
3. Vertical Mode and Reference .............................. SELECT on mode controller
L 5. Green ALT ....................................... VERIFY UPON ALTITUDE CAPTURE

Page49 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
NOTE
In ALT mode, the autopilot will maintain the reference altitude shown in
the autopilot window of the PFD regardless of the altitude in the altitude
preselect window or the altimeter's barometric pressure setting. If the
altimeter setting is changed, the autopilot will climb or descend to
maintain the reference altitude.
Altitude Hold (ALT):

To maintain a desired altitude:
2. Reaching desired altitude ............................. SELECT ALTon mode controller
3. Green ALT .............................................................................. VERIFY on PFD
Vertical Path <VPTH): (If equipped with optional GDU 1044)

I. Navigation Source ............................. SELECT GPS using CD! button on PFD
2. MFD flight plan page .......................................... Enter Desired Vertical Profile
)
3. Altitude Preselect ........................................... SET TO DESIRED ALTITUDE
4. Mode Controller .......................................... SELECT VNV on mode controller
5. White VPTH (Vertical Path armed) ........................................... NOTE on PFD
6. Green VPTH ......................... VERIFY UPON VERTICAL PATH CAPTURE
NOTE
IfVNV is pressed and VPTH is armed prior to 5 minutes time to top of

descent, VPTH will flash in white at I minute prior to top of descent.
The pilot must acknowledge the flashing by pressing VPTH again.
Navigation Capture and Track:

I. Navigation Source ................ SELECT VOR or GPS using CD! button on PFD
2. Course Bearing Pointer ............................. SET using course knob (VOR only)
3. Intercept Heading ................. ESTABLISH in HOG or ROL mode (if required)
4. Mode Controller .......................................... SELECT NAY on mode controller
5. Green or White VOR or GPS annunciation ............................... NOTE on PFD
NOTE
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CD!) is greater than one dot from
center, the autopilot will arm the NAY mode and indicate VOR or GPS in
white on the PFD. The pilot must ensure that the current heading will
result in a capture of the selected course. If the CD! is one dot or less
from center, the autopilot will enter the capture mode when the NAV
button is pressed and annunciate VOR or GPS in green on the PFD. J
Page 50 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
APPROACH:
I. Navigation Source ............................ SELECT VOR using CD! button on PFD

2. Course Bearing Pointer ................................................. SET using course knob
3. Intercept Heading ................. ESTABLISH in HDG or ROL mode {if required)
4. Mode Controller ........................................... SELECT APR on mode controller
5. Green or White V APP annunciation .......................................... NOTE on PFD
7. Airspeed .................... MAINTAIN 80 KIAS OR GREATER (Recommended)
NOTE
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CD!) is greater than one dot from
center, the autopilot will arm the V APP mode and indicate V APP in
white on the PFD. The pilot must ensure that the current heading will
( result in a capture of the selected course. If the CD! is one dot or less
from center, the autopilot will enter the capture mode when the V APP
button is pressed and annunciate V APP in green on the PFD.
I. Navigation Source ............................. SELECT LOC using CD! button on PFD

2. Course Bearing Pointer ................................................. SET using course knob
3. Intercept Heading ................. ESTABLISH in HDG or ROL mode (if required)
5. Green or White LOC and GS annunciations .............................. NOTE on PFD
NOTE
When the selected navigation source is a valid ILS, glideslope coupling is

automatically armed when tracking the localizer. The glideslope cannot
be captured until the localizer is captured. The autopilot can capture the
glideslope from above or below the glideslope.
GPS: LNAV

2. Approach ........................................................ LOAD in FMS and ACTIVATE
L 3.
4.
5.
Intercept Heading ................. ESTABLISH in HDG or ROL mode (if required)
Mode Controller ........................................... SELECT APR on mode controller
Green or White GPS annunciation ............................................. NOTE on PFD

Page 51 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40

GPS: LPV. LNAVNNAV. LNAV+V (If equipped with optional GIA 63W GIA
units)
I. Navigation Source ............................. SELECT GPS using cor button on PFD

2. Approach ........................................................ LOAD in FMS and ACTIVATE
5. Green or White GPS annunciation ............................................. NOTE on PFD
6. Green or White GP annunciation ............................................... NOTE on PFD
Back Course !BC)
I. Navigation Source ............................. SELECT LOC using cor button on PFD

2. Course Bearing Pointer .................. SET to ILS front course using course knob
4. Mode Controller .......................................... SELECT NAY on mode controller
5. Green or White BC annunciation ............................................... NOTE on PFD
)
NOTE
The course pointer must be at least 105° from the current magnetic
heading before BC will be annunciated in the lateral mode field. Until
that point, LOC will be annunciated.
Selecting NAV mode for back course approaches inhibits the glides!ope
from coupling.

GO AROUND
I. Control Stick ......................................................................... GRASP FIRMLY

2. GA button ....................................................... PUSH- Verify GNGA on PFD
in lateral and vertical mode fields
3. Balked Landing ................................................................................ EXECUTE
4. Missed Approach Procedure .................................... EXECUTE (as applicable)
5. Altitude Preselect.. .................................................. SET to appropriate altitude
At an appropriate safe altitude:

6. Autopilot Mode Controller ................ SELECT appropriate lateral and vertical
modes on mode controller
7. Autopilot ...................................................................... RE-ENGAGE if desired
J
Page 52 of60
£"".
~
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
NOTE
If the missed approach procedure requires tracking the localizer outbound from
the airport, use NAV mode to prevent inadvertent coupling to glideslope.
AFTER TAKEOFF- TAWS NORMAL PROCEDURES

(If Optional TAWS system is installed)
TAWS CAUTION
When aTA WS CAUTION occurs, take positive corrective action until the alert
ceases. Stop descending or initiate either a climb or a turn, or both, as
necessary, based on analysis of all available instruments and information.
TAWS WARNING
If a TAWS WARNING occurs, immediately initiate and continue a climb that

will provide maximum terrain clearance, or any similar approved vertical terrain
escape maneuver, until all alerts cease. Only vertical maneuvers are
recommended, unless either operating in visual meteorological conditions
(VMC), or the pilot determines, based on all available information, that turning
in addition to the escape maneuver is the safest course of action, or both.
TAWS INHIBIT
The TAWS Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) and Premature

Descent Alerts (PDA) functions may be inhibited to stop alerting for acceptable
flight conditions (such as below glideslope maneuvers). For detailed operating
instructions regarding the G 1000 TAWS Option, refer to the Garmin DA 40/DA
40F Pilot's Guide.

Page 53 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
SECTIONIVB
ABNORMAL PROCEDURES

(a) Low voltage caution (LOW VOLTS)
This caution is indicated when the normal on-board (bus) voltage (28V) drops
below24V.
-A fault in the power supply
-RPM is too low
(i) Low voltage on the ground:
I. Enginespeed ....................................................................................... I200RPM
2. Electrical equipment ..................................................................................... OFF
3. Ammeter and voltmeter .............................................................................. check
If the caution message does not extinguish, and the ammeter legend flashes and
reads zero, discontinue the flight.
(ii) Low voltage caution during flight:
)
1. Electrical equipment ............................................................... OFF if not needed
2. Ammeter and Voltmeter ............................................................................. check
If the caution message does not go out, and the ammeter legend flashes and
reads zero, follow procedure 3.7.2(b)- Alternator Failure, in this Supplement.
(iii) Low voltage caution during landing:
-Follow (i) after landing
SECTIONV
PERFORMANCE
No change.
SECTION VI
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
See current weight and balance data.
)
__

Page 54 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
SECTION VII
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
GlOOO SYSTEM
The Gannin G 1000 Integrated Avionics System consists of a Primary Flight
Display (PFD), a Multi-Function Display (MFD), an Audio Panel, and Attitude
and Heading Reference System (AHRS), an Air Data Computer (ADC), and the
sensors and computers to process flight and engine information for display to
the pilot. The system contains dual GPS receivers, dual VOR/ILS receivers,
dual VHF communications transceivers, a transponder, an Automatic Direction
Finder (ADF) receiver, Distance Measuring Equipment (DME), and an
integrated annunciation system to alert the pilot of certain abnormal conditions.
The GPS receivers will either be non - W AAS capable (if GIA 63 units are
installed) or WAAS capable (ifGIA 63W units are installed).
The Primary Flight Display (PFD) typically displays airspeed, attitude, altitude,
and heading information in a traditional format. Slip information is shown as a
( trapezoid under the bank pointer. One width of the trapezoid is equal to a one
ball width slip. Rate of tum information is shown on the scale above the
compass rose; full scale deflection is equal to a standard rate tum. The
following controls are available on the PFD (clockwise from top right):
• Communications frequency volume and squelch knob
• Communications frequency set knobs
• Communications frequency transfer button
• Altimeter setting knob (baro set)
• Course knob
• Map range knob and cursor control
• FMS control buttons and knob
• PFD softkey buttons, including master warning/caution acknowledgement
• Altitude reference set knob
·• Heading bug control
• Navigation frequency transfer button
• Navigation frequency set knobs
• Navigation frequency volume and Identifier knob
The PFD displays the crew alerting (annunciator) system. When a warning or
caution message is received, a warning or caution annunciator will flash on the
PFD, accompanied by an aural tone. A warning is accompanied by a repeating
tone, and a caution is accompanied by a single tone. Acknowledging the alert
will cancel the flashing and provide a text description of the message. Refer to
the Emergency or Abnormal Procedures Sections of the AFM or this
Supplement for the appropriate procedure to follow for each message.

Page 55 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
Advisory messages related to G I 000 system status are shown in white and are
accompanied by a white flashing ADVISORY alert. Refer to the GIOOO Pilot's
Guide and Cockpit Reference Guide for descriptions of the messages and
recommended actions (if applicable).
Trend vectors are shown on the airspeed and altimeter displays as a magenta
line predicting 6 seconds at the current rate. The tum rate indicator also
functions as a trend indicator on the compass scale.
The PFD can be displayed in a composite format for emergency use by pressing
the DISPLAY BACKUP button on the audio panel. In the composite mode, the
full crew alerting function remains.
The Multi-Function Display (MFD) typically displays engine data, maps,
terrain, traffic and topography displays, and flight planning and progress
information. The display unit is identical to the PFD and contains the same
controls as previously listed. Additionally, the GFC 700 autopilot mode
controls are located on the MFD. These controls are described later in this
section.
The audio panel contains traditional transmitter and receiver selectors, as well as
an integral intercom and marker beacon system. The marker beacon lights
appear on the PFD. In addition, a clearance recorder records the last 2 Y,
)
minutes of received audio. Lights above the selections indicate what selections
are active. Pressing the red DISPLAY BACKUP button on the audio panel
causes both the PFD and MFD to display a composite mode.
The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) uses GPS, rate sensors, air
data, and magnetic variation to determine pitch and roll attitude, sideslip and
heading. Operation is possible in a degraded mode if the system loses any of
these inputs. Status messages alert the crew of the loss of any of these inputs.
The AHRS will align while the aircraft is in motion, but will align more quickly
if the wings are kept level during the alignment process.
The Air Data Computer (ADC) provides airspeed, altitude, vertical speed, and
air temperature to the display system. In addition to the primary displays, this
information is used by the FMS and TIS systems.
Engine instruments are displayed on the MFD. Discrete engine sensor

information is processed by the Garmin Engine Airframe (GEA) sub-system.
When an engine sensor indicates a value outside the normal operating range, the
legend will tum yellow for caution range, and tum red and flash for warning
range.
J
Page 56 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
GFC 700 SYSTEM

The GFC 700 Automatic Flight Control system (AFCS}, as installed in the
Diamond DA-40, consists of the following components:
• One GDU, installed as the MFD, which contains the following mode
control buttons: AP (autopilot engage/disengage}; FD (Flight Director
On/Oft); HOG (Heading mode On/Oft); NAV (Nav mode On/Oft); APR
(Approach mode On/Oft); ALT (Altitude Hold mode On/Oft); VS (Vertical
Speed mode On/Oft); FLC (Flight Level Change mode On/Oft); NOSE UP
and NOSE DN (vertical mode reference change}. The optional GDU 1044
contains the VNV button (Vertical Navigation mode On/Oft).
• Servos with autopilot processing logic in the pitch, roll and pitch trim
control systems
• Servo mounts and brackets
• Flight Director processing logic in the GIAs
• Control stick-mounted manual electric trim (MET} switch (split switch} for
pitch trim
( •
•
Control stick-mounted trim interrupt and autopilot disconnect switch
Control stick-mounted CWS (Control Wheel Steering} switch
Remote-mounted go-around switch (on the left side of the throttle lever
knob}
• PFD/MFD mounted altitude preselect knob (ALT}
• PFD/MFD mounted heading select knob (HOG}
Flight Director commands and autopilot modes are displayed on the PFD. Full
AFCS functionality is only available with the both displays operating, and will
disconnect under certain reversionary conditions.
Upon initial system power-up, the system undergoes a preflight test. At the end
of the test, the autopilot disconnect tone sounds and the PFT and AFCS
annunciations are removed. Successful completion of the preflight test is
required for the autopilot and manual electric trim to engage.
Annunciation of the flight director and autopilot modes is shown in the lower
status field of the PFD. In general, green indicates active modes and white
indicates armed modes. When a mode is directly selected by the pilot, no
flashing of the mode will occur. When automatic mode changes occur, they will
be annunciated with a flashing annunciation of the new mode for ten seconds in
green. If a mode becomes unavailable for whatever reason, the mode will flash
for ten seconds in yellow and be replaced by the new mode in greeo.
Normal autopilot disconnects are annunciated with a yellow flashing AP on the

PFD accompanied by a two second autopilot disconnect tone. Normal
disconnects are those initiated by the pilot with the AP DISC switch, the MET
switch, the AP button on the MFD mode controller, or the GA button.

Page 57 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
Abnormal disconnects will be accompanied by a red flashing AP on the PFD

accompanied by a continuous autopilot disconnect tone. The disconnect tone
and flashing alert may be cancelled by pressing the AP DISC switch or the left
side of the MET switch.
Refer to the Garmin G 1000 Pilot's Guide for the Diamond DA 40, for a
complete description of the GFC 700 system and operating procedures.
J
Page 58 of60
GARMIN G1 000 INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
Refer to the Gannin G1 000 Cockpit Reference Guide for descriptions of the
G 1000 and GFC 700 system and operating procedures. Refer to the following
table to determine the appropriate guide. The System Software Version number
is displayed at the top, right side of the MFD Power-up page.
System Software
Pilot's Guides
Version
Garmin GIOOO Cockpit Reference Guide (CRG)
0369.13 PIN 190-00324-07, Revision A or later appropriate
revision .
.
(
.L
Page 59 of60
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
7.10 FUEL SYSTEM

Fuel Ouantitv Indication
Each fuel tank has a capacity probe that ascertains fuel quantity in that tank.
Standard Tank configurations have two fuel probes, one in each wing. Long
Range Tank configurations have four fuel probes, two in each wing, an
outboard tank and an inboard tank. When the fuel quantity indicator reads zero,
only unusable fuel remains in the tank. Usable capacity of each tank for the
Standard Tank configuration is 20 US gal (76 liters). Usable capacity of an
outboard and inboard tank for the Long Range Tank configuration is 24 US gal
(91 liters).
Fuel quantity:
Fuel quantity indicating for the Standard Tank configuration functions as
described in the DA 40 AFM. Also, refer to the 'GIOOO Pilot's Guide for the
Diamond DA 40' for additional information about the functionality of the
Gl OOO's fuel quantity gauge.
For the Long Range Tank configuration, dual pointers on a linear scale, a top
pointer for the left fuel quantity and a bottom pointer for the right fuel quantity
indicate fuel quantity. The fuel quantity gauge is marked in five gallon
increments starting at zero to 25 US gal. The break in the green band between
)
16 and 19 US gal shows the ungauged portion of the fuel tanks usable fuel.
When a fuel tank is completely full, the quantity pointer will indicate 24 US
gallons. As fuel is consumed from the tank, the pointer will move to the left.
Once there is no more measurable fuel in the outboard tank, the pointer migrates
over a 30 second period to the 16 US gal position. The pointer will remain at 16
US gallons while the ungauged fuel quantity is consumed. Once the quantity of
fuel remaining in the inboard tank is less than 16 gallons, the pointer will begin
moving left towards zero. When either pointer enters the amber portion of the
scale, the pointer and the gauge title, 'FUEL QTY GAL', will turn amber. When
either pointer enters the red portion of the gauge, the pointer will turn red, and
the gauge title, 'FUEL QTY GAL', will turn red and flash continuously in
inverse video.
J
Page 60 of60
r
Oarmin Ltd. Or illlllllbsidillries
c/o Garmln latenlatiooal
1200 E. 1St" St.tect
Ola!he, K.S 66062 USA
DoOWDent No. 190.0030:J-02
FAA APPROVED
PAAAPPB.OVED AIRPLANB FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPlEMENT
GARMJN 01000 !NTEGRATIID AVlONICS SYSTEM
DIAMOND MOD2L DA40
DIAMOND MODEL OA 40 F
Reg. No• .A/2/~~ SIN ~ ({,%'
( !hls Suppkmeatmust be altaGhed to lhc FAA Approved AUplane Fli&bt

Manual wbcJl the Gmmin 01000 llllegtakd Avionics System. is illstalled in
accordance with STC SAOllS4WI. The infmmation CODtailted hcieJn
supplements tbe ~of the basic AirplaDc Fllgbt Manual. For
l..imilations, Proeedmes and Pedormance iDionDation not~ in this
Supplemeat c:oDSUlt the basic Ai!plane Flight Mauual
Note: This Airplane Fligbt Manual Supplement follows tile iimnat and IIOillent
of the Aitplmo Fllght Manual. for tho Diamond DA 40 for QODSisiCIIcy and cue
of use.
OIIly the Limilndons Sc:elion is FAA APPROVED.
~'8J,- J{liDB
Manager, Aircmtl. Certification Oflioc
Fcderal.Aviation.Administralioo
W"tcbita, Kansas 67109
DATP.: . o/f6f~5
-~
r Uunnin Ltd. Or it~ suosidiarie;,
c!o Gam1in lntemMional
I 200 E. 151" Strt·et
Olathe. KS MH62 USA
FilA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT Mi\Nl'AL SUI'PLEMENl

GARMIN G!OOO !NTF.GRATEO AVIONICS SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA -10

DIAMOND MODEL DA ·10 f
Updated dnc To rdlcci
( All
curre-nt pn.)cessi.:s
Updated heu<krifomer '''
current tom1a1.
Revioed w rcl1ect FAA
AI! Appn'!val nf Li1niwtions
Sedi<m rmly
I 4 AI! Initial fAA Appr<>val GMB'

Make KA.P 140 autopilot
I 5 All an optiom1l equipment GMB' 9!.7.0120(14
m:<lalbtion
Amenchnent 'J revision !
I> All and administrative I GMB 1
I
1------+-----f-•-·o_r-_,e_c_ti_n_n._'·--·---+-·-....---·-1-----i
All
DA 40 F revision and
administrative
corredioos
1
GMB' I 6!27:05
:-\mendment 2 revision
X All and administrative CiMB' I 9!161\)5
;~---- __ ......................_______
,
corredlons.
L. . . . . ::. . . . . . . . . . . . . :.~.;~. . . . . . . . . ~.::.~~:::~i:l:~!.~.~. Lr.:::\icin;: ... :f!.!~.~::. :'::·' lI tjI/{; 5

' h">r ~hrgaret Kline. IV!ana;wr
Wid1ita AircmJt Certilkrttinn Offlee
Diamond '\ ;r,:rall OA '10

Pagt: :~ of .t 1
,_\
z .
'------"'
o-
'<I" '<I"
< ...
Q~
]z
..oi
.§
]
Q
.c.
,Q
......
t:l
1::
-~
.s~
.!::J
~
~
~
.!::J
~
"'
~
f?
M
0
8
~
~
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
Table of Contents
SECTION I
GENERAL .......................................................................................... 7
(Not FAA Approved)
SECTION II
LIMITATIONS ................................................................................... 9
(FAA Approved)
SECTION III
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ....................................................... 17
( (Not FAA Approved)
SECTION IVA
NORMAL PROCEDURES .............................................................. 25
(Not FAA Approved)
SECTIONIVB
ABNORMAL PROCEDURES ......................................................... 37
(Not FAA Approved)
SECTIONV
PERFORMANCE ............................................................................. 37
(Not FAA Approved)
SECTION VI
WEIGHT AND BALANCE ............................................................. 37
(Not FAA Approved)
SECTION VII
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................. 38
(Not FAA Approved)
190-00303-02 Rev 9 Diamond Aircraft DA 40

Page 5 of41
o-
........
<""'
Q~
~~
·="'
< "'
"C
c
0
ole!
1\:: ~
~
..<:)
i5
,.?:.
]
~
1\::
.s~
.~
a~
.~
~
a-
~
9
8...,
0
'i'
0
2::
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
SECTION I
GENERAL
I. The G1 000 Integrated Avionics System is a fully integrated flight, engine,

communication, navigation and surveillance instrumentation system. The
system consists of a Primary Flight Display (PFD), Multi-Function Display
(MFD), audio panel, Air Data Computer (ADC), Attitude and Heading
Reference System (AHRS), engine sensors and processing unit (GEA), and
integrated avionics (GIA) containing VHF communications, VHF
navigation, and GPS (Global Positioning System).
2. The primary function of the PFD is to provide attitude, heading, air data,
navigation, and alerting information to the pilot The PFD may also be
used for flight planning. The primary function of the MFD is to provide
engine information, mapping, terrain information, and for flight planning.
The audio panel is used for selection of radios for transmitting and
listening, intercom functions, and marker beacon functions.
3. The primary function of the VHF Communication portion of the GlOOO is
to enable external radio communication. The primary function of the
VORIILS Receiver portion of the equipment is to receive and demodulate
VOR, Localizer, and Glide Slope signals. The primary function of the GPS
portion of the system is to acquire signals from the GPS system satellites,
recover orbital data, make range and Doppler measurements, and process
this information in real-time to obtain the user's position, velocity, and time.
4. Provided a Garmin GIOOO GPS receiver is receiving adequate usable
signals, it has been demonstrated capable of and has been shown to meet
the accuracy specifications for:
• VFRIIFR enroute, oceanic, terminal, and non-precision
instrument approach (GPS, Loran-e, VOR, VOR-DME,
TACAN, NDB, NDB-DME, RNAV) operation within the
U.S. National Airspace System in accordance with AC 20-
138A.
• Oceanic/Remote per FAA Notice 8110.60- Two FMSs are
required to be installed, operating and receiving usable signals
from independent GPS sensors (one GPS sensor for those
routes requiring only one Long Range Navigation (LRN)
sensor. This does not constitute operational approval.
• North Atlantic (NAT) Minimum Navigation Performance
Specifications (MNPS) Airspace~ defined in AC 91-49 and
AC 91-70 - Provided two FMSs are installed, operating and

Page7of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
are receiving usable signals from any two GPS navigation

sensors (one GPS sensor for those routes requiring only one
Long Range Navigation (LRN) sensor). The GPS sensor
meets the requirements of FAA Notice 8110.60 for primary
navigation sensors. This does not constitute operational
approval.
• RNAV (GPS) Approaches - The GIOOO GPS meets the
requirements of AC 20-138(A) for GPS based RNAV
approaches. This includes RNAV approaches labeled as
RNA V (GPS), provided GPS sensor data is valid.
The systems meets RNPS airspace (BRNAV) requirements of
AC 90-96 and in accordance with AC 20-138A, JAA GAI-20
ACJ 20X4, and. FAA Order 8ll0.60 for oceanic and remote
airspace operations, provided it is receiving usable navigation
information from the GPS receiver.
Navigation is accomplished using the WGS-84 (NAD-83) coordinate reference
datum. GPS navigation data is based upon use of only the GPS operated by the
United States of America.
)

Page 8 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
SECTION II
LIMITATIONS .
2.1 INTRODUCTION
I. The Gannin GIOOO Cockpit Reference Guide (CRG) must be immediately
available to the flight crew. The required CRG is referenced to the System
Software Version number. The System Software Version number is
displayed at the top right side of the MFD Power-up page. DA 40 F
requires System Software Version 0369.07 or later FAA approved software.
System Software Garmln GlOOO Cockpit Reference Guide (CRG)
Version revision
PIN 190-00324-00, dated November, 2003 or later
0369.04
appropriate revision.
PIN 190-00324-0 I, dated February, 2005 or later
0369.06
appropriate revision.
0369.07 PIN 190-00324-03, dated Jw>e, 2005 or later
0369.08 appropriate revision.
PiN 190-00324-04, Revision A or later appropriate

0369.09
revision.
2. The G1000 mstallation m the DA 40 requrres the followmg or later FAA
approved LRU software versions. Approved LRU software versions are
referenced to the System Software Version number. DA 40 F requires
System Software Version 0369.07 or later FAA approved software.
LRU Software Version
LRU
0369.04 0369.06 0369.07 0369.08 & 0369.09
COM I &2 7.00 7.00 7.00 7.00
GDC1 2.02 2.05 2.05 2.05
GEA I 2.02 2.04 2.04 2.04
GIA I &2 2.01 2.06 2.06 3.01
GMAI 2.03 2.07 2.07 2.08
GMUI 2.01 2.01 2.01 2.01
GPS I &2 3.01 2.01 3.01 3.01
GRS I 2.01 2.03 2.03 2.03
GS I &2 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00
GTX I 3.06 4.01 4.01 4.01
MFDI 2.02 4.04 4.06 5.02
L NAY 1 &2
PFD I
GDL
4.00
2.02
4.00
4.04
4.00
4.06
4.00
5.02
2.14

DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
The system's databases and System Software Version number are displayed
on the MFD Power-up page immediately after system power-up and must
be acknowledged. The LRU software versions can be verified on the AUX
group sub-page 5, "AUX- SYSTEM STATUS" along with the system's
databases.
3. IFR enroute, oceanic and terminal navigation predicated upon the G I 000
GPS Receiver is prohibited unless the pilot verifies the currency of the
database or verifies each selected waypoint for accuracy by reference to
current approved data.
4. Instrument approach navigation predicated upon the G I 000 GPS Receiver
must be accomplished in accordance with approved instrument approach
procedures that are retrieved from the GPS equipment database. The GPS
equipment database must incorporate the current update cycle.
NOTE
Not all published approaches are in the FMS database. The pilot must
ensure that the planned approach is in the database.
(a) Instrument approaches utilizing the GPS receiver must be conducted in
)
the approach mode and Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
(RAIM) must be available at the Final Approach Fix.
(b) Accomplishment of ILS, LOC, LOC-BC, LOA, SDF, MLS or any
other type of approach not approved for GPS overlay with the G I 000
GPS receiver is not authorized.
(c) Use of the GIOOO VORIILS receiver to fly approaches not approved
for GPS require VORIILS navigation data to be present on the display.
(d) Vertical Navigation information may be utilized for advisory
information only. Use of Vertical Navigation information for
Instrument Approach Procedures does not guarantee step-down fix
altitude protection, or arrival at approach minimums in normal position
to land.
(e) IFR non-precision approach approval is limited to published
approaches within the U.S. National Airspace System. Approaches to
airports in other airspace are not approved unless authorized by the
appropriate governing authority.
(f) RNAV (GPS) approaches must be conducted utilizing the GPS sensor.
(g) When conducting missed approach procedures, autopilot (if installed)
coupled operation is prohibited until the pilot has established a rate of
climb that ensures all altitude requirements of the procedure will be
met.
(b) RNP RNA V operations are not authorized, except as noted in item 4 of
J
Section I of this AFMS.

'r .
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
5. If not previously defined, the following default settings must be made in the
"SYSTEM SETUP" menu of the G I 000 prior to operation (refer to Pilot's
Guide for procedure if necessary):
(a) DIS, SPD ........... /A ~ (sets navigation units to "nautical miles" and
"knots")
(b) ALT, VS .......... ..ft fjlm (sets altitude units to "feet" and "feet per
minute")
(c) MAP DATUM .. WGS 84 (sets map datum to WGS-84, see note
below)
(d) POSITION ......... deg-min (sets navigation grid units to degree-
minutes)
NOTE
In some areas outside the United States, datums other than WGS-84 or
NAD-83 may be used. If the G I 000 is authorized for use by the appropriate
( Airworthiness authority, the required geodetic datum must be set in the

G I 000 prior to its use for navigation.
6. Operation is prohibited north of 70°N and south of 70°S latitudes. In
addition, operation is prohibited in the following two regions: I) north of
65°N between 75°W and 120°W longitude and 2) south of 55°S between
120°E and 165°E longitude.
7. CDI sequencing of the ILS must be set to manual for instrument approaches
conducted with the autopilot coupled (if installed). If the CDI source is
changed when the autopilot is engaged in NAV mode, the autopilot lateral
mode will revert to ROLL ATIITUDE mode and NAV mode must be
manually reselected by the pilot.
8. The fuel quantity, fuel required, and fuel remaining functions of the FMS
are supplemental information only and must be verified by the flight crew.
9. The pilot's altimeter is the primary altitude reference during all operations
using advisory vertical navigation information.
10. If a KAP 140 autopilot is installed, autopilot-coupled ILS, LOC, LOA, and
Back Course approaches are prohibited with direct crosswinds greater than
I 5 knots with greater than light turbulence.
II. Navigation must not be predicated upon the use of the Terrain or Obstacle
data displayed by the G I 000.

FAA APPROVED Page II of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
NOTE: The terrain display Is intended to serve as a situational

awareness tool only. It may not provide either the accuracy or
fidelity, or both, on which to solely base decisions and plan
maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles.
12. The Terrain/Obstacle/Airport databases have an area of coverage as
detailed below:
(a) The Terrain Database has an area of coverage from North 75° Latitude
to South 60" Latitude in all longitudes.
(b) The Airport Terrain Database has an area of coverage that includes the
United States, Canada, Mexico, Latin America, and South America.
(c) The Obstacle Database has an area of coverage that includes the United
States.
NOTE: The area of coverage may be modified, as additional terrain

data sources become available.
13. The ADF aural identifier must be monitored any time the ADF is used as
the primary source of navigation.
)
14. Display ofNEXRAD information on the NAVIGATION map of the MFD,
and the inset map on the PFD, is prohibited for ranges of 30 NM or less,
except in North Up display mode.
2.3 AIRSPEED MARKINGS
Markin!! lAS Sl!!nlficance

Low speed awareness - stall is
Red band 20 KIAS - 53 KIAS
imminent
Low speed awareness - reduced
Yellow band 53 KIAS -58 KIAS
airsneed marl!in to stall
Operating range with flaps fully
White band 58 KIAS - 91 KIAS
extended
Green band 58 KIAS - 129 KIAS Normal operating range
Yellow band 129 KIAS- 178 KIAS Caution range -smooth air only
Lower limit of 178 KIAS is the
Red band 178 KIAS and greater
maximum speed for all operations
The airspeed indicator is marked in IAS values.

DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
2.5 ENGINE INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
Engine instrument markings and their color code significance are shown in the
table below.
NOTE
When an indication lies in the upper or lower prohibited range, the legend
for that display will change to the color of the prohibited range and will
begin flashing as well.
Red arc Yellow Green arc Yellow Red arc
or bar arc or or bar arc or or bar
= bar = bar =
Lower = Normal = Upper
prohibite Caution operating Caution prohibite
Indication d range range range range d range
Manifold
Pressure
-- -- 13-30 -- --
(
ln.-Hg
*Note2*
>2700
RPM -- -- 500-2700 -- *Note3*
Oil Temp 231-
·F - -- 149-230
245
>245
Cylinder Head
476-
Temp -- -- 150-475
500
>500
•F
Fuel Press PSI
0 ... 14 _.. 14 ... 35 ..
(DA40) >35
•Note 4*
Oil Press
0-25 25-55 56-95 96-97 >97
PSI
Fuel flow
Gal/hr -- -- 1-20 -- >20
Voltage
0-24.1 24.1-25 25.1 -30 30.1-32 >32
Volts
Amperage
Amps
-- -- 2-75 -- --
Fuel quantity
US gal
Standard
0 -- <0-17 -- --
Tanks
Fuel quantity
US gal <0-16
Long Range
0 -- 19-24
-- --
Tanks

DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
Note 2: Not applicable to DA 40 F. Manifold Pressure gauge is not installed in
theDA40 F.
Note 3: To prevent nuisance alerts during normal takeoffs, the legend "RPM"
and digits will not turn red or flash until the RPM exceeds 2780.
Note 4: Fuel I'ressure Gauge is optional for DA 40 aircraft.
2.6 W ARNJNG. CAUTION AND STATUS MESSAGES

The following tables show the color and significance of the warning, caution,
and advisory messages which may appear on the G I 000 displays.
NOTE
The G1 000 Cockpit Reference Guide and the G1 000 Pilot's Guide contain
detailed descriptions of the annunciator system and all warnings, cautions
and advisories.
Annunciation
OILPRESLO
Warning annunciations -Red
Cause
Oil pressure is less than 25 psi
)
FUEL PRES LO (DA40 Only) Fuel pressure is less than 14 psi
FUELPRESHI(DA400ru~ Fuel pressure is greater than 35 psi
ALTERNATOR Alternator fililure
Operation of the starter without the key in
the start position, or failure of the starter
STARTERENGD
motor to disengage from the engine after
starti01!
Front canopy and/or rear door not
DOOR OPEN
completely closed and locked
Failure of the automatic trim system of the
TRIM FAIL
autopilot (if installed)
Caution annunciations- Yellow
Annunciation Cause
PITOTOFF Pitot heat is not switched on
PITOTFAIL Fault in the pitot heating system
Fuel quantity in the left tank is less than 3
LFUELLOW
US gal (_+! US gal)
Fuel quantity in the right tank is less than 3
RFUELLOW
US gal (_+I US gal)
LOW VOLTS On-board voltal!e below 24 volts
J
FAA APPROVED Page 14of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
Advisory annundatlons -White
Annunciation Cause
PFDFANFAIL The coolin~ fan for the PFD is inoperative.
MFDFANFAIL The coolin~ fan for the MFD is inoperative.
GIAFANFAIL The cooling fan for the GIA is inoperative.

Minimum operational equipment (serviceable)
Number VFR VFR

Equipment Installed Day Nig_ht IFR
Primary Flight Display I I I I
Multi-Function Display I I I I
( Audio panel
Air data computer
Attitude and Heading Reference
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Svstem
I - I I
Static dischargers 7 - - 7
GPS 2 - I 2
2.14FUEL
Fuel Quantity: Total fuel quantity:

Standard Tanks: 2 x 20.6 US gal (approx. !56 liters)
Long Range Tanks: 2 x 24.0 US gal (approx. 185 liters)
Unusable fuel: 2 x 0.5 US gal (approx. 3.8 liters)
Max. Indicated Fuel Quantity:

Standard Tanks: 17 US gal per tank
Long Range Tanks: 24.0 US gal per tank

between right and left tank:
Standard Tanks: 10 US gal (approx. 38liters)
Long Range Tanks: 8 US gal (approx. 30.3 liters)

DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
2.15 Limitation Placard
Below the MFD, next to the fuel quantity indication:
Standard Tanks

Max. difference LHIRH tank: I 0 US gal
Long Range Tanks

Refer to AFM to use entire tank capacity
Max. difference LHIRH tank: 8 US gal
'J
r
~ . FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
SECTIONUI
GENERAL
I. If Gannin G1 000 GPS navigation information is not available or invalid,
utilize remaining operational navigation equipment as required.
2. If the "POSN ERROR" annunciation is displayed the system will flag and
no longer provide GPS based navigational guidance. The crew should
revert to the G I 000 VORIILS receivers or an alternate means of navigation
other than the GlOOO GPS receivers.
3. lf the "RAIM UNAVAIL" annunciation is displayed in the enroute,
oceanic, terminal, or initial approach phase of flight, continue to navigate
using the GPS equipment or revert to an alternate means of navigation other
than the G I 000 GPS receiver appropriate to the route and phase of flight.
When continuing to use GPS navigation, position must be verified every 15
c
minutes using the G 1000 VOR/lLS receiver or another IFR-approved
navigation system.
4. If the "RAIM UNAVAIL" annunciation is displayed while on the final
approach segment, GPS based navigation will continue for up to 5 minutes
with approach CD! sensitivity (0.3 nautical mile). After 5 minutes the
system will flag and no longer provide course guidance with approach
sensitivity. Missed approach course guidance may still be available with I
nautical mile CDI sensitivity and integrity by executing the missed
approach.
5. In an in-flight emergency, depressing and holding the Com transfer button
for 2 seconds will tune the emergency frequency of 121.500 MHz. Ifthe
display is available, it will also show it in the "Active" frequency window.
6. The following warnings and cautions appear in various locations on the
PFDorMFD.

Page 17of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
Annunciation Cause
AHRS Aligning - Keep Attitude and Heading Reference System is aligning.
Win~ Level Keep wings level using standby attitude indicator.
ATTITUDE FAIL Display system is not receiving attitude reference
information from the AHRS; accompanied by the
removal of sky/ground presentation and a red X over
the attitude area.
AIRSPEED FAIL Display system is not receiving airspeed input from
the air data computer; accompanied by a red X
through the airspeed display
ALTITUDE FAIL Display system is not receiving altitude input from the
air data computer; accompanied by a red X through
the altimeter disolav
VERT SPEED FAIL Display system is not receiving vertical speed input
from the air data computer; accompanied by a red X
throu~ the vertical speed display
HOG Display system is not receiving valid heading input
from the AHRS; accompanied by a red X through the
digital heading display )
Red X A red X through any display field, such as com
frequencies, nav frequencies, or engine data, indicates
that display field is not receiving valid data.
INTEG RAIM is not available.
WARN RAIM position warning- nav deviation bar removed
(h) High Fuel Flow- (DA 40 only)
Fuel flow in red sector

I. Fuel pressure .................................... check for red FUEL PRESS LO message
• If fuel pressure is low (FUEL PRESS LO message), there is possibly a
leak (between the injection system and the injectors). Land at the
nearest available airport.
If there is no FUEL PRESS LO message, there is no leak; the likely
cause is a defective fuel flow indication, which should thus be ignored
(the airplane should be serviced). Fuel flow data should be taken from
the engine performance table in Chapter 5 of the AFM.

Page 18 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
(g) High Fuel Flow- (DA 40 F only)

I. Fuel Quantity .................................................................. Check and Monitor
2. Power Setting ...................................................................................... Check
Land as soon as practical. Consider the reduced range and endurance due to
possible loss of fuel.
NOTE
Have the airplane inspected before next flight.

(b) Electrical fire with smoke in flight
3. Emergency switch ......................................................................... ON if installed

CAUTION
Switching OFF the master switch (ALT/BAT) will lead to total loss of all
electronic and electric equipment, including the AHRS and attitude display.
However, by switching the HORIZON EMERGENCY switch ON, the
emergency battery will supply power to the standby attitude gyro (artificial
horizon) and the flood light.
In case of extreme smoke development, the front canopy may be unlatched
during flight. This allows it to partially open, in order to improve ventilation.
The canopy will remain open in this position. Flight characteristics will not be
affected significantly.
4. Master switch (ALT/BAT) ........................................................................... OFF
5. Cabin heat ..................................................................................................... OFF
6. Emergency window(s) ............................................................................... OPEN
7. Use standby instruments for airspeed, altitude and attitude reference, if
necessary
If electronic or avionics equipment is required for continued flight, the
following procedure may be used to isolate the source of the smoke or
fumes:
7. BATtery switch .............................................................................................. ON
8. ESS BUS switch .................................... ~ ....................................................... ON

Page 19 of41
GARMIN G!OOO INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
NOTE
This removes power from the main and avionics busses, but does not allow
alternator operation. See the table at the end of this section for the
equipment which is still available.
If smoke or fumes decrease:
If smoke or fumes persist:
II. ESS BUS switch ........................................................................................... OFF
12. BATT and ESS TIE circuit breakers ......................................................... PULL
This removes power from the essential bus and
restores power to the main and avionics busses. See
the table at the end of this section for the equipment
which will still be available.
13. Use standby instruments for attitude, airspeed and altitude
14. Refer to Section 3.7.2 (b) of this Supplement, Alternator Failure
)
The equipment available on Essential Bus only (operating on battery only and
the Essential Bus switch selected) is:
Air Data Computer (airspeed, altitude, vertical speed, OAT, TAS)
Attitude and Heading Reference System (attitude, heading)
PFD (in composite mode)
PitotHeat
Flaps
Com 1
GPS/Nav 1
Transponder
Landing light
Instrument flood lights
Engine instruments
Starter
Refer to the "Essential Bus" area of the circuit breaker panel for a quick
reference to equipment on the Essential Bus.
Equipment available on the Main and Avionics Busses only:
Com2
GPS/Nav2
MFD
Electric fuel pump
Instrument lights
Strobe lights

Page 20 of41
r .
I
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
Position lights
Taxi light
Refer to the "Maio Bus" and "Avionics Bus" areas of the circuit breaker panel
for a quick reference to equipment on those busses.
3.7.1 ICING
Uniotentional flight ioto iciog conditions
I. Leave the iciog area (by changiog altitude or turniog back, in order to reach
zones with a higher ambient temperature).
2. Pitot heatiog ................................................................................................... ON
3. Cabio heat ....................................................................................................... ON
4. Air distribution lever................................................................................. ~(UP)
5. RPM ................................................................... iocrease, io order to prevent ice
build-up on the propeller blades
c
6. Alternate Air (DA 40 only) ....................................................................... OPEN
6a Carburetor Heat (DA 40 F only) ................................................................ HOT
7. Emergency window(s) ................................................................ open if required
CAUTION
Ice build-up iocreases the stalliog speed. If required for safety reasons,
engioe speeds up to 2700 RPM are permissible without time limit.
8. ATC .............................................................. advise if an emergency is expected
CAUTION
When the pitot heating fails (yellow PITOT FAIL annunciation), and the
alternate static valve is iostalled:
9. Alternate static valve ............................................................................... OPEN
I 0. Emergency wiodow(s) .............................................................................. close

Page 21 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
3.7.2 FAILURES IN THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

(b) Alternator failure
An alternator failure is indicated by a red ALTERNATOR message and an

ammeter indication ofO Amps.
I. Circuit breakers ...................................................................................... Check in
2. ALTernator switch ........................................................................ OFF, then ON
If alternator does not come back on line (message extinguishes and ammeter
indication greater than zero):
3. ESS BUS switch ............................................................................................ ON
4. Switch off any non-essential electrical loads.
5. Land within 30 minutes
IfPFD attitude information is lost prior to landing:
6. HORIZON EMERGENCY Switch................................................................ ON
CAUTION
The following items are available on the Essential Bus: )
• PFD in composite (backup) format
• NAY/COM I
• GPS I
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
• Air Data Computer
• Pitot heat
• Engine instruments
Transponder
• Flood light
• Landing light
Refer to the ESSENTIAL BUS area of the circuit breaker panel for a
quick reference to equipment on those busses. These items of equipment
can be supplied with power by the battery for at least 30 minutes.
During this 30-minute period, the airplane must be landed at a suitable
airport. Economical use of electrical equipment, in particular of pitot
heat, and switching off equipment that is not needed extends the time
during which the other equipment remains available.
J
Page 22 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
For cases in which the battery capacity is not sufficient to reach a

suitable airport, an emergency battery is installed to power the standby
attitude gyro and floodlight. This battery is switched on with the
HORIZON EMERGENCY Switch. It provides power for I hour and 30
minutes when the floodlight is switched on.
3.8 AVIONICS EMERGENCIES
3.8.1 PFD OR MFD DISPLAY F AlLURE
a) DISPLAY BACKUP button on audio panel... ...................................... PUSH

3.8.2 AHRS FAILURE
( NOTE
A failure of the Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) is
indicated by removal of the sky/ground presentation and a red X and a
yellow "AHRS FAILURE" shown on the PFD. The digital heading
presentation will be replaced with a yellow "HOG" and the compass rose
digits will be removed. The course pointer will indicate straight up and
course may be set using the digital window.
I. Use Standby Attitude Indicator, magnetic compass and Navigation Map
2. Course .......................................................................... Set using digital window
3.8.3 AIR DATA COMPUTER fADC) FAILURE

NOTE
Complete loss of the Air Data Computer is indicated by a red X and yellow
text over the airspeed, altimeter, vertical speed, TAS and OAT displays.
Some FMS functions, such as true airspeed and wind calculations, will also
be lost.
I. Use Standby Airspeed Indicator and Altimeter
2. Land as soon as practical at a suitable airport

Page 23 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
3.8.4 ERRONEOUS OR LOSS OF ENGINE AND FUEL DISPLAYS
NOTE
Loss of an engine parameter is indicated by a red X through the data
field. Erroneous information may be identified by indications that do
not agree with other system information. Erroneous indications may be
determined by comparing a display with other displays and other
system information.
I. Set power based on throttle lever position, engine noise, and speed.
2. Monitor other indications to determine the health of the engine.
3. Use known power settings from Table 5.3.2 (DA 40) or Charts 5.3.8 (DA
40 F) of AFM for approximate fuel flow values.
4. Use other system information, such as annunciator messages, ENGINE

SYSTEM page, and AUX - TRIP PLANNING page to safely complete the
flight. )
3.8.5 ERRONEOUS OR LOSS OF W ARNINGICAUTION
ANNUNCIATORS
NOTE
Loss of an annunciator may be indicated when engine or fuel displays show
an abnormal or emergency situation and the annunciator is not present. An
erroneous annunciator may be identified when an annunciator appears
which does not agree with other displays or system information.
I. If an annunciator appears, treat it as if the condition exists. Refer to the
AFM Emergency or Abnormal procedures or the procedures contained in
this AFMS.
2. If a display indicates an abnormal condition but no annunciator is present,

use other system information, such as engine displays, ENGINE SYSTEM
page, GAL REM and FFLOW GPH displays, to determine if the condition
exists. If it cannot be determined that the condition does not exist, treat the
situation as if the condition exists. Refer to the AFM Emergency or
Abnormal procedures or the procedures contained in this AFMS.

Page 24 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
SECTION IVA
NO~LPROCEDURES
WARNING
The G1 000 altitude references (digits and altimeter bug) are included to
increase altitude awareness, and are not connected in any way to the K.AP
140 autopilot (if installed). Altitude alerter and autopilot functions are
accomplished with the altitude set function of the K.AP 140 autopilot if
installed.
NOTE
Readability of the PFD and MFD displays may be degraded when wearing
polarized sunglasses.
c I. DETAILED OPERATING PROCEDURES

Normal operating procedures for the G I 000 are described in the Garmin
G I 000 Cockpit Reference Guide and the Garmin G I 000 Pilot's Guide.
PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTION
I. Cabin check
a) MET, NAV, Mass & CG ............................................. flight planning complete
b) Airplane documents ...................................................... complete and up-to-date
c) Ignition key .......................................................................................... pulled out
d) Front canopy & rear door ....................................................... clean, undamaged
e) All electrical equipment ................................................................................ OFF
f) Circuit breakers .............................. set in (if one has been pulled, check reason)
g) Engine control levers ............................ check condition, freedom of movement
Full travel of throttle,
Full Travel of RPM (DA 40 only)
Full Travel of mixture lever
h) Throttle ....................................................................................................... IDLE
i) Mixture control lever ................................................................................ LEAN
j) RPM lever (DA 40 only) .................................................................. HIGH RPM
k) Carburetor Heat (DA 40 F only) .............................................................. COLD
I) Master switch (BAT) ..................................................................................... ON
m) Fuel Quantity .................................................................... check fuel qty. on EIS
check with fuel qty. measuring device
L
Page 25 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
NOTE
FOR STANDARD TANKS, when the fuel quantity indicator

reads 17 US gal the correct fuel quantity must be determined with the
fuel quantity measuring device. If this measurement is not carried out,
the fuel quantity available for flight planning is 17 US gal.
FOR LONG RANGE TANKS, when the fuel indicator reads
16 US gal the correct fuel quantity must be determined with the fuel
quantity measuring device. There are 3 US gal of ungauged fuel from
16 to 19 US gal. If this measurement is not carried out, the fuel
quantity available for flight planning is 16 US gal.
n) Position lights, strobe light (ACL's) ........................................................... check

o) Master switch (BAT) .................................................................................... OFF
p) Check for loose items ............................................................................ complete
q) Flight controls and trim................................................. free to move and correct
r) Baggage .................................................................................. stowed and secure )
NOTE
Refer to DA 40 and DA 40 F AFMs to complete the Walk-around check, visual
inspection

I. Preflight inspection ............................................................................... Complete
2. Rudder pedals ..................................................................... Adjusted and locked
3. Passengers ............................................................................................ Instructed
4. Safety Harnesses ................................................................... All on and fastened
5. Rear door ................................................................................ Closed and locked
6. Door lock (if installed) ................................................. Unblocked, key removed
7. Front canopy ....................................................... Position I or 2 ("cooling gap'')
8. Canopy lock (if installed) ............................................ Unblocked, key removed
9. Parking brake .................................................................................................. Set
10. Flight controls ................................. Freedom of movement and proper direction
II. Trim wheel ..................................................................................................... T/0
12. Friction device, throttle quadrant.. ......................................................... Adjusted
13. Throttle ....................................................................................................... IDLE
14. Mixture control lever ................................................................................ LEAN
15.
16.
17.
RPM lever (DA 40 only) ................................................................. HIGH RPM
Carburetor heat (DA 40 F only) ............................................................... COLD
Alternate air (DA40 only) .................................................................... CLOSED
J
18. Alternate Static Valve ........................................................ CLOSED, if installed

Page 26 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
19. Avionics master switch ................................................................................. OFF

20. Essential Bus switch ..................................................................................... OFF
CAUTION
When the essential bus is switched ON, the battery will not be charged.
21. BATtery switch ............................................................................................. ON
22. Fuel tank selector .......................................................................... on fullest tank
WARNING
Never move the propeller by hand while the ignition is switched on, as it
may result in serious personal injury.

Page 27 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
STARTING ENGINE fDA 40 only)

(lU Cold engine
4. Mixture control lever ........................................ RICH for 3 - 5 sec, then LEAN
5. Throttle! em (0.4 in) forward from ........................................................... IDLE
WARNING
CAUTION
l,)
CAUTION
below ooc (32°F), to reduce wear and abuse to the engine and electrical
When engine starts:
WARNING
10. Ammeter .................................................................................................... Check
12. Aonunciator section ofPFD ...................................................................... Check

Page 28 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
{hl Warm engine

I. Strobelight(ACL) ......................................................................................... ON
(~functional check of pump)
4. Mixture control lever ......................................... RICH for I - 3 sec, then LEAN
WARNING
CAUTION
( S.
Ignition switch ........................................................................................ START
When engine starts:
6. Mixture control lever ................................ ,....................... rapidly move to RICH
7. Oil pressure ...................................................................... green arc within IS sec
WARNING
If the oil pressure has not moved into the green arc within IS seconds after
10. Ammeter .................................................................................................... Check
12. Annunciator section of PFD ...................................................................... Check

Page 29 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
{£) Engine will not start after injection ("flooded engine") Warm engine
(=Functional check of pump)
3. Mixture control lever .................................................................. LEAN, fully aft
4. Throttle ........................................................................................ at mid position
WARNING
CAUTION
5.
6.
Ignition switch ........................................................................................ START
Throttle ........................................... pull back towards IDLE when engine starts
)
When engine starts:
WARNING
10. Ammeter .................................................................................................... Cbeck

Page 30 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
STARTING ENGINE IDA 40 F only)

{11 Cold engine

4. Throttle ...... V. travel forward from IDLE
oooooooooooooo . . . . . . . . oo . . oooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo•
5. Prime I - 4 seconds (electric pump)

0000000000000000 0000 00000000 . . . . ooooOOoooooooooooooooooo 0000 00000000.
WARNING
Use the primer system to prepare the engine for a starting attempt. Do not
use the throttle to pump fuel through the carburetor to the engine for
priming since this may lead to carburetor fire. The primer system delivers
fuel to the cylinders directly.
CAUTION
( The priming system is not intended for operation in flight.
WARNING
CAUTION
than 10 seconds. After operating the starter motor, let it cool off for 20
CAUTION
below 0°C (32°F), to reduce wear and abuse to the engine and electrical
6. Starter 00 000000000 oooooo• 00000 00 . . . . . . . . . . 00 . . 00. 0000000000000 00000 000 0000000 oooooooooooooooooooooooo . . . . . . . oo. engage

Page31 of41
GARMIN Gl 000 INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
When engine starts:

8. Throttle .......................................................................................... set 1000 RPM
WARNING
10. ALTematorswitch ......................................................................................... ON
II. Ammeter .................................................................................................... Check
{!U Warm engine
I. Strobe light(ACL) ......................................................................................... ON
4.
Throttle ................................................................... Y. travel forward from IDLE )
WARNING
CAUTION
5. Starter........................................................................................................ engage
When engine starts:

7. Throttle .......................................................................................... set 1000 RPM
WARNING
10. Ammeter .................................................................................................... Check
II. Annunciator section ofPFD ...................................................................... Check

Page 32 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
(£} Engine will not start after priming ("flooded engine")

3. Mixture ...................................................................................... LEAN, fully aft
4. Throttle ............................................................................................. MAX PWR
WARNING
CAUTION
( 5. Starter ........................................................................................................ engage
When engine starts:

6. Throttle ............................................. pull back towards IDLE when engine fires
WARNING
8. Throttle ......................................................................................... set 1000 RPM
I 0. Ammeter .................................................................................................... Check

Page 33 of41
GARMIN G1 000 INTEGRATED AVIONICS SYSTEM
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
BEFORE TAXIING
I. Avionics master switch .................................................................................. ON
2. Electrical equipment ..................................................................... On as required
3. Flaps ............................................................................... UP- T/0- LOG- T/0
4. Flight instruments and avionics ............................. set, test function, as required
5. (set both altimeters)
6. Flood light.. ........................................................... ON, test function, as required
7. Ammeter ........................................................... check, if required increase RPM
8. Fuel tank selector ........................................... change tanks, confirm that engine
also runs on other tank (at least I
minute at 1500 RPM)
9. Pitotheating ........................................................................... ON, test function-
no yellow PITOT FAIL annunciation
10. Pitot heating ............................................................. OFF if not required (yellow
PITOT OFF annunciation)
II. Strobe lights (ACLs) ..................................................... check ON, test function,
12. Position lights, landing and taxi lights .................. ON, test function, as required
as required
)
CAUTION
When taxiing at close range to other aircraft, or during night flight in
clouds, fog or haze, the strobe lights should be switched OFF. The
position lights must always be switched ON during night flight.
13. Throttle .......................................................................... check, 600 to 800 RPM
BEFORE TAKE-OFF
I. Position airplane into wind if possible

2. Parking brake ................................................................................................... set
3. Safety harnesses .......................................................................... on and fastened
4. Rear door ...................................................................... check closed and locked
5. Front canopy ............................................................................ closed and locked
CAUTION
When operating the canopy, pilots I operators must ensure that there
are no obstructions between the canopy and the mating frame, for
example seat belts, clothing, etc. When operating the locking handle
do NOT apply undue force.
A slight downward pressure on the canopy may be required to ease the
handle operation.
6. Door warning light (DOOR OPEN) .................. Check no messages illuminated

Page 34 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
7. Fuel tank selector ..............................................:................................ fullest tank

8. Engine instruments ....................................................................... in green sector
9. Circuit breakers .................................................................................... pressed in
I 0. Fuel pressure ...................................................... Check no messages illuminated
II. Electric fuel pump .......................................................................................... ON
12. Mixture control lever ........................................................ RICH (below 5000 ft)
NOTE
temperatures, a fully rich mixture can cause rough running of
the engine or a loss of performance. The mixture should be
set for smooth running engine.
13. Flaps .................................................................................................... check T/0
( 14.
15.
16.
Trim .................................................................................................... check T/0
Flight controls ........................................................ free movement, correct sense
Throttle ................................................................................ 2000 RPM (DA 40)
1800 RPM (DA 40 F)
17. Magneto check ...................................................................... L-BOTH-R-BOTH
Max. RPM drop ......... .175 RPM
Max. difference ............ .50 RPM
CAUTION
The lack of an RPM drop suggests a faulty ground or incorrect
ignition timing. In case of doubt the magneto check can be repeated
with a leaner mixture, in order to confirm a problem. Even when
running on only one magneto the engine should not run unduly
roughly.
18. RPM lever (DA 40 only) ...................................... pull back until a drop of max.
500 RPM is reached- HIGH RPM;
Cycle 3 times

Page 35 of41
FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT ~I
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
!Sa Carburetor Heat (DA 40 F only) ................................................... check function

18b Throttle (DA 40 F only) ................................ MAX PWR, minimum 2200 RPM
NOTE (DA 40 F only)

The resnlt of the ground check at full throttle depends on a
number of environmental factors, e.g. temperature, ambient air
pressure and in particular head or tailwind components.
Headwind will cause a higher RPM than tailwind.
19. Throttle....................................................................................... set I 000 RPM

20. Carburetor Heat (DA 40 F only) .................................................. check COLD
21. Alternate Air(DA 40 only) ..................................................... check CLOSED
22. Parking brake ......................................................................................... release
23. Landing light ............................................................................. ON as required
J
Page36 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
SECTIONIVB
ABNO~PROCEDURES

(a) Low yoJtage caution <LOW VOLTS)
This caution is indicated when the normal on-board (bus) voltage (28V) drops
below24V.
-A fault in the power supply
-RPM is too low
(i) Low voltage on the ground:
I. Engine speed ....................................................................................... 1200 RPM
2. Electrical equipment ..................................................................................... OFF
( 3. Ammeter and voltmeter .............................................................................. check

If the caution message does not extinguish, and the animeter legend flashes and
reads zero, discontinue the flight.
(ii) Low voltage caution during flight:
1. Electrical equipment ............................................................... OFF if not needed
2. Ammeter and Voltmeter ............................................................................. check
If the caution message does not go out, and the ammeter legend flashes and
reads zero, follow procedure 3.7.2(b) - Alternator Failure, in this Supplement.
(iii) Low voltage caution during landing:
-Follow (i) after landing
SECTIONV
PERFORMANCE
No change.
SECTION VI
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
See current weight and balance data.

Page 37 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
SECTION VII
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
The Gannin G I 000 Integrated Avionics System consists of a Primmy Flight

Display (PFD), a Multi-Function Display (MFD), an Audio Panel, and Attitude
and Heading Reference System (AHRS), an Air Data Computer (ADC), and the
sensors and computers to process flight and engine information for display to
the pilot. The system contains dual GPS receivers, dual VOR/ILS receivers,
dual VHF communications transceivers, a transponder, an Automatic Direction
Finder (ADF) receiver, Distance Measuring Equipment (DME), and an
integrated annunciation system to alert the pilot of certain abnormal conditions.
The Primmy Flight Display (PFD) typically displays airspeed, attitude, altitude,
and heading information in a traditional format. Slip information is shown as a
trapezoid under the bank pointer. One width of the trapezoid is equal to a one
ball width slip. Rate of tum information is shown on the scale above the
compass rose; full scale deflection is equal to a standard rate tum. The
following controls are available on the PFD (clockwise from top right):
• Communications frequency volume and squelch knob )
Communications frequency set knobs
Communications frequency transfer button
• Altimeter setting knob (baro set)
• Course knob
• Map range knob and cursor control
FMS control buttons and knob
• PFD softkey buttons, including master warning/caution acknowledgement
• Altitude reference set knob
• Heading bug control
• Navigation frequency transfer button
• Navigation frequency set knobs
Navigation frequency volume and Identifier knob
The PFD displays the crew alerting (annunciator) system. When a warning or
caution message is received, a warning or caution annunciator will flash on the
PFD, accompanied by an aural tone. A warning is accompanied by a repeating
tone, and a caution 'is accompanied by a single tone. Acknowledging the alert
will cancel the flashing and provide a text description of the message. Refer to
the Emergency or Abnormal Procedures Sections of the AFM or this
Supplement for the appropriate procedure to follow for each message.
Advisory messages related to G I 000 system status are shown in white and are
accompanied by a white flashing ADVISORY alert. Refer to the GIOOO Pilot's
Guide and Cockpit Reference Guide for descriptions of the messages and
recommended actions (if applicable).

Page 38 of41
I
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
Trend vectors are shown on the airspeed and altimeter displays as a magenta
line predicting 6 seconds at the current rate. The turn rate indicator also
functions as a trend indicator on the compass scale.
The PFD can be displayed in a composite format for emergency use by pressing
the DISPLAY BACKUP button on the audio panel. In the composite mode, the
full crew alerting function remains, but no map functions are available.
The Multi-Function Display (MFD) typically displays engine data, maps,
terrain, traffic and topography displays, and flight planning and progress
information. The display unit is identical to the PFD and contains the same
controls as previously listed.
The audio panel contains traditional transmitter and receiver selectors, as well as
an integral intercom and marker beacon system. The marker beacon lights
appear on the PFD. In addition, a clearance recorder records the last 2 Y,
minutes of received audio. Lights above the selections indicate what selections
are active. Pressing the red DISPLAY BACKUP button on the audio panel
( causes both the PFD and MFD to display a composite mode.

The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) uses GPS, rate sensors, air
data, and magnetic variation to determine pitch and roll attitude, sideslip and
heading. Operation is possible in a degraded mode if the system loses any of
these inputs. Status messages alert the crew of the loss of any of these inputs.
The AHRS will align while the aircraft is in motion, but will align more quickly
ifthe wings are kept level during the alignment process.
The Air Data Computer (ADC) provides airspeed, altitude, vertical speed, and
air temperature to the display system. In addition to the primary displays, this
information is used by the FMS and TIS systems.
Engine instruments are displayed on the MFD. Discrete engine sensor

information is processed by the Garmin Engine Airframe (GEA) sub-system.
When an engine sensor indicates a value outside the normal operating range, the
legend will tum yellow for caution range, and tum red and flash for warning
range.
L
Page 39 of41
FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT .·~
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
Refer to the Garmin Gl 000 Cockpit Reference Guide for descriptions of the
G I 000 system and operating procedures. Refer to the following table to
determine the appropriate guide. The System Software Version number is
displayed at the top, right side of the MFD Power-up page. DA 40 F requires
System Software Version 0369.07 or later FAA approved software.
System Software
Pilot's Guides
Version
Garmin GlOOO Cockpit Reference Guide (CRG)
0369.04 PIN 190-00324-00, dated May, 2004 or later
appropriate revision
Garmin GlOOO Cockpit Reference Guide (CRG)
0369.06 PIN 190-00324-01, dated February, 2005 or later
appropriate revision
0369.07 Garmin GlOOO Cockpit Reference Guide (CRG)

PIN 190-00324-03, dated June, 2005 or later
)
0369.08 appropriate revision
Garmln GlOOO Cockpit Refenuce Guide (CRG)
0369.09 l'/N 190-00324·04, Revision A or later appropriate
revision.
J
Page 40 of41
DIAMOND MODEL DA 40
7.10 FUEL SYSTEM

Fuel Ouantitv Indication
Each fuel tank has a capacity probe that ascertains fuel quantity in that tank.
Standard Tank configurations have two fuel probes, one in each wing. Long
Range Tank configurations have four fuel probes, two in each wing, an
outboard tank and an inboard tank. When the fuel quantity indicator reads zero,
only unusable fuel remains in the tank. Usable capacity of each tank for the
Standard Tank configuration is 20 US gal (76 liters). Usable capacity of an
outboard and inboard tank for the Long Range Tank configuration is 24 US gal
(91 liters).
Fuel quantity:
Fuel quantity indicating for the Standard Tank configuration functions as
described in the DA 40 AFM. Also, refer to the 'G I 000 Pilot's Guide for the
Diamond DA 40' for additional information about the functionality of the
GIOOO's fuel quantity gauge.
( For the Long Range Tank configuration, dual pointers on a linear scale, a top
pointer for the left fuel quantity and a bottom pointer for the right fuel quantity
indicate fuel quantity. The fuel quantity gauge is marked in five gallon
increments starting at zero to 25 US gal. The break in the green band between
16 and 19 US gal shows the ungauged portion of the fuel tanks usable fuel.
When a fuel tank is completely full, the quantity pointer will indicate 24 US
gallons. As fuel is consumed from the tank, the pointer will move to the left.
Once there is no more measurable fuel in the outboard tank, the pointer migrates
over a 30 second period to the 16 US gal position. The pointer will remain at 16
US gallons while the ungauged fuel quantity is consumed. Once the quantity of
fuel remaining in the inboard tank is less than 16 gallons, the pointer will begin
moving left towards zero. When either pointer enters the amber portion of the
scale, the pointer and the gauge title, 'FUEL QTY GAL', will turn amber. When
either pointer enters the red portion of the gauge, the pointer will turn red, and
the gauge title, 'FUEL QTY GAL', will turn red and flash continuously in
inverse video.

Page41 of41
FAA APPROVED
FOR
GARMIN GFC 700 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
IN A DIAMOND DA-40 I DA40f
Reg.No. N216DG SIN 40.698
This Supplement must be attached to the FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual when the GARMIN GFC 700
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) is installed in accordance with STC# SAOI389WI.. The infonnation
contained herein supplements the infonnation of the basic Airplane flight Manual. For Limitations, Procedures and
Perfonnancc infonnation not contained in this Supplement, consult the basic Airplane Flight Manual.
FAA APPROVED
t?ln~
~argaret Kline
Manager, Aircraft Certification Office
Wichita, Kansas 67209
DATE: June 8. 2006

FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual Supplement Gannin Ltd. Or its subsidiaries
r
Gannin GFC 700 AFCS In A Diamond DA-40 I DA40F c/o Garrnin International, Inc.
1200 E. 15lu Street
Olathe. Kansas 66062 U.S A.
LOG OF REVISIONS
Revision Page FAA Date of
Number Number(s) Description Approved Approval
1 All Initial Release G.M. Baker 6-8-2006
2 AU Include DA40F in title !')]J!t fK.I_ 6-8-2006
190·00492·00 Page 2 of 17
FAA Approved Revision 2
·- ----------------------
Gannin GFC 700 AFCS In A Diamond DA-40 I DA40F c/o Garrnin International, Inc.
1200 E. 151" Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062 U.S.A.
Table of Contents
SECTION PAGE
SECTION I- GENERAL 4
SECTION II- LIMITATIONS 6
SECTION ill- EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 7
SECTION IV- NORMAL PROCEDURES 11
SECTION V- PERFORMANCE 16
SECTION VI- WEIGHT AND BALANCE 16
SECTION VII- SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS 16
SECTION Vill- HANDLING AND SERVICE 17
190-00492-00 Page 3 of!?

FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual Supplement Garrnin Ltd. Or its subsidiaries
Garmin GFC 700 AFCS In A Diamond DA-40 I DA40F c/o Garrnin International, Inc.
1200E.l5laStreet
SECTION I- GENERAL
I. The GFC 700 Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) is a 2 axis autopilot and flight director
system which provides the pilot with the following features: Altitude Preselect and Altitude
Hold (ALT); Flight Level Change with Airspeed Hold (FLC); Vertical Speed Hold (VS);
Navigation tracking for VOR (NAY) and GPS (GPS); Heading Hold (HDG); Approach mode
coupling to VOR (VAPP) or localizer (LOC) and glideslope (GS); Back Course (BC) tracking;
and Go Around (GA) pitch/roll guidance. The system consists of autopilot controls on the
Multi-Function Display (MFD}, servos with autopilot processing logic, Flight Director
processing logic in the G!As, a control stick-mounted elevator trim switch, a control stick-
mounted trim interrupt and autopilot disconnect switch, a control stick-mounted CWS (Control
Wheel Steering) switch, a throttle-mounted GA (Go-Around) switch, and PFD/MFD-mounted
altitude preselect, heading, and course knobs.
2. The GFC 700 autopilot contains an electric pitch trim system which is used by the autopilot for
automatic pitch trim during autopilot operation and by the pilot for manual electric pitch trim
when the autopilot is not engaged. The manual electric pitch trim system is operated by a split
switch on the pilot's control stick.
3. The GFC 700 autopilot and manual electric trim (MET) will not operate until the system has
satisfactorily completed a preflight test The preflight test begins automatically with initial
power application to the autopilot (AVIONIC MASTER Switch is set to the ON position).
( 4. The following conditions will cause the autopilot to automatically disconnect:

Electrical power failure
Internal autopilot system failure
AHRS malfunction
Loss of Air Data Computer information
5. The GFC 700 may be manually disconnected by any of the following means:
• Depressing the red AP DISC button on the pilot's control stick
• Moving the left (outboard) side of the manual electric trim switch on the pilot's control stick
• Pushing the AP button on the autopilot mode controller when the autopilot is engaged
• Depressing the GA button on the left side of the throttle
• Pulling the AFCS circuit breaker
• Turning off the AVIONICS MASTER switch
L • Turning off the airplane Master (ALT/BAT) switch
In addition, the CWS (control wheel steering) switch on the pilot's control stick will disconnect
the autopilot servos from the airplane flight controls as long as the CWS switch is depressed.
190-00492-00 Page 4 ofl7

FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual Supplement Garmin Ltd. Or its subsidiaries
Garmin GFC 700 AFCS In A Diamond DA-40 I DA40F c/o Garmin International, Inc.
1200E. IS!~ Street
6. Power to the GFC 700 autopilot and electric trim system is supplied through the
AVIONIC MASTER switch and the AFCS circuit breaker. The AVIONIC MASTER
switch can be used as an additional means to disable the autopilot and electric trim
system.
7. The red AP DISC switch on the pilot's control stick will interrupt power to the manual
electric trim for as long as the switch is depressed.
8. Maximum altitude loss due to autopilot, Flight Director or AHRS malfunctions:
MANEUVER ALTITUDE LOSS

Climb, Cruise, Descent 200 feet
Maneuvering 115 feet
Approach 130 feet
9. Loss of instruments or components of the GIOOO system will affect the GFC 700 AFCS
as follows:
• Loss of the AHRS will cause the autopilot to disconnect. The autopilot and flight
• Loss of the heading function of the AHRS wiii result in loss of the HDG mode. If in
HDG mode at the time heading is lost, the autopilot will revert to basic roll mode (ROL).
( • Loss of the MFD will not cause the autopilot to disconnect, and will remain engaged
with limited functionality, but the autopilot cannot be re-engaged after disconnect by the
pilot.
• Loss of the PFD will cause the autopilot to disconnect. The autopilot and flight
• Loss of air data computer information will cause the autopilot to disconnect The
autopilot will be inoperative. The flight director will be available except for air data
modes (ALT, VS, FLC). Manual electric trim is available.
• Loss of GIA #I will cause the autopilot to disconnect The autopilot, flight director
and manual electric trim will be inoperative. Loss of GIA #2 wiii also prevent autopilot
and manual electric trim operation, but flight director will be available.
• Loss of the standby airspeed indicator, standby attitude indicator, standby altimeter, or
compass will have no effect on the autopilot.
• Loss of both GPS systems wiii cause the autopilot and flight director to operate in
NAV modes (LOC, BC, VOR, VAPP) with reduced accuracy. Course intercept and
station crossing performance may be improved by executing intercepts and station
crossings in HDG mode, then reselecting NAV mode.
WARNING
FOLLOWING AN AUTOPILOT OR ELECTRIC TRIM MALFUNCTION, DO NOT RE-

ENGAGE THE AUTOPILOT OR MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM, OR RESET THE AFCS
CIRCUIT BREAKER, UNTIL THE CAUSE OF THE MALFUNCTION HAS BEEN
DETERMINED AND CORRECTED.
L
190-00492-00 Page 5 ofl7
Garmin GFC 700 AFCS In A Diamond DA-40 I DA40F c/o Gannin International, Inc.
1200 E. lSI" Street
SECTION II- LIMITATIONS
I. The Gannin G I 000 Cockpit Reference Guide for Diamond DA-40, PIN I 90-00324-05, Rev A or
later appropriate revision must be immediately available to the flight crew.
2. The GFC 700 must utilize the following or later FAA approved software versions:
Sub-Svstem Software Version

PFD 6.10
MFD 6.10
GMA 1347 2.08
AHRS 2.03
GDC 2.05
GIA 4.30
GPS 3.01
GSA 2.06
The system software versions can be verified on the AUX group sub-page 5, "AUX - SYSTEM
STATUS".
( 3. The GFC 700 AFCS preflight test must be successfully completed prior to use of the autopilot, flight
director or manual electric trim. Use of the autopilot or manual electric trim system is prohibited if
the preflight test is not satisfactorily completed.
4. A pilot with the seat belt fastened must occupy the left pilot's seat during all autopilot operations.
5. The autopilot must be off during takeoff and landing.
6. Autopilot maximum engagement speed- 165 KIAS

Autopilot minimum engagement speed- 70 KIAS
Electric Trim maximum operating speed- I 78 KIAS
7. Maximum fuel imbalance with autopilot engaged- 8 US gallons (Long range tank configuration)
I 0 US gallons (Standard tank configuration)
8. The autopilot must be disengaged below 200 feet AGL during approach operations and below 800
feet AGL during all other operations.
9. ILS approaches using the GFC 700 autopilot/flight director are limited to Category I approaches
only.
10. CD! mode sequencing (GPS-to-ILS) must be set to manual for instrument approaches conducted
with the autopilot coupled.
L
190-00492-00 Page6of17
FAA Approved Revision2
1200 E. I 51~ Street
SECTION III- EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
Some emergency situations require immediate memorized corrective action. These numbered steps are
printed in boxes within the emergency procedures and should be accomplished without the aid of the
checklist.
AUTOPILOT OR ELECTRIC TRIM MALFUNCTION/FAILURE
NOTE
An autopilot or electric trim malfunction may be recognized by an unexpected deviation from the
desired flight path, abnormal flight control or trim wheel movement, or flight director commands
which cause unexpected or contradictory information on the other cockpit displays. It may be
accompanied by the aural autopilot disconnect tone, a red AFCS, red AP or yellow AP indication
on the PFD, or a yellow CHECK ATTITUDE on the PFD. The autopilot and AHRS monitors
normally detect failures and automatically disconnect the autopilot
Failure of the electric pitch trim, indicated by a red boxed PTRM flashing on the PFD, may not
cause the autopilot to disconnect. Be alert to possible autopilot out of trim conditions (see
AUTOPILOT OUT OF TRIM procedure below), and expect residual control forces upon
disconnect. The autopilot will not re-engage after disconnect with failed pitch trim. If
AUTOPILOT OUT OF TRIM ELE indication is present, expect substantial elevator forces on
( autopilot disconnect
I. AP DISC Switch ............................................................... DEPRESS AND HOLD

2. Aircraft Attitude ......................... MAINTAIN/REGAIN AIRCRAFT CONTROL,

4. AP Circuit Breaker ........................................................................................ PULL
5. AP DISC Switch .................................................................................... RELEASE
WARNING
FOLLOWING AN AUTOPILOT, AUTOTRIM OR MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION, DO NOT ENGAGE THE AUTOPILOT OR OPERATE THE
MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM UNTIL THE CAUSE OF THE MALFUNCTION HAS BEEN
CORRECTED.
190-00492-00 Page 7 of 17
1200 E. 151" Street
AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT (Yellow AP flashing on PFD)
1. AP DISC Switch ........................................................ DEPRESS AND RELEASE

(to cancel disconnect tone)
2. Pitch Trim.......................................... RETRIM ifnecessaty, using the trim wheel
NOTE
The autopilot disconnect may be accompanied by a red boxed PTCH (pitch) or ROLL on the PFD,
indicating the axis which has failed. The autopilot cannot be re-engaged with either of these
annunciations present.
AUTOPILOT OVERSPEED RECOVERY (Yellow MAXSPD on PFD>
I. Throttle .................................................................................................... REDUCE
When overspeed condition is corrected:
2. Autopilot ...................................... RESELECT VERTICAL MODE (if necessary)
( NOTE
Overspeed recovery mode provides a pitch up command to decelerate the airplane at or below the
maximum autopilot operating speed ( 165 KIAS). Overspeed recovery is not active in altitude hold
(ALT) or glidesiope (GS) modes.
LOSS OF NAVIGATION INFORMATION (Yellow VOR. VAPP. GPS or LOC flashing on PFDl
NOTE
If a navigation signal is lost while the autopilot is tracking it, the autopilot will roll the aircraft
wings level and default to roll mode (ROL).
1. Autopilot .......................................................... SELECT HOG on mode controller

2. Nav Source .................................................... SELECT A VALID NAV SOURCE
3. Autopilot .......................................................... SELECT NAV on mode controller
If on an instrument approach at the time the navigation signal is lost:
4. Missed Approach Procedure ........................................ EXECUTE (as applicable)
L
190-00492-00 Page 8 ofl7
Gannin GFC 700 AFCS In A Diamond DA-40 I DA40F c/o Garmin International, Inc.
1200 E. 151~ Street
AUTOPILOT OUT OF TRIM <YeUow +-AIL. -+AIL. tELE. or .J.ELE on PFDl
For tELE, or .J.ELE Indication:
WARNING
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OVERPOWER THE AUTOPILOT IN THE EVENT OF A PITCH

MISTRIM. THE AUTOPILOT SERVOS WILL OPPOSE PILOT INPUT AND WILL
CAUSE PITCH TRIM TO RUN OPPOSITE THE DIRECTION OF PIWT INPUT. miS
WILL LEAD TO A SIGNIFICANT OUT-OF-TRIM CONDITION RESULTING IN LARGE
CONTROL STICK FORCE WHEN DISENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT.
CAUTION
Be prepared for significant sustained control forces in the direction of the annunciation arrow. For
example, an arrow pointing down indicates nose down control stick force will be required upon
autopilot disconnect
NOTE
Momentary illumination (5 sec or less) of the tELE or J.ELE indication_during configuration or
( large airspeed changes is normal.
If the annunciation remains:

I. AP DISC Switch............................................................... DEPRESS AND HOLD
2. Aircraft Attitude ........................ MAINTAIN/REGAIN AIRCRAFT CONTROL,

4. AFCS Circuit Breaker................................................................................... PULL
5. AP DISC switch ..................................................................................... RELEASE
WARNING
FOLLOWING AN AUTOPIWT, AUTOTRIM OR MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION, DO NOT ENGAGE mE AUTOPILOT OR OPERATE THE
MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM UNTIL THE CAUSE OF mE MALFUNCTION HAS BEEN
CORRECTED.
For +-AIL, -+AIL Indication:
I. Rudder Trim ............................................................ VERIFY slip/skid indicator is centered
L - NOTE
Observe the maximum fuel imbalance limitation.
190-00492-00 Page9ofl7
1200E. I5I "Street
Olathe. Kansas 66062 U.S.A.
If annunciation remains:
2. Control Stick .......... GRA SP FIRMLY with both hands
CAUTION
Be prepared for sustained control forces in the direction of the annunciation arrow. For example,
an arrow pointing to the ri ght indicates that sustained right wing down control stick force will be
required upon autopilot disconnect.
3. AP DISC Switch .... DEPRESS

4. Autopilot ...... .. .. ... RE-ENGAGE if late ral trim re-established
FLASHING YELLOW MODE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE
Abnormal mode transitions (those not initiated by the pilot or by normal sequencing of the
autopilot) will be annunciated by flashing the disengaged mode in yellow on the PFD. Upon loss
of a selected mode, the system will revert to the default mode for the affected axis, either ROL or
PIT. After I 0 seconds, the new mode (PIT or ROL) will be annunciated in green.
Loss of selected vertical mode (FLC, VS, ALT, GS)

I. Autopilot mode controls ....... .......... .... . SELECT ANOTHER VERTICAL MODE
2. Autopilot .... ............................................ DISCONNECT and continue manually,
Loss of selected lateral mode (HDG, NA V, GPS, LOC, V APP, BC):

I. Autopilot mode controls.... . ... SELECT ANOTHER LATERAL MODE
2. Autopilot .. ....... ... ............ . . ... .... DISCONNECT and continue manually,
FAILURE OF THE PREFLIGHT TEST (Red boxed PFT on PFDl
I. AFCS Circuit Breaker ................... ...... .. .. . ...... ....... PULL
WARNING
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ENGAGE THE AUTOPILOT OR OPERATE THE MANUAL

ELECTRIC TRIM UNTIL THE CAUSE OF THE MALFUNCTION HAS BEEN
CORRECTED.
NOTE
When the AFCS circuit breaker is pulled, the PFT FAIL annunciation will be removed and the
autopilot and manual electric trim will be unavailable. Do not reset the circuit breaker unless the
airplane is on the ground.
190-00492-00 Page 10 of 17
Gannin GFC 700 AFCS In A Diamond DA-40 I DA40F c/o Garmin International, Inc.
1200 E. 151 11 Street
SECTION IV- NORMAL PROCEDURES
NOTE
Normal operating procedures for the GFC 700 are described in the Gannin G 1000 Cockpit
Reference Guide and the Gannin G I 000 Pilot's Guide.
NOTE
The AFCS system automatically conducts a preflight self-test upon initial power application. The
preflight test is indicated by a white boxed PFf on the PFD. Upon successful completion of the
preflight test, the PFT is removed, the red AFCS annunciation is removed, and the autopilot
disconnect tone sounds.
I. Aircraft Master Switch (ALT/BAT) ............................................................. ON

2.AVIONIC MASTER switch ......................................................................... ON
3. Primary Flight Display (PFD) ............. NO AUTOPILOT ANNUNCIATIONS
4. Autopilot Disconnect Tone .................................................•.................... NOTE
L
190-00492-00 Page II ofl7
FAA Approved Airplane Aight Manual Supplement Gannin Ltd. Or its subsidiaries
Gannin GFC 700 AFCS In A Diamond DA-40 I DA40F c/o Gannin International. Inc.
1200 E. 151"' Street
AFTER TAKEOFF
WARNING
IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE PILOT IN COMMAND TO MONITOR THE

AUTOPILOT WHEN IT IS ENGAGED. THE PILOT SHOULD BE PREPARED TO
IMMEDIATELY DISCONNECT THE AUTOPILOT AND TO TAKE PROMPT
CORRECTIVE ACTION IN THE EVENT OF UNEXPECTED OR UNUSUAL
AUTOPILOT BEHAVIOR.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MANUALLY FLY THE AIRPLANE WITH THE

AUTOPILOT ENGAGED. THE AUTOPILOT SERVOS WILL OPPOSE PILOT
INPUT AND WILL TRIM OPPOSITE THE DIRECTION OF PILOT INPUT (PITCH
AXIS ONLY). THIS COULD LEAD TO A SIGNIFICANT OUT-OF-TRIM
CONDITION. DISCONNECT THE AUTOPILOT IF MANUAL CONTROL IS
DESIRED.
THE PILOT IN COMMAND MUST USE PROPER AUTOPILOT MODES AND

PROPER ENGINE POWER SETTINGS TO ENSURE THAT AIRCRAFT SPEED IS
MAINTAINED BETWEEN 70 KIAS AND 165 KIAS. IT WILL BE NECESSARY TO
( CHANGE ENGINE POWER TO MAINTAIN THE DESIRED RATE OF DESCENT

WHEN OPERATING AT 165 KIAS.
OBSERVE THE MINIMUM AUTOPILOT OPERATING SPEED OF 70 KIAS.

OPERATION IN PITCH (PIT) OR VERTICAL SPEED (VS) MODES BELOW THIS
SPEED CAN RESULT IN AN AIRPLANE STALL. IF INDICATIONS OF AN
AIRPLANE STALL ARE PRESENT, INCLUDING STALL WARNING HORN,
LOSS OF CONTROL EFFECTIVENESS OR AIRFRAME BUFFET, DISCONNECT
THE AUTOPILOT AND MANUALLY RETURN THE AIRPLANE TO STABILIZED
FLIGHT PRIOR TO RE-ENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT.
NOTE
The NOSE UP and NOSE ON buttons on the mode controller on the MFD are referenced to
aircraft movement The NOSE UP button will increase the reference pitch attitude, increase
the reference vertical speed and decrease the reference airspeed. Likewise, the NOSE DN
button will decrease the reference pitch attitude, decrease the reference vertical speed, and
increase the reference airspeed.
CLIMB CRUISE and DESCENT:
Vertical Speed CVS>:

1. Altitude Preselect .......................................................... SET to desired altitude
2. Mode Controller ............................................. SELECT VS on mode controller
3. Vertical Speed Reference ... ADJUST using NOSE UP and NOSE ON buttons
4. White ALT (altitude preselect armed) ........................................ NOTE on PFD
190-00492-00 Page 12 of 17
Gannin GFC 700 AFCS In A Diamond DA-40 I DA40F cfo Qannin International, Inc.
1200 E. 151a Street
Olathe Kansas 66062 U.S.A.
NOTE
If the altitude preselect is not changed before selecting VS, the autopilot may re-capture the
current altitude immediately after entering VS mode. Always ensure that the altitude preselect is
adjusted prior to selecting VS.
The vertical speed mode is limited to I ,500 ftlmin climb and 3,000 ftlminute descent Use engine
power to maintain appropriate aircraft speed. If the CWS switch is used while in VS mode, the
VS reference will change to the vertical speed when the CWS switch is released.
Flight Level Change CFLC):

I. Altitude Preselect ................................................................ SET to desired altitude
2. Mode Controller ............................................... SELECf FLC on mode controller
3. Airspeed Reference .................. ADJUST using NOSE UP and NOSE DN buttons
4. White ALT (altitude preselect armed) ............................................. NOTE on PFD
NOTE
If the altitude preselect is not changed before selecting FLC, the autopilot may re-capture the
current altitude immediately after entering FLC mode. Always ensure that the altitude preselect is
adjusted prior to selecting FLC.
( If the airspeed reference cannot be maintained without deviating away from the selected altitude,
the system will maintain level flight until the power or reference is changed to allow climbing or
descending towards the selected altitude.
The FLC mode is limited to airspeeds between 70 KIAS and 165 KIAS. Use engine power to
maintain appropriate vertical speed. If the CWS switch is used while in FLC mode, the airspeed
reference will change to the airspeed when the CWS switch is released.
Altitude Hold CALTl:

To capture a selected altitude:
2. Altitude Preselect. .......................................... SET TO DESIRED ALTITUDE
3. Vertical Mode and Reference .............................. SELECf on mode controller
NOTE
In ALT mode, the autopilot will maintain the reference altitude shown in the autopilot window of
the PFD regardless of the altitude in the altitude preselect window or the altimeter's barometric
pressure setting. If the altimeter setting is changed, the autopilot will climb or descend to
maintain the reference altitude.
L\
Altitude Hold CALTl:
To maintain a desired altitude:
-
2. Reaching desired altitude ............................. SELECT ALTon mode controller
3. Green AL T ..............................................................................VERIFY on PFD
190-00492-00 Page 13 ofl7

FAA Approved Airp lane Flight Manual Supplement Gannin Ltd. Or its subsidiaries
Gannin GF<:; 700 AFCS In A Diamond DA-40 I DA40F c/o Gannin International, Inc.
1200E . !51 " Street
Olathe. Kansas 6606? U.S.A.
Navigation Capture and Track:
I. Navigation Source ....... ....... SELECT VOR or GPS using CD! button on PFD
2. Course Bearing Pointer ................ .. ..... SET using course knob (VOR only)
3. Intercept Heading.. . . ..... ESTABLISH in HOG or ROL mode (if required)
4. Mode Controller ............ ............................ SELECT NA V on mode controller
5. Green or White VOR or GPS annunciation.. . .. ....... ..... . NOTE on PFD
6. Vertica l Mode and Reference .............. ............... SELECT on mode controller
NOTE
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CD!) is greater than one dot from center, the autopilot will ann
the NA V mode and indicate VOR or GPS in white on the PFD. The pi lot must ensure that the
current heading will result in a capture of the selected course. If the CD! is one dot or less from
center, the autopi lot will enter the capture mode when the NA V button is pressed and annunciate
VOR or GPS in green on the PFD .
APPROACH:
I. Navigation Source ..... SELECT VOR using CD! button on PFD

2. Course Bearing Pointer... . ... ................................. SET using course knob
3. Intercept Heading..... . .. ESTABLISH in HOG or ROL mode (if required)
4. Mode Controller ........... ... ..... ......... SELECT APR on mode controller
5. Green or White VAPP annunciation .. . .. .......... NOTE on PFD
6. Vertical Mode and Reference ........ ...... SELECT on mode controller
7. Airspeed ................ ... MAINTAIN 80 KIAS OR GREATER (Recommended)
NOTE
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CD!) is greater than one dot from center, the autopilot will ann
the V APP mode and indicate V APP in white on the PFD. The pilot must ensure that the current
heading will result in a capture of the selected course. If the CD! is one dot or less from center,
the autopi lot will enter the capture mode when the VAPP button is pressed and annunciate VAPP
in green on the PFD.
I. Navigati on Source. . ............ ..... SELECT LOC using CD! button on PFD
2. Course Bearing Pointer.... ............ ... ............. SET using course knob
3. Intercept Heading ....... ESTABLISH in HDG or ROL mode (if required)
4. Mode Controller .. .. . .................... SELECT APR on mode controller
5. Green or White LOC and GS annunciations.. . ......... NOTE on PFD
6. Airspeed ........... .... MAINTAIN 80 KIAS OR GREATER (Recommended)
!90-00492-00 Page 14 of 17
Garmin GFC 700 AFCS In A Diamond DA-40 I DA40F c/o Gannin International, Inc.
I200 E. 151" Street
NOTE
When the selected navigation source is a valid ILS, glideslope coupling is automatically anned
when tracking the localizer. The glideslope cannot be captured until the localizer is captured.
The autopilot can capture the glideslope from above or below the glides! ope.

2. Approach........................................................ LOAD in FMS and ACTIVATE
5. Green or White GPS annunciation ............................................. NOTE on PFD
Back Course (BC)
I. Navigation Source ............................. SELECT LOC using CD! button on PFD

2. Course Bearing Pointer .................. SET to ILS front course using course knob
4. Mode Controller. ......................................... SELECT NAV on mode controller
5. Green or White BC annunciation ............................................... NOTE on PFD
( NOTE
The course pointer must be at least 115° from the current magnetic heading before BC will be
annunciated in the lateral mode field. Until that point, LOC will be annunciated.
Selecting NA V mode for back course approaches inhibits the glideslope from coupling.

GO AROUND
I. Control Stick ......................................................................... GRASP FIRMLY

2. GA button ....................................................... PUSH- VerifY GA/GA on PFD
in lateral and vertical mode fields
3. Balked Landing ................................................................................ EXECUTE
4. Missed Approach Procedure .................................... EXECUTE (as applicable)
5. Altitude Preselect .................................................... SET to appropriate altitude
At an appropriate safe altitude:

6. Autopilot Mode Controller ................ SELECT appropriate lateral and vertical
modes on mode controller
7. Autopilot ...................................................................... RE-ENGAGE if desired
L NOTE
If the missed approach procedure requires tracking the localizer outbound from the airport, use
NAV mode to prevent inadvertent coupling to glideslope.
190-00492-00 Page 15 ofl7

/
Garmin GFC 700 AFCS In A Diamond DA-40 f DA40F cfo Garmin International, Inc.
1200 E. !51~ Street
SECTION V- PERFORMANCE
No change.
SECTION VI- WEIGHT AND BALANCE
No change. See current weight and balance data for aircraft weight and balance information.
SECTION VII -SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
The GFC 700 Automatic Flight Control system (AFCS), as installed in the Diamond DA-40, consists of
the following components:
One GDU which contains the following mode control buttons: AP (autopilot engagefdisengage); FD
(Flight Director OnfOff); HDG (Heading mode OofOff); NAV (Nav mode OofOff); APR (Approach
mode OnfOff); ALT (Altitude Hold mode OnfOff); VS (Vertical Speed mode OofOff); FLC (Flight
Level Change mode OofOff); NOSE UP and NOSE DN (vertical mode reference change). This
GDU is installed as the MFD.
Servos with autopilot processing logic in the pitch, roll and pitch trim control systems
( Servo mounts and brackets

Flight Director processing logic in the GIAs
Control stick-mounted manual electric trim (MET) switch (split switch) for pitch trim
Control stick-mounted trim interrupt and autopilot disconnect switch
Control stick-mounted CWS (Control Wheel Steering) switch
Remote-mounted go-around switch (on the left side of the throttle lever knob)
PFDIMFD mounted altitude preselect knob (ALT)
PFDIMFD mounted heading select knob (HDG)
Flight Director commands and autopilot modes are displayed on the PFD. Full AFCS functionality is
only available with the both displays operating, and will disconnect under certain reversionary
conditions.
Upon initial system power-up, the system undergoes a preflight test. At the end of the test, the autopilot
disconnect tone sounds and the PFT and AFCS annunciations are removed. Successful completion of
the preflight test is required for the autopilot and manual electric trim to engage.
Annunciation of the flight director and autopilot modes is shown in the lower status field of the PFD. In
general, green indicates active modes and white indicates armed modes. When a mode is directly
selected by the pilot, no flashing of the mode will occur. When automatic mode changes occur, they will
be annunciated with a flashing annunciation of the new mode for ten seconds in green. If a mode
becomes unavailable for whatever reason, the mode will flash for ten seconds in yellow and be replaced
by the new mode in green.
Normal autopilot disconnects are annunciated with a yellow flashing AP on the PFD accompanied by a
two second autopilot disconnect tone. Normal disconnects are those initiated by the pilot with the AP
DISC switch, the MET switch, the AP button on the MFD mode controller, or the GA button. Abnormal
disconnects will be accompanied by a red flashing AP on the PFD accompanied by a continuous
190-00492-00 Page 16 of 17
1200 E. 151" Street
autopilot disconnect tone. The disconnect tone and flashing alert may be cancelled by pressing the AP
DISC switch or the left side of the MET switch.
Refer to the Garmin GIOOO Pilot's Guide for the Diamond DA-40, Garmin PIN 190-00592-01 Rev. A,
or later revision, for a complete description of the GFC 700 system and operating procedures.
SECTION VIII- HANDLING AND SERVICE
No change.
L
19Q-00492-00 Page 17 ofl7
. DQC: FMS-21040·516
. :~ . .. : . -. .
: . ";. . ~: •' .
DATE
PREPARED·
(
CHECKED
T.Sm1th .
APPROVED
()t;l
R.Go~
-·---·-------------
--- .
jAsetl:
• ·
Technologies I J
Doc: FMS-27040-516
Rev: A . j
REVISION LOG
REV REVISED PAGES SU.BJECT DOT DATE

BY AFFECTED
Normal Procedures
A G.Brander ALL 2005-12-22
revised
2 JAN. 200
PAGE II
··r~~~.FMS-~7040-516 •
· _B~v.:A. .. · . 1 ,
REVIS(ON APPROVAIL~SHEET
Doc~ men; R.evi~~~~;·. . ,, A. ·.
Pages Affected: All
Description: Normal Procedures revised ·
DATE
REVISED
3jt/o£
r
( CHECKED 3/1}~
I. t
RELEASED ?/ t{~&
R. Gow
r'
CANADA
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORT
AIRCRAFT CERTIFICATION
BRANCH
JAN 23 2006
PAGE Ill
irl- IDoc: FMS-27D4o-s16
~lsetli Technalag=-'-·es
_ _L__ _ _ _ _ _ ____j__R_e_v:_A_ _ _ _ __J
TABLE OF CONTENTS
COVER PAGE ............................................................................................................................... I
REVISION LOG ............................................................................................................................ 11
REVISION APPROVAL SHEET .................................................................................................. 111
TABLE OF CONTENTS .............................................................................................................. IV
CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL .....................................................................................•.................. 1
1.1 INTRODUCTION ............................•............................................................................... 1

1.5 DEFINITION AND ABBREVIATIONS ......... - .................................................................. 1
( CHAPTER 2- OPERATING LIMITATIONS .................................................................................. 2
2.6 WARNING CAUTION AND STATUS LIGHTS ................................................................. 2

2.16 OTHER LIMITATIONS ...................................................................................................2
CHAPTER 3- EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ............................................................................. 3
CHAPTER 4A- NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES ............................................................4
4A.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................4

4A.3.5 TAXIING .......................................................................................................................4
4A.3.9 CRUISE .......................................................................................................................4
CHAPTER 4B- ABNORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES ....................................................... 5
CHAPTER 5- PERFORMANCE .................................................................................................. 6
CHAPTER 6- MASS AND BALANCE I EQUIPMENT LIST ........................................................ 7
6.3 MASS AND BALANCE REPORT ................................................................................... 7

L 6.13 EQUIPMENT LIST AND EQUIPMENT INVENTORY ................................................. 7
CHAPTER 7- DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS ................................... 8
---·-· ..... --·---· --- 2 3 JAN. 2006

-------------------~~--
PAGE IV
·--------··---------. ------- . _.. ________

r fF!!SI!I"'t Techn~/ogies I I Doc: FMS-27D40-516
Rev: A
I
CHAPTER 8- AIRPLANE HANDLING, CARE AND MAINTENANCE ......................................... 9
··· .. ·-·-- -·· -------"'-~

23 ,JANJ006
PAGEV
··-- ·----- ------------. -·-------- -------- ·---------·-.---

r fF1isen Techna/~gies I IDoc: FMS-27040-516
Rev: A
I
Chapters 1 to 8 inclusive of this document comprise the approved Flight Manual Supplement.
Compliance with Chapter 2, "Operating Limitations", is mandatory.
The information and data contained in this d0cument supersedes or supplements that contained
in the basic Approved Flight Manual for the l;>iamond DA-40 only in the areas listed herein. For
Limitations, Procedures and Performance data not contained in this supplement refer to the
Approved Flight Manual or other applicable Approved Flight Manual Supplements.
This Supplement must be attached to the Approved Flight Manual for the aircraft with the
subject design change incorporated.
---------
2 3 JAN.-2006
p,AGE VI
---------------
li?j~ ~ch'?ala~ I I
r -- -
Doc: FMS-27D40-516
Rev:A
CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL
(NON-APPROVED CHAPTER)
1.1 INTRODUCTION
The Ryan 9900BX Traffic Advisory System (TAS) monitors the airspace surrounding your
aircraft by interrogating the transponders of intruding aircraft. If the intruder is reporting Mode C
altitude, the interrogation reply enables the 9900BX to compute the following information: Range
between your aircraft and the intruder, relative bearing: to the intruder, and relative altitude of the
intruder. For non-Mode C reporting aircraft the 9900BX computes relative range and bearing
only. The 9900BX does not detect aircraft without operating transponders.
The 9900BX consists of the following equipment:
o Ryan 9900BX Processor installed in the aft equipment bay,

o TAS top antenna mounted on the upper fuselage surface aft of the cabin area,
o TAS bottom antenna mounted on the :lower wing surface on the aircraft centreline.
o Transponder Coupler installed in the aft equipment bay
( o
o
TRAFFIC/MUTE annunciator switch imstalled above the pilots instrument panel.
Bright/Dim switch installed adjacent to the annunciator.
The 9900BX monitors altitude and range dlfferE!ndes between your aircraft and that of intruders
out to a range of 10 nautical miles and provides the flight crew with aural warnings when the
calculated time to Closest Point of Approach (CPA) meets certain thresholds.
The 9900BX, when connected to the Garmln G1000 multifunction display (MFD), will display
additional intruder information on the MFD.
The TRAFFIC/MUTE annunciator switch performs two functions. The TRAFFIC annunciator
light displays an Amber TRAFFIC annunciation when a current traffic advisory exists. By
depressing the MUTE switch once ·aural traffic advisory messages are muted. By double
pressing the switch, the 9900BX will repeat the last advisory or annunciate "NO ADVISORY" if
no current advisories exist.
1.5. DEFINITION AND ABBREVIATIONS

(f) Designation of the circuit breakers on the i~;Jstrument oanel
AVIONICS:
L TAS Ryan 9900BX Traffic Advisory System
2 3 JAN. 2006
P.A.GE 1 OF 9
~-Techno/ogi~·· Do~~FMS-27040-51 ~~
Rev: A
CHAPTER 2- OPERATING LIMITATI ONS

(APPROVED CHAPTER)
2.6 WARNING CAUTION AND STATUS LIGHTS
Colour and significance of the caution lights (Amber)
Caution Light (Amber) Meaning
T RAFFIC The calculated time to closest approach of

the intruder aircraft is < 30 seconds. Conduct
a visual search for th e intruder. If successful,
maintain visua l acqu isition to ensu re safe
separation.

The following pilots handbooks should be referred to for operating instructions and must be kept
accessib le to the flight crew at all times .
a) Ryan 9900BX Pilots Operating Handbook (part# 32-2352, rev 3 or later)

b) Garmin G1000 optional equipment addendum part# 190-00470-00 rev C or later (for
aircraft fitted w ith the Garmin G1000 integrated avionics system), or
c) Garm in GNS-400/500 se ries display interfaces pi lots guide addendum part# 190-00140-
10 rev 0 or later (for aircraft fitted with Garmin GNS-430/530 panel mount avionics).
This A FM supplement is intended for use with 9900BX processor softwa re version 1.XX. Either
X may increment from 0 to 9 as released and described in Ryan software change notices.
The se constitute minor software changes, not operational changes.
2 3 )AN. 2006
PAGE 2 OF 9
---- ·-·- --~ - - --- ·------- ---·-- -----· ··--···-·

r tfi/SE!It Techna/ag/es I I
Doc: FMS-27040-516
Rev: A
I
CHAPTER 3 • EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
No Change.
L
2 3 JAN. 2006
PAGE 3 OF 9
-··-
lfliS'efl; Technologies
tDoc: FMS-27040-516
Rev: A
CHAPTER 4A- NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES

4A.1 INTRODUCTION
accessible to the fl ight crew at all times .
a) Ryan 9900BX Pilots Operating Handbook (part# 32-2352, rev 3 or later)
b) Garmin G1000 optiona l equipment addendum part# 190-00470-00 rev C or later (for
aircraft fitted with the Garmin G1000 integrated avionics system), or
c) Garmin GNS-400/500 series display interfaces pilots guide addendum part# 190-00140-
10 rev D or later (for aircraft fitted with Garmin GNS-430/530 panel mourit avionics).
Additional information rega rding the AIR/GROUND mode logic function that is not included in
the 9900BX Pilot's Operating handbook is included in the following paragraph.
Double pressing the TRAFFIC/MUTE switch in fl ight may produce a "GROUND MODE"
annunciation if the aircraft altitude is less than 1700FT AGL from the departure airfield or the
flight time is less than 3 minutes after take-off. This is normal. Once the aircraft reaches
approximately 1700FT AG L or fl ight time is approximately 3 minutes, "GROUND MODE" should
not be annunciated .
4A.3.5 TAX liNG
TRAFFIC/M UTE annunciator switch .... . .. • ....... . ... . . . . . . .. .... Double Press
Synthesized voice ann ou ncement: " GROUND MODE" and "N O ADVISORIES". No other
announcements.
4A.3.9 CRUISE
TRAFFIC/MUTE annunciator switch .. . Double Press
Synthesized voice annou ncement: " NO ADVISORIES" (or a repeat of an y current traffic
advisories). No other announcements.
2 3 Jf-\1\J. ZUU6
·--·-···· ·---- ---- ----- - --- - --- ---- -- ---- - -- -
PAGE 4 OF 9
r ~~SE!Ili Technologies I I Doc: FMS-27040-516
Rev: A
1
CHAPTER 48- ABNORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES

accessible to the flight crew at all times.
a) Ryan 9900BX Pilots Operating Handl:)ook (part# 32-2352, rev 3 or later)

b) Garmin G1000 optional equipment addendum part# 190-00470-00 rev C or later (for
aircraft fitted with the Garmin G1000 integrated avionics system), or
c) Garmin GNS-400/500 series display interfaces pilots guide addendum part# 190-00140-
10 rev D or later (for aircraft fitted with Garmin GNS-430/530 panel mount avionics).
1. "GROUND MODE" annunciation in flight
( Discontinue use of 9900BX. Identify and pull TAS circuit breaker
2. "TCAD INTERROGATOR FAILURE" annunciation in flight
Traffic will be announced with bearing and relative height, but not range.
3. "TCAD CODE" (followed by a number) annunciation in flight
Discontinue use of 9900BX. Identify and pull TAS circuit breaker
4. "TCAD ALTITUDE DATA INVALID" annunciation in flight
Discontinue use of 9900BX. Identify and pull TAS circuit breaker
Refer to the Ryan 9900BX pilots operating handbook for further fault indications.
l~
2 3 JAN. 2006
-----·----·------ ·-.
PAGE 5 OF 9
r [FiiCi;J!Il.j Techno/ogle:;, I I
Doc: FMS·27D40·516
Rev: A
I
CHAPTER 5 - PERFORMANCE
(NON·APPROVED CHAPTER)
No Change.
L
- - · -·· ···-···-----··----- 2 3 J~N. 2006
PAGE 6 OF 9
---------------. -----------------· ..
[Fiisen IDoc: FMS-27D40-516
r Technolog_ies Rev: A
CHAPTER 6 - MASS AND BALANCE I EQUIPMENT LIST

6.3 MASS AND BALANCE REPORT
The following weight and moment data may be used to update the mass and balance report to
include the Ryan 9900BX system.
Item Weight (Kg) Moment Arm (m)
Processor & Coupling 3.33 5.020
Top Antenna 0.298 4.275
Bottom Antenna 0.340 2.650
( Wire Harness 1 2.5
The following equipment information may be used to update the equipment list to include the
Ryan 9900BX system.
Description Type Part Number Manufacturer
TRAFFIC ADVISORY
Processor 9900BX 70-2420-4 Ryan
Transponder Coupler 70-2040 Ryan
L-Band Antenna Top Ahtenna .872-1750-31 L Sensor Systems
L-Band Antenna Bottom Antenna S72-1750-32L Sensor Systems
.... ------ -- ·---- ·-·- . ··------------- ---------------·

r fiiisetli Techna/ag/es 1 Doc: FMS-27040-516
Rev: A
- -
CHAPTER 7 - DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS

No Change.
(~
L
2 3 JAN. 2006
·-·-------~---------
PAGE 8 OF 9
r tfYSEn Te~hna/agies l lD~~S-27D40-51g
Rev: A
CHAPTER 8- AIRPLANE HANDLING, CARE AND MAINTENANCE

No Change.
L
- - - - - -23
· JAN. 2006
PAGE 9 OF 9
--~ ···--------·- ---------------------~---

~Diamond
DA40AFMS v AIRCRAFT
STC No. SA06-52
For Diamond Aircraft Industries GmbH

Model DA40
with the
Installation of a MTV-12-B/183-59b Propeller and associated Equipment
STC No. SA06-52
(
DOT Approved DATE: lo Au..c.. Zo:.G.
Kevin BRUCE
for Minister of Transport
Chapters 2, 3, 4A, 4B, 5 and, 6 comprise the Approved Flight Manual Supplement Compliance with
Chapter 2, Operating Umitations, is mandatory.
Chapters 1, 7, 8 and, 9 are Unapproved and are provided for information only.
The information and data contained in this document supersede or supplement that contained in the basic
Approved Flight Manual for the Diamond Aircraft Industries GmbH Model DA 40, Doc. No. 6.01.01-E, in
those areas listed herein. For limitations, procedures and performance not contained in this document
refer to the Approved Flight Manual and other applicable Approved Flight Manual Supplements.
This Supplement is to be attached to Chapter 9 of the Approved Flight Manual for the aircraft with the
subject Design Change Incorporated.
L
Doc. No.: Rev.IR
6.01.01-CS0601 (E) 2006-AUG-08
~&Diamond
DA40AFMS ~ AIRCRAFT
STC No. SAOS-52
CHAPTER 1
(Unapproved)
GENERAL
No Change.
CHAPTER2
(Approved)
Change:
2.4 (c) Max. Take-Off RPM: 2700 RPM
Max. Continuous RPM: 2700 RPM
( 2.4 (k)
2.4 (I)
Propeller designation:
Propeller diameter:
MTV-12-B/183-59b
1.83 m (72.05 in)
2.4 (m) Propeller pitch angle: 11.0• to 3o.o· (at 0.75 R)
2.5 ENGINE INSTRUMENTS MARKINGS

"RPM" line in Table shall read:
Green Arc/Bar: 500 - 2700 RPM
Yellow Arc/Bar: delete 2400- 2700 RPM
Red Arc/Bar: >2700 RPM
CHAPTER3
(Approved)
No Change.
Doc. No.: Rev.IR

6.01.01-CS0601 (E) 2006-AUG-08
~A Diamond
DA40AFMS w AIRCRAFT
STC No. SA06-52
CHAPTER4A
(Approved)
4A.3.8 CLIMB
Procedure for best rate of climb
change:
3. RPM lever...............................................2700 RPM
( CHAPTER4B
(Approved)
No Change.
CHAPTERS
(Approved)
PERFORMANCE
No Change.
L
Doc. No.: Rev.JR
6.01.01-CS0601 (E) 2006-AUG-08
r DA40AFMS
lADiamond
"T AIRCRAFT
STC No. SAOS-52
CHAPTERS
(Approved)
MASS AND BALANCE
Add:
Airplane Serial No.: Registration: Date:

Description Type Part No. Manufacturer SIN In·
staOed
PROPELLER M1V-12-BI183-59b mt-Propeller
GOVERNOR (OpUonaO P-86().23 mt-Propelter
( DAIC
AFMS (Airplane Right Doc No. 6.01.01-CS0601(E)
Manual Supplement)
CHAPTER 7
(Unapproved)
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS
Note
With the subject Design Change incorporated, the

GARMIN G1000 Integrated AvionicS System
installed in accordance with FAA STC No.
SA01254WJ may also be used.
7.9 POWER PLANT
Doc. No.: Rev.IR

6.01.01-CS0601 (E) 2006-ALIG-08
r DA40AFMS
~&Diamond
"T AIRCRAFT
STC No. SA06·52
7.9.3 PROPELLER
Note
Instead of the original MTV-12-B/180-17 Propeller;

an MTV-12-BI183-59b Scimitar Propeller is used.
All other information in this Section of the basic
AFM concerning the Propeller, af9 still f91evant.
A Woodward Governor, Model C-21 0776 or, an mt-Propeller Governor, Model P-860-23, may be
installed.
7.9.4 ENGINE INSTRUMENTS
( Note
With the subject Design Change incorporated, the

Engine Instruments may be those provided by the
GARMIN G1000 Integrated Avionics System
installed in accordance with FAA STC No.
SA01254Wl or, those originally Type Certified and
Re-Marked in accordance with Diamond Aircraft
Industries GmbH OAM 40-265.
CHAPTER 8
(Unapproved)
AIRPLANE HANDLING, CARE AND MAINTENANCE I
No Change.
CHAPTER 9
(Unapproved) I
Doc. No.:
I
Rev.IR
6.01.01-CS0601(E) 2006-AUG-08
6&Diamond
T A IRCRAFT
DA 40AFMS
STC No. SA06-52
SUPPLEMENTS
Note
Add this Airplane Fligh t Manual Supplement

(AFMS) to Chapter 9 of the Approved Flight Manual
for the aircraft with the subject Design Change
incorporated.
--- END ---
Doc. No.: Rev. JR

6 01.0 1-CS0601 (E) 2006-AUG-08
DA40AFM Supplement ES
DA40DAFM
Baggage Extension,
Baggage Tray
SUPPLEMENT E6
TO THE AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL
DA40 & DA40 D
\:.
OPERATION WITH BAGGAGE EXTENSION

AND BAGGAGE TRAY
Doc. Nos. : 6.01.01-E

: 6.01.05-E
( Date of Issue of the Supplement : 09 Jan 2004

Design Change Advisories OAM 40-163, OAM 40-164
Signature
ACG Project Manager
Abtci!t,;:;; fiuglcchnik
Z..:ntralc
Stamp · A-1030 Wien, Schnirchgasse 11
Date 2 3. FEB. 1004
This Supplement has been verified for EASA by the Austrian Civil Aviation Authority Austro
Control (ACG) as Primary Certification Authority (PCA) in accordance with the valid
Certification Pr9cedures and approved by EASA with approval no.~· --13E8

N.A. OTTO-STR. 5
AUST~IA
Page9-E6-0
DA40AFM Supplement E6
DA40 DAFM
Baggage Extension,
Baggage Tray
r 0.1 RECORD OF REVISIONS
Doc.#6.01.01-E I
Rev.O 09 Jan 2004 Page 9- E6 -1
Doc. # 6.01.05-E
DA40AFM Supplement E&
DA40DAFM
Baggage Extension,
Baggage Tray
r 0.2 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Chapter Page Date

9-E6-0 09Jan 2004
9-E6-1 09Jan 2004
0
9-E6-2 09Jan 2004
9-E6-3 09 Jan 2004
1 9-E6-4 09 Jan 2004
2 9-E6-5 09 Jan 2004
3, 4A, 48,5 9-E6-6 09 Jan 2004
9-E6-7 09 Jan 2004
9-E6-8 09 Jan 2004
( 6
9-E6-9
9-E6-10
09 Jan 2004
09 Jan 2004
9-E6-11 09 Jan 2004
9-E6-12 09 Jan 2004
7,8 9-E6-13 09 Jan 2004
Doc. # 6.01.01-E
Rev.O 09Jan 2004 Page 9- E6- 2
Doc. # 6.01.05-E
DA40 DAFM
Baggage Extension,
Baggage Tray
r 0.3 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL ................................................ 9-E6-4
2. OPERATING LIMITATIONS ................................... 9-E6-5
3. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ................................ 9-E6-6
4A. NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES ......................... 9-E6-6
4B. ABNORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES ....................... 9-E6-6
5. PERFORMANCE ........................................... 9-E6-6
6. MASS AND BALANCE ....................................... 9-E6-7

( 7. DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS ........... 9-E6-13
8. AIRPLANE HANDLING, CARE AND MAINTENANCE .............. 9-E6-13
I Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.O

l Doc. # 6.01.05-E 09 Jan 2004 Page 9- E6- 3
DA40 D AFM
Baggage Extension,
Baggage Tray
'""'
~ .
1. GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This Supplement supplies the information necessary for the efficient operation of the
airplane when the Baggage Extension, with or without the Baggage Tray, is installed. The
baggage area including the Baggage Extension forms the Extended Baggage
Compartment. The information contained within this Supplement is to be used in
conjunction with the complete AFM.
This Supplement to the Airplane Flight Manual is a permanent part of the AFM and must
remain in the AFM at all times when the Extended Baggage Compartment is installed.
The implementation of the design change advisory OAM 40-163 is prerequisite for the
use of the DA 40 IDA 40 D with the Extended Baggage Compartment. The implementation
of the design change advisory OAM 40-164 is prerequisite for the use of the DA 40 I DA
( 40 D with the Baggage Tray. The Baggage Tray may not be used without the Extended
Baggage Compartment. Baggage cannot be carried unless the baggage net is used.
Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Rev. 0 09 Jan 2004 Page 9- E6- 4
Doc. # 6.01.05-E
Supplement E6
DA40AFM
DA40 DAFM
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
Baggage Extension,
Baggage Tray
2. OPERATING LIMITATIONS
2. 7 MASS (WEIGHT)
Max. load in forward baggage compartment alone 45 kg 100 lb

Max. load in aft baggage compartment alone 18kg 401b
Max. load, both baggage compartments together 45 kg 100 lb
Max. surface load in baggage compartments 75 kg/m2 151b/sq.ft.
On Baggage Extension:
FORWARD BAGGAGE AFT BAGGAGE

( COMPARTMENT
MAX. 45 kg [100 lb]
COMPARTMENT
MAX. 18 kg [40 lb]
ARM: 3.89 m [153.1"] ARM: 4.54 m [178.7"]
MAX. BAGGAGE TOTAL 45 kg [100 lb]

MAX. SURFACE LOAD: 75 kg/m 2 [151b/sq.ft.]
CAUTION: OBSERVE WEIGHT AND BALANCE LIMITATIONS
SEE AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL CHAPTER 6
Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Doc. # 6.01.05-E
I Rev. 0 09 Jan 2004 Page 9- E6- 5
DA40 DAFM
Baggage Extension,
Baggage Tray
r 3. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
No change.
4A. NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES
No change.
48. ABNORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES
No change.
(_
5. PERFORMANCE
No change.
Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Rev. 0 09 Jan 2004 Page 9- E6- 6
Doc. # 6.01.05-E
Supplement E6
DA40 AFM
.
~
.Diamond Baggage Extension,
DA40 DAFM AIRCRAFT
Baggage Tray
6. MASS AND BALANCE
6.1 INTRODUCTION
The Extended Baggage Compartment allows a baggage mass of 45 kg (100 lb) to be

carried when the baggage net is installed. The permissible mass and balance envelope
is not changed.
6.4 FLIGHT MASS AND CENTER OF GRAVITY
6.4.1 MOMENT ARMS
-Baggage see diagram
AFT 4.54 m (178.7 in)
FORWARD 3. 89 m (153.1 in)
3.25 m (128 .0 in)
2.63 m (103 .5 in)
2.194 m (86.4 in)
Q)
c: .0
·c:
m
c.
E ~
~
"0
Doc. # 6.01 .01-E

Doc.# 6.01 .05-E
l Rev.O 09 Jan 2004 page 9- E6- 7
~
Load Mass ~
0 0 N
0 0
p p [lb] [kg]
=It: =It:
Q) Q) Front Seats §c
0.....
0
0......
0......
500 f- 225 / z
Ci)
U1
I
m
I
m
f- 200 / Rear ~
Seats~
Fuel Quantity 400
I/
:xs
vv
'---
(!)
:c
0
[USgaI] [liters]
f-
175
v !!:
0
co
50 f-
200 f-
300 f-
150
v/ /
/
~vv /
f- 125
c....
Ill f-
::I 40 f- 150 f-
1\) / /
0
0
~ f- 200 f-
100
v v Fuel
30 f-
75 / /
20 f-
100 f--
f-
f-
~~
v
100 f- 50
~
/
50 -
10 f- f- 25
,Oil
A
I~~ Aft Forward
f--
"ll
Ill
(Q I [kgm]
(!)
co 100 200 300 400 500
m
I
I I I I I I I I
[in.lb]
Q)
I
10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000
00
Load Moment
Supplement E6
DA40AFM
DA40 DAFM
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
Baggage Extension,
Baggage Tray
r 6.4.3 CALCULATION OF LOADING CONDITION
1. Empty mass (from Mass and 781.1 1898.1

Balance Report) 1722 164,750
2. Oil not added -1.7 -1.7

Lever arm: 1.00 m (39.4 in) -3.7 -146
3. Front seats 150 345

Lever arm: 2.30 m (90.6 in) 331 29,989
4. Rear seats 70 227.5

Lever arm: 3.25 m (128.0 in) 154 19,712
5. Forward baggage compt. 25 97.2

Lever arm: 3.89 m (153.1 in) 55 8,421
( 6. Aft baggage compartment

Lever arm: 4.54 m
10
22
45.4
3,931
7. Total mass & total moment

with empty fuel tanks 1034.4 2611.5
2280.3 226,657
(Total of 1.-6.)
8. On-board usable fuel
(0. 72 kg/liter) (6.01 lb!US gal) 109.4 287.7
241 24,944
Lever arm: 2.63 m
9. Total mass & total moment
with full fuel tanks 1143.8 2899.2
2521.3 251,600
(Total 7. plus 8.)
10. The total moments from rows 7 and 9 (2611.5 and 2899.2 kgm) (226,657and251,600
in.lbJ must be divided by the related total mass ( 1034.4 and 1143.8 kg respectively)
(2280.3and2521.3lbJ and then located in Diagram 6.4.4 'PERMISSIBLE CENTER OF
GRAVITY RANGE'.
As in our example CG positions (2.525 m and 2.535 m respectively) (99.4 and 99.8
and masses fall into the
in) area, this loading condition is allowable.
Doc. #6.01.01-E
Doc. # 6.01.05-E
I Rev. 0 09 Jan 2004 Page 9- E6- 9
Supplement E6
DA40AFM
DA40 DAFM
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
Baggage Extension,
Baggage Tray
r 6.4.4 PERMISSIBLE CENTER OF GRAVITY RANGE
Center of Gravity Position [in]

94 96 98 100 102
1150 kg /?535 lb 2600
1150
/ ~·I
1100 :c'
,....., I 2400 ;:::,
C)
......
~
1050 / Normal I
I
rJ)
rJ)
/ I ca
-
rJ)
rJ)
ca 1000 2200 :2
.c
-
:2
.c
.!'2>
u..
950
900
980 kQ /2161 lb I
.
I
.!'2>
-2000 u..
Utilitv & Normal 1 -
850
( 800
I
I 1800
780Kij I 1720 lb
750 I
2.40 2.45 2.50 2.55 2.60

Center of Gravity Position [m]
~ CG
-Em.elope
Rear CG limit for

- - Long Range Tank
Doc.#6.01.01-E
Doc. # 6.01.05-E
I Rev.O 09 Jan 2004 Page 9 - E6 - 10
G)
:.:..
0
0 0
0 u.
p p -a
=It: =It:
FLIGHT MASS MOMENT [in lb)
m
0> 0> :0
0...... 0...... !!::
180.000 c;;
0 0
...... I f/)
CJ1
I
m m
I
iii
r
m
!!::
::0 0
(1) 1100 !!::
- 2400
:<: m
0 z
-1
1-1-----ILI.t__+---+-+ ~~~ ~
-2300
~
z
0
co Ci)
c....
II) ~ 1ooo +-+----+--+--11-----L+--/~f/~/~*_~/~/...:...,"'+----+---h---+---t--l- 2200
11 ;g: m
~ .,.L1vf-.,L-. ,"/.-L-/~ -~-/----+11----+---I_J_-+---H

-~ - 2100 ~
::I
N
0 980 -f-1-+----_-_-_-+----_-_-+-----_-_-+------7'-.qv_-""J0'T-!t/
0
~ ~t/r.yt/v ~
.j:>.
[i / ///
IIt! ::;IJ..
900t-t--~---~-~~~7~/f'7£~+---4--~l+-l-+--~~~-~~- 2000
V/V~;.v I
/~r/ 11
I- 1900
-u I- 1800
II)
cc
(1)
co
I
m 1872 2352 2830 2978

0>
I
...... FLIGHT MASS MOMENT [kgm]
......
DA40 DAFM
Baggage Extension,
Baggage Tray
r 6.5 EQUIPMENT LIST AND EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
Additional equipment required for the operation with the extended baggage compartment
* 1 extended baggage extension installed in accordance with OAM 40-163
* 1 baggage net
Additional optional equipment
* 1 baggage tray and lid installed in accordance with OAM 40-164
Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Rev.O 09 Jan 2004 Page 9 - E6 - 12
Doc. # 6.01.05-E
Supplement E6
DA40AFM
DA40 DAFM
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
Baggage Extension,
Baggage Tray
7. DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS
7.7 BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
The extended baggage compartment consists of the standard baggage compartment

behind the rear seats and the Baggage Extension mounted in the rear bulkhead.
The Baggage Extension has a door that may be hinged up to keep items from sliding aft
or hinged down to carry long items. The Baggage Extension also has a removable panel
in the bottom to allow access for inspection of the rear fuselage area.
The Baggage Tray may be installed in the bottom of the standard baggage compartment.
The lid ofthe Baggage Tray and the bottom ofthe Baggage Extension form a flat loading
surface. The lid has mounting provisions for the tow bar. The space under the lid may
be used to carry small items such as the gust lock and the fuel quantity measuring device.
c Without the baggage net, no baggage may be loaded.
8. AIRPLANE HANDLING. CARE AND MAINTENANCE
No change.
Doc.# 6.01.01-E
Rev.O 09 Jan 2004 Page 9- E6- 13
Doc. # 6.01.05-E
DA40 DAFM
Operation with
Ventilation Inlet Baffle
SUPPLEMENT E7
TO THE AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL
DA40 & DA40D
OPERATION WITH
VENTILATION INLET BAFFLE
Doc. Nos. 6.01.01-E
6.01.05-E
Date of Issue of the Supplement
( Design Change Advisory OAM40-183
Signature
ACG Project Manager
Stamp i\·1031! Wit:L ..... ,; .. c\.E:.~ II
Date of Approval
.f .
.
,.J05
This Supplement has been verified for EASA by the Austrian Civil Aviation Authority
Austro Control (ACG) as Primary Certification Authority (PCA) in accordance with the
valid Certification Procedures and approved by EASA with approval no.2Do~- ~o

N.A. OTTO-STR. 5
AUSTRIA
Page9-E7-0
Supplement E7
DA40AFM
DA40 DAFM
•Diamond
. AIRCRAFT
Operation with
0.1 RECORD OF REVISIONS
Rev. Inserted Signature

No.
Doc. No.: 6.01.01-E OAM40-

Rev. 1 27-Apr-2005 Page 9- E7 -1
Doc. No.: 6.01.05-E 183/a
DA40 DAFM
•Diamond AIRCRAFT
Operation with
r 0.2 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Chapter Page Date

9-E7-0 04-Nov-2004
9-E7-1 27-Apr-2005
0
9-E7-2 27-Apr-2005
9-E7-3 04-Nov-2004
1 9-E7-4 04-Nov-2004
2 9-E7-5 27-Apr-2005
3,4A,48,5 9-E7-6 04-Nov-2004
6, 7,8 9-E7-7 04-Nov-2004
Doc. No.: 6.01.01-E OAM40-

Rev.1 27-Apr-2005 Page9-E7-2
Doc. No.: 6.01.05-E 183/a
Supplement E7
DA40AFM
DA40 DAFM
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
Operation with
Page
1. GENERAL ................................................ 9-E7-4
2. OPERATING LIMITATIONS ................................... 9-E7-5
3. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ................................ 9-E7-6
4A. NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES ......................... 9-E7-6
4B. ABNORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES ....................... 9-E7-6
5. PERFORMANCE ........................................... 9-E7 -6
6. MASS AND BALANCE ....................................... 9-E7-7
7. DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS ............ 9-E7-7
( 8. AIRPLANE HANDLING; CARE AND MAINTENANCE ............... 9-E7-7
L Doc. No.: 6.01.01-E

Rev.O 04-Nov-2004 OAM 40-183 Page 9- E7- 3
Doc. No.: 6.01.05-E
Supplement E7
DA40AFM
DA40 DAFM
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
Operation with
r 1. GENERAL
airplane when the Ventilation Inlet Baffle is installed in the wing. The Ventilation Inlet
Baffle reduces the amount of cooling air entering the cabin. It is recommended for
use when operating at low outside air temperatures. The information contained within
this Supplement is to be used in conjunction with the complete AFM.
This Supplement to the "Airplane Flight Manual DA 40 & DA 40D" is a permanent

part of the AFM and must remain in the AFM at all times when the Winter Baffle is
installed.
The implementation of the design change advisory OAM 40-183 is prerequisite for
the use of the DA 40 or DA 40 D with the Ventilation Inlet Baffle.
(
Doc. No.: 6.01.01-E

Rev. 0 04-Nov-2004 OAM40-183 Page 9- E7 -4
Doc. No.: 6.01.05-E
Supplement E7
DA40AFM
DA40 DAFM
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
Operation with
2. OPERATING LIMITATIONS
On ventilation inlet baffle:
Remove at Outside
Temperatures above
15°C/59°F
(
2.16.1 TEMPERATURE
The airplane may only be operated with the ventilation inlet baffle installed when the
outside air temperature at take-off is does not exceed 15 C (59 F).
Doc. No.: 6.01.01-E OAM

Rev. 1 27-Apr-2005 Page 9- E7- 5
Doc. No.: 6.01.05-E 40-183/a
Supplement E7
DA40AFM
DA40 DAFM
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
Operation with
r 3. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
No change.
4A. NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES
4A.3 CHECKLISTS FOR NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES
4A.3.1 PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTION
Walk-around visual inspection
Left Wing:
-Verify that the outside air temperature permits the use of the ventilation inlet baffle.
- Check ventilation inlet baffle for improper mounting or obvious damage.
48. ABNORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES
No change.
5. PERFORMANCE
No change.
Doc. No.: 6.01.01-E

Rev.O 04-Nov-2004 O.li.M 40-183 Page 9- E7- 6
Doc. No.: 6.01.05-E
Supplement E7
DA40AFM
DA40 DAFM
.Diamond AIRCRAFT
Operation with
6. MASS AND BALANCE
The mass of the ventilation inlet baffle is negligible. The mass and balance data of
the airplane therefore remain unchanged.
Cockpit Ventilation
Unconditioned ambient air is supplied to the interior through an inlet on the bottom
surface of the left wing. To increase cabin temperatures when operating at low
outside air temperatures, a ventilation inlet baffle may be installed at the inlet. With
( the baffle installed, the rear cabin ventilation nozzles on the left and right hand side
and in the central console above the passengers' heads will be inoperative.
The ventilation inlet baffle consists of a metal plate with rubber edging and is
attached to the bottom LH wing by a camloc.
8. AIRPLANE HANDLING: CARE AND MAINTENANCE
No change.
Doc. No.: 6.01.01-E

Rev. 0 04-Nov-2004 OAM40-183 Page9-E7-7
Doc. No.: 6.01.05-E
DA40AFM .DiBI'!'/lJ!! Supplement S1
ELT, E..01
SUPPLEMENT 51
TO THE AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL DA 40
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER

MODEL E·01
ACK
Doc. No. 6.01.01-E

Date of Issue of the Supplement 26 Sep2000
Signature
Authority
Stamp
Date of approval
12. liJU lGOl
This Supplement has been approved for the Joint Aviation Authorities (JAA) by the
Austrian Civil Aviation Authority Austro Control (ACG) as Primary Certification
Authority (PCA) in accordance with the JAA Certification Procedures of the Joint
Aviation Authorities (JAA JCNP).

N.A. OTTO-STR. 5
AUSTRIA
Pagelii·S1-0
Supplement S1
ELT, E-D1
r 0.1 RECORD OF REVISIONS
Rev. Date of Date Signature

Chapter Pages
No. Revision Inserted
1 aile aile 20Apr2001
L
I Doc. # 6.01.01-E I Rev. 1 20 Ap• 2001 IPage 9 - 81 - 1 I
Supplement S1
DA40AFM
ELT, E-01
r- 0.2 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Chapter Page Date

9-51-1 20Apr2001
0 9-51-2 20 Apr2001
9-51-3 20Apr2001
1, 2 9-51-4 20Apr2001
9-51-4 20 Apr 2001
3
9-51-5 20 Apr2001
4A, 48, 5, 6 9-51-6 20 Apr 2001
9-51-7 20 Apr 2001
( 7
9-51-8
9-51-9
20 Apr 2001
20 Apr2001
9-51-10 20 Apr2001
9-51-11 20 Apr2001
8 9-51-11 20Apr2001
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.1 20 Apr 2001 Page 9-51 -2

Supplement S1
ELT, E-01
Page
1. GENERAL ................................................ 9-S1-4
2. OPERATING LIMITATIONS ................................... 9-S1-4
3. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ................................ 9-S1-4
4A. NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES ......................... 9-S1-6
4B. ABNORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES ....................... 9-S1-6
5. PERFORMANCE ........................................... 9-S1-6
6. MASS AND BALANCE ....................................... 9-S1-6
( 7. DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS ............ 9-S1-7
8. AIRPLANE HANDLING, CARE AND MAINTENANCE .............. 9-51-11
Doc. # 6.01.01-E Rev.1 20Apr2001 Page 9- S1- 3

Supplement S1
ELT, E-01
r 1. GENERAL
airplane when the EL T (Emergency Locator Transmitter) ACK Model E-01 is installed.
The information contained within this Supplement is to be used in conjunction with the
complete AFM.
This Supplement is a permanent part of this AFM and must remain in this AFM at all
times when the EL TACK Model E-01 is installed.
2. LIMITATIONS
No change.
( 3. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
Before performing a forced landing, especially in remote and mountainous areas, the
ELT transmitter should be activated manually by pressing the ON-button on the RCPI-
unit. The red LED on the RCPI-unit should flash.
Immediately after a forced landing where emergency assistance is required, the EL T

should be utilized as follows:
CAUTION
The RCPI-unit could be inoperative if damaged during a

forced landing. However, turning the ELT OFF and ON
again requires manual switching of the main switch which is
located on the ELT unit. The following points must then be
executed directly on the ELT -unit.
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.1 20Apr 2001 Page 9- S1- 4
/
Supplement S1
ELT, E-01
1. ENSURE ELT ACTIVATION:
S Press the ON-button on the RCPI-unit, even if the LED flashes.
S If the airplane's radio is operable and can be safely used (no threat of
fire or explosion), turn ON and select 121.5 MHz. If the ELT can be heard
transmitting, it is working properly.
2. PRIOR TO SIGHTING RESCUE AIRCRAFT:
S Conserve airplane battery. Do not activate radio transceiver.
3. AFTER SIGHTING RESCUE AIRCRAFT:
S Press the RESET-button on the RCPI-unit to prevent radio interference.

Attempt contact with rescue aircraft with the radio transceiver set to a
frequency to 121.5 MHz. If no contact is established, press the ON-button
( 4.
on the RCPI-unit immediately.
FOLLOWING RESCUE
S Press the RESET-button on the RCPI-unit, terminating emergency

transmissions.
The EL T may be activated by hard landings or in heavy turbulence. The EL T should

then be reset by pressing the RESET-button on the RCPI-unit. Ensure that the ELT
does not transmit.
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 1 20 Apr 2001 Page 9-51-5

Supplement 81
ELT, E-01
r 4A. NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES
No change.
4B. ABNORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES
No change.
5. PERFORMANCE
No change.
6. MASS AND BALANCE
( Upon removal or installation of the ELT the change of empty mass and corresponding
center of gravity of the airplane must be recorded according to Chapter 6 of the
Airplane Flight Manual.
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 1 20Apr 2001 Page 9-51-6

Supplement 51
ELT, E-01
FRONT VIEW
Red LED flashes, when EL T is transmitting
. .. ...
«iiJ: :; :;; .
Mail} Switch E:LT
RCPi UNlT "'

El T UNIT
;,;
Doc.# 6 .01 .01-E Rev. 1 20 Apr 2001 Page 9- S1- 7

DA40AFM .Dia~f!c'!J! Supplement S1
ELT, E-01
DESCRIPTION
The system consists of a Remote Control (RCPI-Unit, Remote Control

Panel/Indicator), installed in the instrument panel, and the Emergency Locator
Transmitter-Unit (EL T-Unit), which is installed behind the baggage compartment
frame.
An acceleration indicator ('g'-switch) activates the ELT upon sensing a change of

velocity, along the airplane· s longitudinal axis. Therefore the Main-Switch of the EL T-
Unit must be on the 'ARMED' position. The ELT will transmit a distinctive downward
swept tone on the distress frequencies 121.50 MHz and 243.00 MHz. If this signal is
being received, it will initiate a search and rescue operations, and is also used as a
locating signal. The red LED flashes when the ELT is transmitting.
TheELT can also be manually activated, for example for testing or after an emergency
landing. It can be activated either by pushing the ON button on the RCPI-Unit or by
( positioning the Main switch of the ELT to the ON position.
The 'g'-switch can be reset by pressing the RESET button on the RCPI-Unit or by
positioning the Main switch of the ELT to the OFF position.
The ELT-Unit is connected to a antenna which is installed in the airplane. For

operation of the ELT outside the airplane, the ELT has also a portable antenna, which
is located on the mounting tray.
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.1 20Apr2001 Page 9- S1- 8

Supplement S1
DA40AFM
ELT, E-Q1
r GENERAL INFORMATION
To prevent a unintended activation of the ELT, the ELT should only be removed and
transported when the Main Switch of the ELT is on the 'OFF' position, except in case
of emergency.
The EL T might be activated by hard landings or severe turbulence. The EL T should

then be reset by pressing the 'RESET' button, and it has to be checked that the ELTis
not transmitting any more (see also Function Test).
FLIGHT OPERATION
The Main Switch of the ELT must be on the ARMED position during flight. The EL Tis
in standby-mode, that means, the ELT can now be activated by the 'g'-Switch. The
function test (only during the first five minutes of each hour) gives the pilot the
possibility to verify that the ELT is in the 'ARMED'-mode. In 'ARMED'-mode, the ELT
( has no electric power consumption.
OPERATION ON GROUND AFTER AN ACCIDENT
The operation of the ELT outside the airplane may be necessary after an emergency
landing, when the airplane must be left.
At first loosen the interior trim of the baggage compartment frame, which is fixed with
velcro fasteners. The EL Tis located behind the frame, slightly below, on the right side
of the fuselage. Open the mounting tray of the ELT and slide it out of the bracket.
Remove the cable from the ELT, and connect the portable antenna. The antenna is
fixed on the mounting tray. The ELT transmits the distress signal when the Main
Switch is in the 'ON' position. The portable antenna must be fully extended and
pointing skyward.
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev. 1 20Apr 2001 Page 9- S1- 9

Supplement S1
ELT, E-01
At low temperatures it is recommended in order to obtain the longest operating life, to

keep the ELT inside your jacket, with the antenna outside, pointing skyward.
FUNCTION TEST
The following function test must be done every 3 months to verify that the ELT is
operating properly. Regulations require that transmitter tests only be done during the
first 5 minutes of each hour and must not last for more than 3 audio sweeps (approx.
1.5 seconds).
Note that the batteries are replaced when the transmitter has been in use for more
than 1 cumulative hour.
Performing the Test:
( s Monitor 121.50 MHz using the airplane's COM Receiver. Tum the squelch off.
S Press the 'ON'-button on the RCPI-Unit (for maximum 3 sweeps), verify that
the red LED flashes. Verify that the audio sweep tone can be heard on the
COM Receiver. Push the 'RESET-button on the RCPI-Unit. The LED should
stop flashing and the audio sweep tone should stop. If the LED don't stop
flashing and the audio sweep tone is still hearable, the Main Switch on the
ELT-Unit should be set to the OFF position.
Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.1 20Apr2001

Supplement S1
ELT, E-01
r CIRCUIT PROTECTION
TheELTis completely independent of the airplane's electric system. Power for the
EL T -Unit is provided by eight batteries, and one battery for the RCPI-Unit.
Replacement of the batteries is part of the periodic maintenance.
8. AIRPLANE HANDLING. CARE AND MAINTENANCE
No change.
L
l Doc. # 6.01.01-E I Rev. 1 20 AP' 2001 I
Page 9 - 51 - 11 I
iU / V~ / UO , •vn VO : oo rAA ~0 ~ 0~ / O ~ !U • tajU I J
AmSaf ~
lnfta~!Ja~alnts DMslon
1043 r Avenue
Phoenix, pJ., 85043
Documeot No.: E509609
FAA APPROVED
to
PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK AND
FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL
for
Diamond Aircraft lndustrtes, Inc.
Model DA.CO
Aircraft Reg. No. A/21?,06 AfrcraftSIN: ~. 096

'
This supplement must be attached to the Pilot's Operating Handbook and FAA Approved Airplane Flight
Manual for Diamond Aiaaft Model OA 40 when the Airplane Is modified by the installation of AmSafe
Aviation Inflatable Restraint (AAJ~ System, V23 Version in accordance with SIC SA01918LA.
The information contained herein supplements Of supersedes the basic manual only in those areas listed
herein. For limitations, procedures, and performance information not contained in this supplement. consult
the basic Airplane Right ManuaL
~~~~~
FAAAPPROVED~~----~~~~~~~~~~
Ma.nager, Flight Test Branch, ANM-160L
Los~ Alrcnlft CertJflcatlon Office
Transport Airplane Directorate
.Sn...t_J.. It- ~.{" 1 ~ IJ 0 b

DATE __~----------
Page 1 of3
101021 06 MUN 05 : 56 FAA ~H2 627 SZlO FAA~O ANI- lOOL #3 • la!012
~A
Inflatable Restraints
111
Division
AFM Supplement for
AmSafe Aviation Inflatable Restraint System
1043 N. 47 Avenue Diamond Aircraft DA 40
PhoeniX. AZ. 85043 SI C SA01916LA
LOG OF REVISIONS
REV EFFECTED PAGES DESCRIPTION FAA APPROVAL

NO.
IR !TIUe Page 1 of 3 Initial Release ~at.~ 'f~MN""'
Log Page 2 of 3 Manager, Flight Test Branch, ANM-160L
Federal AViation Administration
Page3of3 Los Angeles Aircraft CerUflcatlon Office
Transport Airplane Dlreclorate
Date: s~\u... ~s. ~, o t
I
I
Page2 of3
ANM- lOOL #3 • ~01 3
10/ 0 2 : e : . 0 5 : 56 FAX 562 627 5210
AFM Supplement for
·I lnf\a~~ Restraints
lh
Division Am Safe Aviation Inflatable Restraint System
1043 N. 47 Avenue Diamond Aircraft DA 40
I Phoenix. AZ. 85043
STC SA01918LA
I
I
SECTION 1 GENERAL
The AAIR V23 Is a self-contained, modular, three-point restraint system that improves protection from
serious head-impact injury during a slM"Vivable alrcraft crash by inclusion of an inflatable alrbag within the
lapbeft portion of the three-point restraint. An unbuckled restraint airbag will not inflate.
SECTION2 UMITATIONS
A child safety seat shall not be installed In any seat equipped with the AAIR V23 Inflatable Restraint
System. Child safety seats may be Installed in rear passenger seats equipped with AmSafe standard
restraint PIN 3149-2-021-8157 which does not Include an inflatable airbag.
SECTION 3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
No Change
SECTION4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
To activate the system, join (buckle) the three-point restraint In the same manner as any other three-point
seatbelt. An empty right front seat or empty rear passenger seat restraint may or may not be bucJded at
pilot's discretion.
SECTIONS PERFORMANCE
No Change
SECTION 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE/EQUIPMENT LIST
The addltlon of the AAIR System to each seat posltlon has a negligible effect on the weight and balance
of the Diamond DA 40 aircraft.
For complete Information on the AAIR V23 System effect on weight and balance loading to the aira"aft,
please refer to AmSafe Aviation's, Weight and Balance tnfonnation Report Document No. E509606.
FAA Approved 9/2512006 Page3 of3

Afm Da40

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Afm Da40

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Afm Da40

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL

Airworthiness Category : Normal, Utility

Stamp A-1 030 Wim, Sclmirchgassc 11

Date of approval 0 9. DEZ. Z.Oa4

f Th is Flight Manual has been approved by EASA on behalf of CAAC-MD .

DIAMOND AIRCRAFT INDUSTRIES GMBH

Aircraft Reg. No. N 2 16 DG Aircraft SIN: 40 •698

DATES~~ -?..i~ <)... ll 0 b

0.2 RECORD OF REVISIONS

All revisions of this manual, with the exception of-

L Temporary Revision TR-OAM-40-061 is superseded by the 'permanent' Revision 5.

Doc.# 6.01.01-E Rev.8 01-Dec-2010 Page 0-1

0 0-2, 0-4 thru 0-7

2-1, 2-7thru 2-9,

1-2. 1-5, 1-14

MAM 40-039/a 7-13,7-14,7-33,

9 9-3, 9-4. 9-5

0.3 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

0 0-0 15-Sep-2004 1-1 01-Dec-2010

r 2 I appr. 2-1 01-Dec-201 0 2 appr. 2-28 01-Dec-2010

appr. 2-2 01-Dec-2010 appr. 2-29 01-Dec-2010

appr. 2-3 01-Dec-201 0 appr. 2-30 01-Dec-2010

appr. 2-4 01-Dec-2010 appr. 2-31 01-Dec-2010

appr. 2-5 01-Dec-201 0 appr. 2-32 01-Dec-2010

appr. 2-6 01-Dec-2010 appr. 2-33 01-Dec-2010

appr. 2-7 01-Dec-2010 appr. 2-34 01-Dec-2010

appr. 2-8 01-Dec-2010

appr. 2-10 01-Dec-2010

appr. 2-11 01-Dec-2010

appr. 2-12 01-Dec-201 0

appr. 2-14 01-Dec-201 0

appr. 2-15 01-Dec-2010

appr. 2-16 01-Dec-201 0

appr. 2-17 01-Dec-2010

appr. 2-18 01-Dec-2010

appr. 2-21 01-Dec-201 0

appr. 2-22 01-Dec-201 0

appr. 2-23 01-Dec-2010

appr. 2-24 01-Dec-201 0

appr. 2-25 01-Dec-2010

I Doc.# 6.01.01-E I Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 I Page 0-7 I

3-2 01-Dec-201 0 3-30 01-Dec-2010

3-3 01-Dec-2010 3-31 01-Dec-2010

3-4 01-Dec-201 0 3-32 01-Dec-2010

3-5 01-Dec-2010 3-33 01-Dec-201 0

3-6 01-Dec-201 0 3-34 01-Dec-201 0

3-7 01-Dec-201 0 3-35 01-Dec-2010

3-8 01-Dec-201 0 3-36 01-Dec-2010

3-9 01-Dec-2010 3-37 01-Dec-201 0

3-10 01-Dec-201 0 3-38 01-Dec-2010

3-11 01-Dec-2010 3-39 01-Dec-2010

3-12 01-Dec-201 0 3-40 01-Dec-201 0

3-13 01-Dec-201 0 3-41

Page 0-8 Rev. 8 01-Dec-2010 Doc.# 6.01.01-E

4A-2 01-Dec-201 0 4A-29 01-Dec-201 0

4A-3 01-Dec-201 0 4A-30 01-Dec-2010

4A-4 01-Dec-201 0 4A-31 01-Dec-2010

4A-5 01-Dec-201 0 4A-32 01-Dec-2010

4A-6 01-Dec-2010 4A-33 01-Dec-2010